tile38/vendor/github.com/aws/aws-sdk-go/service/mediaconvert/api.go

// Code generated by private/model/cli/gen-api/main.go. DO NOT EDIT.

package mediaconvert

import (
	"fmt"
	"time"

	"github.com/aws/aws-sdk-go/aws"
	"github.com/aws/aws-sdk-go/aws/awsutil"
	"github.com/aws/aws-sdk-go/aws/request"
	"github.com/aws/aws-sdk-go/private/protocol"
	"github.com/aws/aws-sdk-go/private/protocol/restjson"
)

const opAssociateCertificate = "AssociateCertificate"

// AssociateCertificateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the AssociateCertificate operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See AssociateCertificate for more information on using the AssociateCertificate
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the AssociateCertificateRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.AssociateCertificateRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/AssociateCertificate
func (c *MediaConvert) AssociateCertificateRequest(input *AssociateCertificateInput) (req *request.Request, output *AssociateCertificateOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opAssociateCertificate,
		HTTPMethod: "POST",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/certificates",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &AssociateCertificateInput{}
	}

	output = &AssociateCertificateOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// AssociateCertificate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Associates an AWS Certificate Manager (ACM) Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with
// AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation AssociateCertificate for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/AssociateCertificate
func (c *MediaConvert) AssociateCertificate(input *AssociateCertificateInput) (*AssociateCertificateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.AssociateCertificateRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// AssociateCertificateWithContext is the same as AssociateCertificate with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See AssociateCertificate for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) AssociateCertificateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *AssociateCertificateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*AssociateCertificateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.AssociateCertificateRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opCancelJob = "CancelJob"

// CancelJobRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the CancelJob operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See CancelJob for more information on using the CancelJob
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the CancelJobRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.CancelJobRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CancelJob
func (c *MediaConvert) CancelJobRequest(input *CancelJobInput) (req *request.Request, output *CancelJobOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opCancelJob,
		HTTPMethod: "DELETE",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobs/{id}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &CancelJobInput{}
	}

	output = &CancelJobOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// CancelJob API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Permanently cancel a job. Once you have canceled a job, you can't start it
// again.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation CancelJob for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CancelJob
func (c *MediaConvert) CancelJob(input *CancelJobInput) (*CancelJobOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CancelJobRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// CancelJobWithContext is the same as CancelJob with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See CancelJob for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) CancelJobWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CancelJobInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CancelJobOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CancelJobRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opCreateJob = "CreateJob"

// CreateJobRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the CreateJob operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See CreateJob for more information on using the CreateJob
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the CreateJobRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.CreateJobRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJob
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobRequest(input *CreateJobInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreateJobOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opCreateJob,
		HTTPMethod: "POST",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobs",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &CreateJobInput{}
	}

	output = &CreateJobOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// CreateJob API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Create a new transcoding job. For information about jobs and job settings,
// see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation CreateJob for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJob
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJob(input *CreateJobInput) (*CreateJobOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreateJobRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// CreateJobWithContext is the same as CreateJob with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See CreateJob for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreateJobInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreateJobOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreateJobRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opCreateJobTemplate = "CreateJobTemplate"

// CreateJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the CreateJobTemplate operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See CreateJobTemplate for more information on using the CreateJobTemplate
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the CreateJobTemplateRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.CreateJobTemplateRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplateRequest(input *CreateJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreateJobTemplateOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opCreateJobTemplate,
		HTTPMethod: "POST",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobTemplates",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &CreateJobTemplateInput{}
	}

	output = &CreateJobTemplateOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// CreateJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Create a new job template. For information about job templates see the User
// Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation CreateJobTemplate for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplate(input *CreateJobTemplateInput) (*CreateJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreateJobTemplateRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// CreateJobTemplateWithContext is the same as CreateJobTemplate with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See CreateJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreateJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreateJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreateJobTemplateRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opCreatePreset = "CreatePreset"

// CreatePresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the CreatePreset operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See CreatePreset for more information on using the CreatePreset
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the CreatePresetRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.CreatePresetRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreatePreset
func (c *MediaConvert) CreatePresetRequest(input *CreatePresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreatePresetOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opCreatePreset,
		HTTPMethod: "POST",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/presets",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &CreatePresetInput{}
	}

	output = &CreatePresetOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// CreatePreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Create a new preset. For information about job templates see the User Guide
// at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation CreatePreset for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreatePreset
func (c *MediaConvert) CreatePreset(input *CreatePresetInput) (*CreatePresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreatePresetRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// CreatePresetWithContext is the same as CreatePreset with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See CreatePreset for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) CreatePresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreatePresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreatePresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreatePresetRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opCreateQueue = "CreateQueue"

// CreateQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the CreateQueue operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See CreateQueue for more information on using the CreateQueue
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the CreateQueueRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.CreateQueueRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateQueueRequest(input *CreateQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *CreateQueueOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opCreateQueue,
		HTTPMethod: "POST",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/queues",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &CreateQueueInput{}
	}

	output = &CreateQueueOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// CreateQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Create a new transcoding queue. For information about queues, see Working
// With Queues in the User Guide at https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation CreateQueue for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/CreateQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateQueue(input *CreateQueueInput) (*CreateQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreateQueueRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// CreateQueueWithContext is the same as CreateQueue with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See CreateQueue for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) CreateQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *CreateQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*CreateQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.CreateQueueRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opDeleteJobTemplate = "DeleteJobTemplate"

// DeleteJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the DeleteJobTemplate operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See DeleteJobTemplate for more information on using the DeleteJobTemplate
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the DeleteJobTemplateRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.DeleteJobTemplateRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplateRequest(input *DeleteJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *DeleteJobTemplateOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opDeleteJobTemplate,
		HTTPMethod: "DELETE",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobTemplates/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &DeleteJobTemplateInput{}
	}

	output = &DeleteJobTemplateOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// DeleteJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Permanently delete a job template you have created.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation DeleteJobTemplate for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplate(input *DeleteJobTemplateInput) (*DeleteJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DeleteJobTemplateRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// DeleteJobTemplateWithContext is the same as DeleteJobTemplate with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See DeleteJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DeleteJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DeleteJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DeleteJobTemplateRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opDeletePreset = "DeletePreset"

// DeletePresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the DeletePreset operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See DeletePreset for more information on using the DeletePreset
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the DeletePresetRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.DeletePresetRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeletePreset
func (c *MediaConvert) DeletePresetRequest(input *DeletePresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *DeletePresetOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opDeletePreset,
		HTTPMethod: "DELETE",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/presets/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &DeletePresetInput{}
	}

	output = &DeletePresetOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// DeletePreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Permanently delete a preset you have created.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation DeletePreset for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeletePreset
func (c *MediaConvert) DeletePreset(input *DeletePresetInput) (*DeletePresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DeletePresetRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// DeletePresetWithContext is the same as DeletePreset with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See DeletePreset for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) DeletePresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DeletePresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DeletePresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DeletePresetRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opDeleteQueue = "DeleteQueue"

// DeleteQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the DeleteQueue operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See DeleteQueue for more information on using the DeleteQueue
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the DeleteQueueRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.DeleteQueueRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteQueueRequest(input *DeleteQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *DeleteQueueOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opDeleteQueue,
		HTTPMethod: "DELETE",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/queues/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &DeleteQueueInput{}
	}

	output = &DeleteQueueOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// DeleteQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Permanently delete a queue you have created.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation DeleteQueue for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DeleteQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteQueue(input *DeleteQueueInput) (*DeleteQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DeleteQueueRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// DeleteQueueWithContext is the same as DeleteQueue with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See DeleteQueue for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) DeleteQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DeleteQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DeleteQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DeleteQueueRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opDescribeEndpoints = "DescribeEndpoints"

// DescribeEndpointsRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the DescribeEndpoints operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See DescribeEndpoints for more information on using the DescribeEndpoints
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the DescribeEndpointsRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.DescribeEndpointsRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DescribeEndpoints
func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsRequest(input *DescribeEndpointsInput) (req *request.Request, output *DescribeEndpointsOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opDescribeEndpoints,
		HTTPMethod: "POST",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/endpoints",
		Paginator: &request.Paginator{
			InputTokens:     []string{"NextToken"},
			OutputTokens:    []string{"NextToken"},
			LimitToken:      "MaxResults",
			TruncationToken: "",
		},
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &DescribeEndpointsInput{}
	}

	output = &DescribeEndpointsOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// DescribeEndpoints API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Send an request with an empty body to the regional API endpoint to get your
// account API endpoint.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation DescribeEndpoints for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DescribeEndpoints
func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpoints(input *DescribeEndpointsInput) (*DescribeEndpointsOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DescribeEndpointsRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// DescribeEndpointsWithContext is the same as DescribeEndpoints with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See DescribeEndpoints for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DescribeEndpointsInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DescribeEndpointsOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DescribeEndpointsRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// DescribeEndpointsPages iterates over the pages of a DescribeEndpoints operation,
// calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop
// iterating, return false from the fn function.
//
// See DescribeEndpoints method for more information on how to use this operation.
//
// Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service.
//
//    // Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a DescribeEndpoints operation.
//    pageNum := 0
//    err := client.DescribeEndpointsPages(params,
//        func(page *DescribeEndpointsOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
//            pageNum++
//            fmt.Println(page)
//            return pageNum <= 3
//        })
//
func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsPages(input *DescribeEndpointsInput, fn func(*DescribeEndpointsOutput, bool) bool) error {
	return c.DescribeEndpointsPagesWithContext(aws.BackgroundContext(), input, fn)
}

// DescribeEndpointsPagesWithContext same as DescribeEndpointsPages except
// it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) DescribeEndpointsPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DescribeEndpointsInput, fn func(*DescribeEndpointsOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error {
	p := request.Pagination{
		NewRequest: func() (*request.Request, error) {
			var inCpy *DescribeEndpointsInput
			if input != nil {
				tmp := *input
				inCpy = &tmp
			}
			req, _ := c.DescribeEndpointsRequest(inCpy)
			req.SetContext(ctx)
			req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
			return req, nil
		},
	}

	cont := true
	for p.Next() && cont {
		cont = fn(p.Page().(*DescribeEndpointsOutput), !p.HasNextPage())
	}
	return p.Err()
}

const opDisassociateCertificate = "DisassociateCertificate"

// DisassociateCertificateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the DisassociateCertificate operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See DisassociateCertificate for more information on using the DisassociateCertificate
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the DisassociateCertificateRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.DisassociateCertificateRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DisassociateCertificate
func (c *MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificateRequest(input *DisassociateCertificateInput) (req *request.Request, output *DisassociateCertificateOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opDisassociateCertificate,
		HTTPMethod: "DELETE",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/certificates/{arn}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &DisassociateCertificateInput{}
	}

	output = &DisassociateCertificateOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// DisassociateCertificate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Removes an association between the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an AWS Certificate
// Manager (ACM) certificate and an AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation DisassociateCertificate for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/DisassociateCertificate
func (c *MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificate(input *DisassociateCertificateInput) (*DisassociateCertificateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DisassociateCertificateRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// DisassociateCertificateWithContext is the same as DisassociateCertificate with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See DisassociateCertificate for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) DisassociateCertificateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *DisassociateCertificateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*DisassociateCertificateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.DisassociateCertificateRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opGetJob = "GetJob"

// GetJobRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the GetJob operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See GetJob for more information on using the GetJob
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the GetJobRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.GetJobRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJob
func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobRequest(input *GetJobInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetJobOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opGetJob,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobs/{id}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &GetJobInput{}
	}

	output = &GetJobOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// GetJob API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve the JSON for a specific completed transcoding job.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation GetJob for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJob
func (c *MediaConvert) GetJob(input *GetJobInput) (*GetJobOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetJobRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// GetJobWithContext is the same as GetJob with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See GetJob for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetJobInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetJobOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetJobRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opGetJobTemplate = "GetJobTemplate"

// GetJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the GetJobTemplate operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See GetJobTemplate for more information on using the GetJobTemplate
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the GetJobTemplateRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.GetJobTemplateRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobTemplateRequest(input *GetJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetJobTemplateOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opGetJobTemplate,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobTemplates/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &GetJobTemplateInput{}
	}

	output = &GetJobTemplateOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// GetJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve the JSON for a specific job template.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation GetJobTemplate for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobTemplate(input *GetJobTemplateInput) (*GetJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetJobTemplateRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// GetJobTemplateWithContext is the same as GetJobTemplate with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See GetJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) GetJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetJobTemplateRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opGetPreset = "GetPreset"

// GetPresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the GetPreset operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See GetPreset for more information on using the GetPreset
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the GetPresetRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.GetPresetRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetPreset
func (c *MediaConvert) GetPresetRequest(input *GetPresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetPresetOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opGetPreset,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/presets/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &GetPresetInput{}
	}

	output = &GetPresetOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// GetPreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve the JSON for a specific preset.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation GetPreset for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetPreset
func (c *MediaConvert) GetPreset(input *GetPresetInput) (*GetPresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetPresetRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// GetPresetWithContext is the same as GetPreset with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See GetPreset for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) GetPresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetPresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetPresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetPresetRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opGetQueue = "GetQueue"

// GetQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the GetQueue operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See GetQueue for more information on using the GetQueue
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the GetQueueRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.GetQueueRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) GetQueueRequest(input *GetQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *GetQueueOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opGetQueue,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/queues/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &GetQueueInput{}
	}

	output = &GetQueueOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// GetQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve the JSON for a specific queue.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation GetQueue for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/GetQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) GetQueue(input *GetQueueInput) (*GetQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetQueueRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// GetQueueWithContext is the same as GetQueue with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See GetQueue for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) GetQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *GetQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*GetQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.GetQueueRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opListJobTemplates = "ListJobTemplates"

// ListJobTemplatesRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the ListJobTemplates operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See ListJobTemplates for more information on using the ListJobTemplates
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the ListJobTemplatesRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.ListJobTemplatesRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobTemplates
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesRequest(input *ListJobTemplatesInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListJobTemplatesOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opListJobTemplates,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobTemplates",
		Paginator: &request.Paginator{
			InputTokens:     []string{"NextToken"},
			OutputTokens:    []string{"NextToken"},
			LimitToken:      "MaxResults",
			TruncationToken: "",
		},
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &ListJobTemplatesInput{}
	}

	output = &ListJobTemplatesOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// ListJobTemplates API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your job templates. This will return
// the templates themselves, not just a list of them. To retrieve the next twenty
// templates, use the nextToken string returned with the array
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation ListJobTemplates for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobTemplates
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplates(input *ListJobTemplatesInput) (*ListJobTemplatesOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListJobTemplatesRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListJobTemplatesWithContext is the same as ListJobTemplates with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See ListJobTemplates for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobTemplatesInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListJobTemplatesOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListJobTemplatesRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListJobTemplatesPages iterates over the pages of a ListJobTemplates operation,
// calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop
// iterating, return false from the fn function.
//
// See ListJobTemplates method for more information on how to use this operation.
//
// Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service.
//
//    // Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListJobTemplates operation.
//    pageNum := 0
//    err := client.ListJobTemplatesPages(params,
//        func(page *ListJobTemplatesOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
//            pageNum++
//            fmt.Println(page)
//            return pageNum <= 3
//        })
//
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesPages(input *ListJobTemplatesInput, fn func(*ListJobTemplatesOutput, bool) bool) error {
	return c.ListJobTemplatesPagesWithContext(aws.BackgroundContext(), input, fn)
}

// ListJobTemplatesPagesWithContext same as ListJobTemplatesPages except
// it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobTemplatesPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobTemplatesInput, fn func(*ListJobTemplatesOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error {
	p := request.Pagination{
		NewRequest: func() (*request.Request, error) {
			var inCpy *ListJobTemplatesInput
			if input != nil {
				tmp := *input
				inCpy = &tmp
			}
			req, _ := c.ListJobTemplatesRequest(inCpy)
			req.SetContext(ctx)
			req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
			return req, nil
		},
	}

	cont := true
	for p.Next() && cont {
		cont = fn(p.Page().(*ListJobTemplatesOutput), !p.HasNextPage())
	}
	return p.Err()
}

const opListJobs = "ListJobs"

// ListJobsRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the ListJobs operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See ListJobs for more information on using the ListJobs
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the ListJobsRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.ListJobsRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobs
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsRequest(input *ListJobsInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListJobsOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opListJobs,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobs",
		Paginator: &request.Paginator{
			InputTokens:     []string{"NextToken"},
			OutputTokens:    []string{"NextToken"},
			LimitToken:      "MaxResults",
			TruncationToken: "",
		},
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &ListJobsInput{}
	}

	output = &ListJobsOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// ListJobs API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your most recently created jobs.
// This array includes in-process, completed, and errored jobs. This will return
// the jobs themselves, not just a list of the jobs. To retrieve the twenty
// next most recent jobs, use the nextToken string returned with the array.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation ListJobs for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListJobs
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobs(input *ListJobsInput) (*ListJobsOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListJobsRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListJobsWithContext is the same as ListJobs with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See ListJobs for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobsInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListJobsOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListJobsRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListJobsPages iterates over the pages of a ListJobs operation,
// calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop
// iterating, return false from the fn function.
//
// See ListJobs method for more information on how to use this operation.
//
// Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service.
//
//    // Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListJobs operation.
//    pageNum := 0
//    err := client.ListJobsPages(params,
//        func(page *ListJobsOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
//            pageNum++
//            fmt.Println(page)
//            return pageNum <= 3
//        })
//
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsPages(input *ListJobsInput, fn func(*ListJobsOutput, bool) bool) error {
	return c.ListJobsPagesWithContext(aws.BackgroundContext(), input, fn)
}

// ListJobsPagesWithContext same as ListJobsPages except
// it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListJobsPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListJobsInput, fn func(*ListJobsOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error {
	p := request.Pagination{
		NewRequest: func() (*request.Request, error) {
			var inCpy *ListJobsInput
			if input != nil {
				tmp := *input
				inCpy = &tmp
			}
			req, _ := c.ListJobsRequest(inCpy)
			req.SetContext(ctx)
			req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
			return req, nil
		},
	}

	cont := true
	for p.Next() && cont {
		cont = fn(p.Page().(*ListJobsOutput), !p.HasNextPage())
	}
	return p.Err()
}

const opListPresets = "ListPresets"

// ListPresetsRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the ListPresets operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See ListPresets for more information on using the ListPresets
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the ListPresetsRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.ListPresetsRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListPresets
func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsRequest(input *ListPresetsInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListPresetsOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opListPresets,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/presets",
		Paginator: &request.Paginator{
			InputTokens:     []string{"NextToken"},
			OutputTokens:    []string{"NextToken"},
			LimitToken:      "MaxResults",
			TruncationToken: "",
		},
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &ListPresetsInput{}
	}

	output = &ListPresetsOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// ListPresets API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your presets. This will return the
// presets themselves, not just a list of them. To retrieve the next twenty
// presets, use the nextToken string returned with the array.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation ListPresets for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListPresets
func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresets(input *ListPresetsInput) (*ListPresetsOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListPresetsRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListPresetsWithContext is the same as ListPresets with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See ListPresets for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListPresetsInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListPresetsOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListPresetsRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListPresetsPages iterates over the pages of a ListPresets operation,
// calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop
// iterating, return false from the fn function.
//
// See ListPresets method for more information on how to use this operation.
//
// Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service.
//
//    // Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListPresets operation.
//    pageNum := 0
//    err := client.ListPresetsPages(params,
//        func(page *ListPresetsOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
//            pageNum++
//            fmt.Println(page)
//            return pageNum <= 3
//        })
//
func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsPages(input *ListPresetsInput, fn func(*ListPresetsOutput, bool) bool) error {
	return c.ListPresetsPagesWithContext(aws.BackgroundContext(), input, fn)
}

// ListPresetsPagesWithContext same as ListPresetsPages except
// it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListPresetsPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListPresetsInput, fn func(*ListPresetsOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error {
	p := request.Pagination{
		NewRequest: func() (*request.Request, error) {
			var inCpy *ListPresetsInput
			if input != nil {
				tmp := *input
				inCpy = &tmp
			}
			req, _ := c.ListPresetsRequest(inCpy)
			req.SetContext(ctx)
			req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
			return req, nil
		},
	}

	cont := true
	for p.Next() && cont {
		cont = fn(p.Page().(*ListPresetsOutput), !p.HasNextPage())
	}
	return p.Err()
}

const opListQueues = "ListQueues"

// ListQueuesRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the ListQueues operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See ListQueues for more information on using the ListQueues
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the ListQueuesRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.ListQueuesRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListQueues
func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesRequest(input *ListQueuesInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListQueuesOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opListQueues,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/queues",
		Paginator: &request.Paginator{
			InputTokens:     []string{"NextToken"},
			OutputTokens:    []string{"NextToken"},
			LimitToken:      "MaxResults",
			TruncationToken: "",
		},
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &ListQueuesInput{}
	}

	output = &ListQueuesOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// ListQueues API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve a JSON array of up to twenty of your queues. This will return the
// queues themselves, not just a list of them. To retrieve the next twenty queues,
// use the nextToken string returned with the array.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation ListQueues for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListQueues
func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueues(input *ListQueuesInput) (*ListQueuesOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListQueuesRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListQueuesWithContext is the same as ListQueues with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See ListQueues for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListQueuesInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListQueuesOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListQueuesRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListQueuesPages iterates over the pages of a ListQueues operation,
// calling the "fn" function with the response data for each page. To stop
// iterating, return false from the fn function.
//
// See ListQueues method for more information on how to use this operation.
//
// Note: This operation can generate multiple requests to a service.
//
//    // Example iterating over at most 3 pages of a ListQueues operation.
//    pageNum := 0
//    err := client.ListQueuesPages(params,
//        func(page *ListQueuesOutput, lastPage bool) bool {
//            pageNum++
//            fmt.Println(page)
//            return pageNum <= 3
//        })
//
func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesPages(input *ListQueuesInput, fn func(*ListQueuesOutput, bool) bool) error {
	return c.ListQueuesPagesWithContext(aws.BackgroundContext(), input, fn)
}

// ListQueuesPagesWithContext same as ListQueuesPages except
// it takes a Context and allows setting request options on the pages.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListQueuesPagesWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListQueuesInput, fn func(*ListQueuesOutput, bool) bool, opts ...request.Option) error {
	p := request.Pagination{
		NewRequest: func() (*request.Request, error) {
			var inCpy *ListQueuesInput
			if input != nil {
				tmp := *input
				inCpy = &tmp
			}
			req, _ := c.ListQueuesRequest(inCpy)
			req.SetContext(ctx)
			req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
			return req, nil
		},
	}

	cont := true
	for p.Next() && cont {
		cont = fn(p.Page().(*ListQueuesOutput), !p.HasNextPage())
	}
	return p.Err()
}

const opListTagsForResource = "ListTagsForResource"

// ListTagsForResourceRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the ListTagsForResource operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See ListTagsForResource for more information on using the ListTagsForResource
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the ListTagsForResourceRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.ListTagsForResourceRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListTagsForResource
func (c *MediaConvert) ListTagsForResourceRequest(input *ListTagsForResourceInput) (req *request.Request, output *ListTagsForResourceOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opListTagsForResource,
		HTTPMethod: "GET",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/tags/{arn}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &ListTagsForResourceInput{}
	}

	output = &ListTagsForResourceOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// ListTagsForResource API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Retrieve the tags for a MediaConvert resource.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation ListTagsForResource for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/ListTagsForResource
func (c *MediaConvert) ListTagsForResource(input *ListTagsForResourceInput) (*ListTagsForResourceOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListTagsForResourceRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// ListTagsForResourceWithContext is the same as ListTagsForResource with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See ListTagsForResource for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) ListTagsForResourceWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *ListTagsForResourceInput, opts ...request.Option) (*ListTagsForResourceOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.ListTagsForResourceRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opTagResource = "TagResource"

// TagResourceRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the TagResource operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See TagResource for more information on using the TagResource
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the TagResourceRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.TagResourceRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/TagResource
func (c *MediaConvert) TagResourceRequest(input *TagResourceInput) (req *request.Request, output *TagResourceOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opTagResource,
		HTTPMethod: "POST",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/tags",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &TagResourceInput{}
	}

	output = &TagResourceOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// TagResource API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Add tags to a MediaConvert queue, preset, or job template. For information
// about tagging, see the User Guide at https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/tagging-resources.html
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation TagResource for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/TagResource
func (c *MediaConvert) TagResource(input *TagResourceInput) (*TagResourceOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.TagResourceRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// TagResourceWithContext is the same as TagResource with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See TagResource for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) TagResourceWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *TagResourceInput, opts ...request.Option) (*TagResourceOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.TagResourceRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opUntagResource = "UntagResource"

// UntagResourceRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the UntagResource operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See UntagResource for more information on using the UntagResource
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the UntagResourceRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.UntagResourceRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UntagResource
func (c *MediaConvert) UntagResourceRequest(input *UntagResourceInput) (req *request.Request, output *UntagResourceOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opUntagResource,
		HTTPMethod: "PUT",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/tags/{arn}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &UntagResourceInput{}
	}

	output = &UntagResourceOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	req.Handlers.Unmarshal.Swap(restjson.UnmarshalHandler.Name, protocol.UnmarshalDiscardBodyHandler)
	return
}

// UntagResource API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Remove tags from a MediaConvert queue, preset, or job template. For information
// about tagging, see the User Guide at https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/tagging-resources.html
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation UntagResource for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UntagResource
func (c *MediaConvert) UntagResource(input *UntagResourceInput) (*UntagResourceOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UntagResourceRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// UntagResourceWithContext is the same as UntagResource with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See UntagResource for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) UntagResourceWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UntagResourceInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UntagResourceOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UntagResourceRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opUpdateJobTemplate = "UpdateJobTemplate"

// UpdateJobTemplateRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the UpdateJobTemplate operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See UpdateJobTemplate for more information on using the UpdateJobTemplate
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the UpdateJobTemplateRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.UpdateJobTemplateRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplateRequest(input *UpdateJobTemplateInput) (req *request.Request, output *UpdateJobTemplateOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opUpdateJobTemplate,
		HTTPMethod: "PUT",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/jobTemplates/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &UpdateJobTemplateInput{}
	}

	output = &UpdateJobTemplateOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// UpdateJobTemplate API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Modify one of your existing job templates.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation UpdateJobTemplate for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateJobTemplate
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplate(input *UpdateJobTemplateInput) (*UpdateJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UpdateJobTemplateRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// UpdateJobTemplateWithContext is the same as UpdateJobTemplate with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See UpdateJobTemplate for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateJobTemplateWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UpdateJobTemplateInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UpdateJobTemplateOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UpdateJobTemplateRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opUpdatePreset = "UpdatePreset"

// UpdatePresetRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the UpdatePreset operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See UpdatePreset for more information on using the UpdatePreset
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the UpdatePresetRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.UpdatePresetRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdatePreset
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdatePresetRequest(input *UpdatePresetInput) (req *request.Request, output *UpdatePresetOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opUpdatePreset,
		HTTPMethod: "PUT",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/presets/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &UpdatePresetInput{}
	}

	output = &UpdatePresetOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// UpdatePreset API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Modify one of your existing presets.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation UpdatePreset for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdatePreset
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdatePreset(input *UpdatePresetInput) (*UpdatePresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UpdatePresetRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// UpdatePresetWithContext is the same as UpdatePreset with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See UpdatePreset for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdatePresetWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UpdatePresetInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UpdatePresetOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UpdatePresetRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

const opUpdateQueue = "UpdateQueue"

// UpdateQueueRequest generates a "aws/request.Request" representing the
// client's request for the UpdateQueue operation. The "output" return
// value will be populated with the request's response once the request completes
// successfully.
//
// Use "Send" method on the returned Request to send the API call to the service.
// the "output" return value is not valid until after Send returns without error.
//
// See UpdateQueue for more information on using the UpdateQueue
// API call, and error handling.
//
// This method is useful when you want to inject custom logic or configuration
// into the SDK's request lifecycle. Such as custom headers, or retry logic.
//
//
//    // Example sending a request using the UpdateQueueRequest method.
//    req, resp := client.UpdateQueueRequest(params)
//
//    err := req.Send()
//    if err == nil { // resp is now filled
//        fmt.Println(resp)
//    }
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateQueueRequest(input *UpdateQueueInput) (req *request.Request, output *UpdateQueueOutput) {
	op := &request.Operation{
		Name:       opUpdateQueue,
		HTTPMethod: "PUT",
		HTTPPath:   "/2017-08-29/queues/{name}",
	}

	if input == nil {
		input = &UpdateQueueInput{}
	}

	output = &UpdateQueueOutput{}
	req = c.newRequest(op, input, output)
	return
}

// UpdateQueue API operation for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
//
// Modify one of your existing queues.
//
// Returns awserr.Error for service API and SDK errors. Use runtime type assertions
// with awserr.Error's Code and Message methods to get detailed information about
// the error.
//
// See the AWS API reference guide for AWS Elemental MediaConvert's
// API operation UpdateQueue for usage and error information.
//
// Returned Error Codes:
//   * ErrCodeBadRequestException "BadRequestException"
//
//   * ErrCodeInternalServerErrorException "InternalServerErrorException"
//
//   * ErrCodeForbiddenException "ForbiddenException"
//
//   * ErrCodeNotFoundException "NotFoundException"
//
//   * ErrCodeTooManyRequestsException "TooManyRequestsException"
//
//   * ErrCodeConflictException "ConflictException"
//
// See also, https://docs.aws.amazon.com/goto/WebAPI/mediaconvert-2017-08-29/UpdateQueue
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateQueue(input *UpdateQueueInput) (*UpdateQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UpdateQueueRequest(input)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// UpdateQueueWithContext is the same as UpdateQueue with the addition of
// the ability to pass a context and additional request options.
//
// See UpdateQueue for details on how to use this API operation.
//
// The context must be non-nil and will be used for request cancellation. If
// the context is nil a panic will occur. In the future the SDK may create
// sub-contexts for http.Requests. See https://golang.org/pkg/context/
// for more information on using Contexts.
func (c *MediaConvert) UpdateQueueWithContext(ctx aws.Context, input *UpdateQueueInput, opts ...request.Option) (*UpdateQueueOutput, error) {
	req, out := c.UpdateQueueRequest(input)
	req.SetContext(ctx)
	req.ApplyOptions(opts...)
	return out, req.Send()
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value AAC. The service accepts one of two mutually exclusive groups of
// AAC settings--VBR and CBR. To select one of these modes, set the value of
// Bitrate control mode (rateControlMode) to "VBR" or "CBR". In VBR mode, you
// control the audio quality with the setting VBR quality (vbrQuality). In CBR
// mode, you use the setting Bitrate (bitrate). Defaults and valid values depend
// on the rate control mode.
type AacSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD when the input contains pre-mixed main audio
	// + audio description (AD) as a stereo pair. The value for AudioType will be
	// set to 3, which signals to downstream systems that this stream contains "broadcaster
	// mixed AD". Note that the input received by the encoder must contain pre-mixed
	// audio; the encoder does not perform the mixing. When you choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD,
	// the encoder ignores any values you provide in AudioType and FollowInputAudioType.
	// Choose NORMAL when the input does not contain pre-mixed audio + audio description
	// (AD). In this case, the encoder will use any values you provide for AudioType
	// and FollowInputAudioType.
	AudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix *string `locationName:"audioDescriptionBroadcasterMix" type:"string" enum:"AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix"`

	// Average bitrate in bits/second. The set of valid values for this setting
	// is: 6000, 8000, 10000, 12000, 14000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000, 32000, 40000,
	// 48000, 56000, 64000, 80000, 96000, 112000, 128000, 160000, 192000, 224000,
	// 256000, 288000, 320000, 384000, 448000, 512000, 576000, 640000, 768000, 896000,
	// 1024000. The value you set is also constrained by the values you choose for
	// Profile (codecProfile), Bitrate control mode (codingMode), and Sample rate
	// (sampleRate). Default values depend on Bitrate control mode and Profile.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"6000" type:"integer"`

	// AAC Profile.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"AacCodecProfile"`

	// Mono (Audio Description), Mono, Stereo, or 5.1 channel layout. Valid values
	// depend on rate control mode and profile. "1.0 - Audio Description (Receiver
	// Mix)" setting receives a stereo description plus control track and emits
	// a mono AAC encode of the description track, with control data emitted in
	// the PES header as per ETSI TS 101 154 Annex E.
	CodingMode *string `locationName:"codingMode" type:"string" enum:"AacCodingMode"`

	// Rate Control Mode.
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"AacRateControlMode"`

	// Enables LATM/LOAS AAC output. Note that if you use LATM/LOAS AAC in an output,
	// you must choose "No container" for the output container.
	RawFormat *string `locationName:"rawFormat" type:"string" enum:"AacRawFormat"`

	// Sample rate in Hz. Valid values depend on rate control mode and profile.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"8000" type:"integer"`

	// Use MPEG-2 AAC instead of MPEG-4 AAC audio for raw or MPEG-2 Transport Stream
	// containers.
	Specification *string `locationName:"specification" type:"string" enum:"AacSpecification"`

	// VBR Quality Level - Only used if rate_control_mode is VBR.
	VbrQuality *string `locationName:"vbrQuality" type:"string" enum:"AacVbrQuality"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AacSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AacSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AacSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AacSettings"}
	if s.Bitrate != nil && *s.Bitrate < 6000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Bitrate", 6000))
	}
	if s.SampleRate != nil && *s.SampleRate < 8000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SampleRate", 8000))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix sets the AudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix(v string) *AacSettings {
	s.AudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix = &v
	return s
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetBitrate(v int64) *AacSettings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *AacSettings {
	s.CodecProfile = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodingMode sets the CodingMode field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetCodingMode(v string) *AacSettings {
	s.CodingMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *AacSettings {
	s.RateControlMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetRawFormat sets the RawFormat field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetRawFormat(v string) *AacSettings {
	s.RawFormat = &v
	return s
}

// SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *AacSettings {
	s.SampleRate = &v
	return s
}

// SetSpecification sets the Specification field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetSpecification(v string) *AacSettings {
	s.Specification = &v
	return s
}

// SetVbrQuality sets the VbrQuality field's value.
func (s *AacSettings) SetVbrQuality(v string) *AacSettings {
	s.VbrQuality = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value AC3.
type Ac3Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Average bitrate in bits/second. Valid bitrates depend on the coding mode.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"64000" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the "Bitstream Mode" (bsmod) for the emitted AC-3 stream. See ATSC
	// A/52-2012 for background on these values.
	BitstreamMode *string `locationName:"bitstreamMode" type:"string" enum:"Ac3BitstreamMode"`

	// Dolby Digital coding mode. Determines number of channels.
	CodingMode *string `locationName:"codingMode" type:"string" enum:"Ac3CodingMode"`

	// Sets the dialnorm for the output. If blank and input audio is Dolby Digital,
	// dialnorm will be passed through.
	Dialnorm *int64 `locationName:"dialnorm" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// If set to FILM_STANDARD, adds dynamic range compression signaling to the
	// output bitstream as defined in the Dolby Digital specification.
	DynamicRangeCompressionProfile *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionProfile" type:"string" enum:"Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile"`

	// Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only
	// valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
	LfeFilter *string `locationName:"lfeFilter" type:"string" enum:"Ac3LfeFilter"`

	// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+,
	// or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied
	// from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
	MetadataControl *string `locationName:"metadataControl" type:"string" enum:"Ac3MetadataControl"`

	// Sample rate in hz. Sample rate is always 48000.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"48000" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Ac3Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Ac3Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *Ac3Settings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "Ac3Settings"}
	if s.Bitrate != nil && *s.Bitrate < 64000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Bitrate", 64000))
	}
	if s.Dialnorm != nil && *s.Dialnorm < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Dialnorm", 1))
	}
	if s.SampleRate != nil && *s.SampleRate < 48000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SampleRate", 48000))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Ac3Settings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetBitstreamMode sets the BitstreamMode field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetBitstreamMode(v string) *Ac3Settings {
	s.BitstreamMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodingMode sets the CodingMode field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetCodingMode(v string) *Ac3Settings {
	s.CodingMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetDialnorm sets the Dialnorm field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetDialnorm(v int64) *Ac3Settings {
	s.Dialnorm = &v
	return s
}

// SetDynamicRangeCompressionProfile sets the DynamicRangeCompressionProfile field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionProfile(v string) *Ac3Settings {
	s.DynamicRangeCompressionProfile = &v
	return s
}

// SetLfeFilter sets the LfeFilter field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetLfeFilter(v string) *Ac3Settings {
	s.LfeFilter = &v
	return s
}

// SetMetadataControl sets the MetadataControl field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetMetadataControl(v string) *Ac3Settings {
	s.MetadataControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.
func (s *Ac3Settings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *Ac3Settings {
	s.SampleRate = &v
	return s
}

// Acceleration settings for job execution.
type AccelerationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Acceleration configuration for the job.
	//
	// Mode is a required field
	Mode *string `locationName:"mode" type:"string" required:"true" enum:"AccelerationMode"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AccelerationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AccelerationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AccelerationSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AccelerationSettings"}
	if s.Mode == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Mode"))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetMode sets the Mode field's value.
func (s *AccelerationSettings) SetMode(v string) *AccelerationSettings {
	s.Mode = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value AIFF.
type AiffSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specify Bit depth (BitDepth), in bits per sample, to choose the encoding
	// quality for this audio track.
	BitDepth *int64 `locationName:"bitDepth" min:"16" type:"integer"`

	// Set Channels to specify the number of channels in this output audio track.
	// Choosing Mono in the console will give you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo
	// will give you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2.
	Channels *int64 `locationName:"channels" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Sample rate in hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"8000" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AiffSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AiffSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AiffSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AiffSettings"}
	if s.BitDepth != nil && *s.BitDepth < 16 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("BitDepth", 16))
	}
	if s.Channels != nil && *s.Channels < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Channels", 1))
	}
	if s.SampleRate != nil && *s.SampleRate < 8000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SampleRate", 8000))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBitDepth sets the BitDepth field's value.
func (s *AiffSettings) SetBitDepth(v int64) *AiffSettings {
	s.BitDepth = &v
	return s
}

// SetChannels sets the Channels field's value.
func (s *AiffSettings) SetChannels(v int64) *AiffSettings {
	s.Channels = &v
	return s
}

// SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.
func (s *AiffSettings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *AiffSettings {
	s.SampleRate = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for ancillary captions source.
type AncillarySourceSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specifies the 608 channel number in the ancillary data track from which to
	// extract captions. Unused for passthrough.
	SourceAncillaryChannelNumber *int64 `locationName:"sourceAncillaryChannelNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AncillarySourceSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AncillarySourceSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AncillarySourceSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AncillarySourceSettings"}
	if s.SourceAncillaryChannelNumber != nil && *s.SourceAncillaryChannelNumber < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SourceAncillaryChannelNumber", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetSourceAncillaryChannelNumber sets the SourceAncillaryChannelNumber field's value.
func (s *AncillarySourceSettings) SetSourceAncillaryChannelNumber(v int64) *AncillarySourceSettings {
	s.SourceAncillaryChannelNumber = &v
	return s
}

// Associates the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an AWS Certificate Manager (ACM)
// certificate with an AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource.
type AssociateCertificateInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The ARN of the ACM certificate that you want to associate with your MediaConvert
	// resource.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AssociateCertificateInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AssociateCertificateInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AssociateCertificateInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AssociateCertificateInput"}
	if s.Arn == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Arn"))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *AssociateCertificateInput) SetArn(v string) *AssociateCertificateInput {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// Successful association of Certificate Manager Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
// with Mediaconvert returns an OK message.
type AssociateCertificateOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AssociateCertificateOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AssociateCertificateOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Audio codec settings (CodecSettings) under (AudioDescriptions) contains the
// group of settings related to audio encoding. The settings in this group vary
// depending on the value you choose for Audio codec (Codec). For each codec
// enum you choose, define the corresponding settings object. The following
// lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * AAC, AacSettings * MP2, Mp2Settings
// * WAV, WavSettings * AIFF, AiffSettings * AC3, Ac3Settings * EAC3, Eac3Settings
type AudioCodecSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value AAC. The service accepts one of two mutually exclusive groups of
	// AAC settings--VBR and CBR. To select one of these modes, set the value of
	// Bitrate control mode (rateControlMode) to "VBR" or "CBR". In VBR mode, you
	// control the audio quality with the setting VBR quality (vbrQuality). In CBR
	// mode, you use the setting Bitrate (bitrate). Defaults and valid values depend
	// on the rate control mode.
	AacSettings *AacSettings `locationName:"aacSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value AC3.
	Ac3Settings *Ac3Settings `locationName:"ac3Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value AIFF.
	AiffSettings *AiffSettings `locationName:"aiffSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Type of Audio codec.
	Codec *string `locationName:"codec" type:"string" enum:"AudioCodec"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value EAC3.
	Eac3Settings *Eac3Settings `locationName:"eac3Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value MP2.
	Mp2Settings *Mp2Settings `locationName:"mp2Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value WAV.
	WavSettings *WavSettings `locationName:"wavSettings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AudioCodecSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AudioCodecSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AudioCodecSettings"}
	if s.AacSettings != nil {
		if err := s.AacSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AacSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Ac3Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Ac3Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Ac3Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.AiffSettings != nil {
		if err := s.AiffSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AiffSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Eac3Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Eac3Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Eac3Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Mp2Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Mp2Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Mp2Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.WavSettings != nil {
		if err := s.WavSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("WavSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAacSettings sets the AacSettings field's value.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetAacSettings(v *AacSettings) *AudioCodecSettings {
	s.AacSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetAc3Settings sets the Ac3Settings field's value.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetAc3Settings(v *Ac3Settings) *AudioCodecSettings {
	s.Ac3Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetAiffSettings sets the AiffSettings field's value.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetAiffSettings(v *AiffSettings) *AudioCodecSettings {
	s.AiffSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetCodec sets the Codec field's value.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetCodec(v string) *AudioCodecSettings {
	s.Codec = &v
	return s
}

// SetEac3Settings sets the Eac3Settings field's value.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetEac3Settings(v *Eac3Settings) *AudioCodecSettings {
	s.Eac3Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetMp2Settings sets the Mp2Settings field's value.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetMp2Settings(v *Mp2Settings) *AudioCodecSettings {
	s.Mp2Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetWavSettings sets the WavSettings field's value.
func (s *AudioCodecSettings) SetWavSettings(v *WavSettings) *AudioCodecSettings {
	s.WavSettings = v
	return s
}

// Description of audio output
type AudioDescription struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Advanced audio normalization settings.
	AudioNormalizationSettings *AudioNormalizationSettings `locationName:"audioNormalizationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specifies which audio data to use from each input. In the simplest case,
	// specify an "Audio Selector":#inputs-audio_selector by name based on its order
	// within each input. For example if you specify "Audio Selector 3", then the
	// third audio selector will be used from each input. If an input does not have
	// an "Audio Selector 3", then the audio selector marked as "default" in that
	// input will be used. If there is no audio selector marked as "default", silence
	// will be inserted for the duration of that input. Alternatively, an "Audio
	// Selector Group":#inputs-audio_selector_group name may be specified, with
	// similar default/silence behavior. If no audio_source_name is specified, then
	// "Audio Selector 1" will be chosen automatically.
	AudioSourceName *string `locationName:"audioSourceName" type:"string"`

	// Applies only if Follow Input Audio Type is unchecked (false). A number between
	// 0 and 255. The following are defined in ISO-IEC 13818-1: 0 = Undefined, 1
	// = Clean Effects, 2 = Hearing Impaired, 3 = Visually Impaired Commentary,
	// 4-255 = Reserved.
	AudioType *int64 `locationName:"audioType" type:"integer"`

	// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, if the input contains an ISO 639 audio_type, then
	// that value is passed through to the output. If the input contains no ISO
	// 639 audio_type, the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Otherwise
	// the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Note that this field and
	// audioType are both ignored if audioDescriptionBroadcasterMix is set to BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD.
	AudioTypeControl *string `locationName:"audioTypeControl" type:"string" enum:"AudioTypeControl"`

	// Audio codec settings (CodecSettings) under (AudioDescriptions) contains the
	// group of settings related to audio encoding. The settings in this group vary
	// depending on the value you choose for Audio codec (Codec). For each codec
	// enum you choose, define the corresponding settings object. The following
	// lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * AAC, AacSettings * MP2, Mp2Settings
	// * WAV, WavSettings * AIFF, AiffSettings * AC3, Ac3Settings * EAC3, Eac3Settings
	CodecSettings *AudioCodecSettings `locationName:"codecSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the language for this audio output track, using the ISO 639-2 or
	// ISO 639-3 three-letter language code. The language specified will be used
	// when 'Follow Input Language Code' is not selected or when 'Follow Input Language
	// Code' is selected but there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the
	// input.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Indicates the language of the audio output track. The ISO 639 language specified
	// in the 'Language Code' drop down will be used when 'Follow Input Language
	// Code' is not selected or when 'Follow Input Language Code' is selected but
	// there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the input.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Choosing FOLLOW_INPUT will cause the ISO 639 language code of the output
	// to follow the ISO 639 language code of the input. The language specified
	// for languageCode' will be used when USE_CONFIGURED is selected or when FOLLOW_INPUT
	// is selected but there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the input.
	LanguageCodeControl *string `locationName:"languageCodeControl" type:"string" enum:"AudioLanguageCodeControl"`

	// Advanced audio remixing settings.
	RemixSettings *RemixSettings `locationName:"remixSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Used for MS Smooth and Apple HLS outputs. Indicates the name displayed by
	// the player (eg. English, or Director Commentary). Alphanumeric characters,
	// spaces, and underscore are legal.
	StreamName *string `locationName:"streamName" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AudioDescription) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AudioDescription) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AudioDescription) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AudioDescription"}
	if s.CustomLanguageCode != nil && len(*s.CustomLanguageCode) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("CustomLanguageCode", 3))
	}
	if s.AudioNormalizationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.AudioNormalizationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AudioNormalizationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.CodecSettings != nil {
		if err := s.CodecSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("CodecSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.RemixSettings != nil {
		if err := s.RemixSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("RemixSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioNormalizationSettings sets the AudioNormalizationSettings field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioNormalizationSettings(v *AudioNormalizationSettings) *AudioDescription {
	s.AudioNormalizationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetAudioSourceName sets the AudioSourceName field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioSourceName(v string) *AudioDescription {
	s.AudioSourceName = &v
	return s
}

// SetAudioType sets the AudioType field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioType(v int64) *AudioDescription {
	s.AudioType = &v
	return s
}

// SetAudioTypeControl sets the AudioTypeControl field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetAudioTypeControl(v string) *AudioDescription {
	s.AudioTypeControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecSettings sets the CodecSettings field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetCodecSettings(v *AudioCodecSettings) *AudioDescription {
	s.CodecSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *AudioDescription {
	s.CustomLanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetLanguageCode(v string) *AudioDescription {
	s.LanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageCodeControl sets the LanguageCodeControl field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetLanguageCodeControl(v string) *AudioDescription {
	s.LanguageCodeControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetRemixSettings sets the RemixSettings field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetRemixSettings(v *RemixSettings) *AudioDescription {
	s.RemixSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetStreamName sets the StreamName field's value.
func (s *AudioDescription) SetStreamName(v string) *AudioDescription {
	s.StreamName = &v
	return s
}

// Advanced audio normalization settings.
type AudioNormalizationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Audio normalization algorithm to use. 1770-1 conforms to the CALM Act specification,
	// 1770-2 conforms to the EBU R-128 specification.
	Algorithm *string `locationName:"algorithm" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationAlgorithm"`

	// When enabled the output audio is corrected using the chosen algorithm. If
	// disabled, the audio will be measured but not adjusted.
	AlgorithmControl *string `locationName:"algorithmControl" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl"`

	// Content measuring above this level will be corrected to the target level.
	// Content measuring below this level will not be corrected. Gating only applies
	// when not using real_time_correction.
	CorrectionGateLevel *int64 `locationName:"correctionGateLevel" type:"integer"`

	// If set to LOG, log each output's audio track loudness to a CSV file.
	LoudnessLogging *string `locationName:"loudnessLogging" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging"`

	// If set to TRUE_PEAK, calculate and log the TruePeak for each output's audio
	// track loudness.
	PeakCalculation *string `locationName:"peakCalculation" type:"string" enum:"AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation"`

	// Target LKFS(loudness) to adjust volume to. If no value is entered, a default
	// value will be used according to the chosen algorithm. The CALM Act (1770-1)
	// recommends a target of -24 LKFS. The EBU R-128 specification (1770-2) recommends
	// a target of -23 LKFS.
	TargetLkfs *float64 `locationName:"targetLkfs" type:"double"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AudioNormalizationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AudioNormalizationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AudioNormalizationSettings"}
	if s.CorrectionGateLevel != nil && *s.CorrectionGateLevel < -70 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("CorrectionGateLevel", -70))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAlgorithm sets the Algorithm field's value.
func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetAlgorithm(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings {
	s.Algorithm = &v
	return s
}

// SetAlgorithmControl sets the AlgorithmControl field's value.
func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetAlgorithmControl(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings {
	s.AlgorithmControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetCorrectionGateLevel sets the CorrectionGateLevel field's value.
func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetCorrectionGateLevel(v int64) *AudioNormalizationSettings {
	s.CorrectionGateLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetLoudnessLogging sets the LoudnessLogging field's value.
func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetLoudnessLogging(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings {
	s.LoudnessLogging = &v
	return s
}

// SetPeakCalculation sets the PeakCalculation field's value.
func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetPeakCalculation(v string) *AudioNormalizationSettings {
	s.PeakCalculation = &v
	return s
}

// SetTargetLkfs sets the TargetLkfs field's value.
func (s *AudioNormalizationSettings) SetTargetLkfs(v float64) *AudioNormalizationSettings {
	s.TargetLkfs = &v
	return s
}

// Selector for Audio
type AudioSelector struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Selects a specific language code from within an audio source, using the ISO
	// 639-2 or ISO 639-3 three-letter language code
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Enable this setting on one audio selector to set it as the default for the
	// job. The service uses this default for outputs where it can't find the specified
	// input audio. If you don't set a default, those outputs have no audio.
	DefaultSelection *string `locationName:"defaultSelection" type:"string" enum:"AudioDefaultSelection"`

	// Specifies audio data from an external file source.
	ExternalAudioFileInput *string `locationName:"externalAudioFileInput" type:"string"`

	// Selects a specific language code from within an audio source.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Specifies a time delta in milliseconds to offset the audio from the input
	// video.
	Offset *int64 `locationName:"offset" type:"integer"`

	// Selects a specific PID from within an audio source (e.g. 257 selects PID
	// 0x101).
	Pids []*int64 `locationName:"pids" type:"list"`

	// Use this setting for input streams that contain Dolby E, to have the service
	// extract specific program data from the track. To select multiple programs,
	// create multiple selectors with the same Track and different Program numbers.
	// In the console, this setting is visible when you set Selector type to Track.
	// Choose the program number from the dropdown list. If you are sending a JSON
	// file, provide the program ID, which is part of the audio metadata. If your
	// input file has incorrect metadata, you can choose All channels instead of
	// a program number to have the service ignore the program IDs and include all
	// the programs in the track.
	ProgramSelection *int64 `locationName:"programSelection" type:"integer"`

	// Use these settings to reorder the audio channels of one input to match those
	// of another input. This allows you to combine the two files into a single
	// output, one after the other.
	RemixSettings *RemixSettings `locationName:"remixSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specifies the type of the audio selector.
	SelectorType *string `locationName:"selectorType" type:"string" enum:"AudioSelectorType"`

	// Identify a track from the input audio to include in this selector by entering
	// the track index number. To include several tracks in a single audio selector,
	// specify multiple tracks as follows. Using the console, enter a comma-separated
	// list. For examle, type "1,2,3" to include tracks 1 through 3. Specifying
	// directly in your JSON job file, provide the track numbers in an array. For
	// example, "tracks": [1,2,3].
	Tracks []*int64 `locationName:"tracks" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AudioSelector) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AudioSelector) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AudioSelector) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AudioSelector"}
	if s.CustomLanguageCode != nil && len(*s.CustomLanguageCode) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("CustomLanguageCode", 3))
	}
	if s.Offset != nil && *s.Offset < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Offset", -2.147483648e+09))
	}
	if s.RemixSettings != nil {
		if err := s.RemixSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("RemixSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *AudioSelector {
	s.CustomLanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetDefaultSelection sets the DefaultSelection field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetDefaultSelection(v string) *AudioSelector {
	s.DefaultSelection = &v
	return s
}

// SetExternalAudioFileInput sets the ExternalAudioFileInput field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetExternalAudioFileInput(v string) *AudioSelector {
	s.ExternalAudioFileInput = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetLanguageCode(v string) *AudioSelector {
	s.LanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetOffset sets the Offset field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetOffset(v int64) *AudioSelector {
	s.Offset = &v
	return s
}

// SetPids sets the Pids field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetPids(v []*int64) *AudioSelector {
	s.Pids = v
	return s
}

// SetProgramSelection sets the ProgramSelection field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetProgramSelection(v int64) *AudioSelector {
	s.ProgramSelection = &v
	return s
}

// SetRemixSettings sets the RemixSettings field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetRemixSettings(v *RemixSettings) *AudioSelector {
	s.RemixSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetSelectorType sets the SelectorType field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetSelectorType(v string) *AudioSelector {
	s.SelectorType = &v
	return s
}

// SetTracks sets the Tracks field's value.
func (s *AudioSelector) SetTracks(v []*int64) *AudioSelector {
	s.Tracks = v
	return s
}

// Group of Audio Selectors
type AudioSelectorGroup struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Name of an Audio Selector within the same input to include in the group.
	// Audio selector names are standardized, based on their order within the input
	// (e.g., "Audio Selector 1"). The audio selector name parameter can be repeated
	// to add any number of audio selectors to the group.
	AudioSelectorNames []*string `locationName:"audioSelectorNames" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AudioSelectorGroup) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AudioSelectorGroup) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetAudioSelectorNames sets the AudioSelectorNames field's value.
func (s *AudioSelectorGroup) SetAudioSelectorNames(v []*string) *AudioSelectorGroup {
	s.AudioSelectorNames = v
	return s
}

// Settings for Avail Blanking
type AvailBlanking struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Blanking image to be used. Leave empty for solid black. Only bmp and png
	// images are supported.
	AvailBlankingImage *string `locationName:"availBlankingImage" min:"14" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s AvailBlanking) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s AvailBlanking) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *AvailBlanking) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "AvailBlanking"}
	if s.AvailBlankingImage != nil && len(*s.AvailBlankingImage) < 14 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("AvailBlankingImage", 14))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAvailBlankingImage sets the AvailBlankingImage field's value.
func (s *AvailBlanking) SetAvailBlankingImage(v string) *AvailBlanking {
	s.AvailBlankingImage = &v
	return s
}

// Burn-In Destination Settings.
type BurninDestinationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to
	// centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly,
	// setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output.
	// If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter,
	// the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	Alignment *string `locationName:"alignment" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleAlignment"`

	// Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundColor *string `locationName:"backgroundColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the background rectangle. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.
	// Leaving this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent).
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundOpacity *int64 `locationName:"backgroundOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for
	// source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	FontColor *string `locationName:"fontColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleFontColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the burned-in captions. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontOpacity *int64 `locationName:"fontOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Font resolution in DPI (dots per inch); default is 96 dpi.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontResolution *int64 `locationName:"fontResolution" min:"96" type:"integer"`

	// Provide the font script, using an ISO 15924 script code, if the LanguageCode
	// is not sufficient for determining the script type. Where LanguageCode or
	// CustomLanguageCode is sufficient, use "AUTOMATIC" or leave unset. This is
	// used to help determine the appropriate font for rendering burn-in captions.
	FontScript *string `locationName:"fontScript" type:"string" enum:"FontScript"`

	// A positive integer indicates the exact font size in points. Set to 0 for
	// automatic font size selection. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must
	// match.
	FontSize *int64 `locationName:"fontSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions
	// that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already
	// pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings
	// must match.
	OutlineColor *string `locationName:"outlineColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleOutlineColor"`

	// Specifies font outline size in pixels. This option is not valid for source
	// captions that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	OutlineSize *int64 `locationName:"outlineSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub
	// font settings must match.
	ShadowColor *string `locationName:"shadowColor" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleShadowColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the shadow. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent. Leaving
	// this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent). All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowOpacity *int64 `locationName:"shadowOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the horizontal offset of the shadow relative to the captions in
	// pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels to the left.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowXOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowXOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical offset of the shadow relative to the captions in pixels.
	// A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels above the text. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowYOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowYOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify
	// whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions
	// grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to
	// the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional
	// to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.
	TeletextSpacing *string `locationName:"teletextSpacing" type:"string" enum:"BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing"`

	// Specifies the horizontal position of the caption relative to the left side
	// of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting
	// 10 pixels from the left of the output. If no explicit x_position is provided,
	// the horizontal caption position will be determined by the alignment parameter.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	XPosition *int64 `locationName:"xPosition" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical position of the caption relative to the top of the
	// output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10
	// pixels from the top of the output. If no explicit y_position is provided,
	// the caption will be positioned towards the bottom of the output. This option
	// is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext.
	// These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	YPosition *int64 `locationName:"yPosition" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s BurninDestinationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s BurninDestinationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "BurninDestinationSettings"}
	if s.FontResolution != nil && *s.FontResolution < 96 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FontResolution", 96))
	}
	if s.ShadowXOffset != nil && *s.ShadowXOffset < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ShadowXOffset", -2.147483648e+09))
	}
	if s.ShadowYOffset != nil && *s.ShadowYOffset < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ShadowYOffset", -2.147483648e+09))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAlignment sets the Alignment field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetAlignment(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.Alignment = &v
	return s
}

// SetBackgroundColor sets the BackgroundColor field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.BackgroundColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetBackgroundOpacity sets the BackgroundOpacity field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundOpacity(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.BackgroundOpacity = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontColor sets the FontColor field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.FontColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontOpacity sets the FontOpacity field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontOpacity(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.FontOpacity = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontResolution sets the FontResolution field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontResolution(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.FontResolution = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontScript sets the FontScript field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontScript(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.FontScript = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontSize sets the FontSize field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetFontSize(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.FontSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutlineColor sets the OutlineColor field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetOutlineColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.OutlineColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutlineSize sets the OutlineSize field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetOutlineSize(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.OutlineSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowColor sets the ShadowColor field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowColor(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowOpacity sets the ShadowOpacity field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowOpacity(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowOpacity = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowXOffset sets the ShadowXOffset field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowXOffset(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowXOffset = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowYOffset sets the ShadowYOffset field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetShadowYOffset(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowYOffset = &v
	return s
}

// SetTeletextSpacing sets the TeletextSpacing field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetTeletextSpacing(v string) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.TeletextSpacing = &v
	return s
}

// SetXPosition sets the XPosition field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetXPosition(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.XPosition = &v
	return s
}

// SetYPosition sets the YPosition field's value.
func (s *BurninDestinationSettings) SetYPosition(v int64) *BurninDestinationSettings {
	s.YPosition = &v
	return s
}

// Cancel a job by sending a request with the job ID
type CancelJobInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The Job ID of the job to be cancelled.
	//
	// Id is a required field
	Id *string `location:"uri" locationName:"id" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CancelJobInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CancelJobInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CancelJobInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CancelJobInput"}
	if s.Id == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Id"))
	}
	if s.Id != nil && len(*s.Id) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Id", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetId sets the Id field's value.
func (s *CancelJobInput) SetId(v string) *CancelJobInput {
	s.Id = &v
	return s
}

// A cancel job request will receive a response with an empty body.
type CancelJobOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CancelJobOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CancelJobOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Description of Caption output
type CaptionDescription struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specifies which "Caption Selector":#inputs-caption_selector to use from each
	// input when generating captions. The name should be of the format "Caption
	// Selector ", which denotes that the Nth Caption Selector will be used from
	// each input.
	CaptionSelectorName *string `locationName:"captionSelectorName" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// Indicates the language of the caption output track, using the ISO 639-2 or
	// ISO 639-3 three-letter language code. For most captions output formats, the
	// encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If
	// your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this
	// language information to choose the font language for rendering the captions
	// text.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Specific settings required by destination type. Note that burnin_destination_settings
	// are not available if the source of the caption data is Embedded or Teletext.
	DestinationSettings *CaptionDestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the language of this captions output track. For most captions output
	// formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions
	// metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder
	// uses this language information to choose the font language for rendering
	// the captions text.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Human readable information to indicate captions available for players (eg.
	// English, or Spanish). Alphanumeric characters, spaces, and underscore are
	// legal.
	LanguageDescription *string `locationName:"languageDescription" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CaptionDescription) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CaptionDescription) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CaptionDescription) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CaptionDescription"}
	if s.CaptionSelectorName != nil && len(*s.CaptionSelectorName) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("CaptionSelectorName", 1))
	}
	if s.CustomLanguageCode != nil && len(*s.CustomLanguageCode) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("CustomLanguageCode", 3))
	}
	if s.DestinationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DestinationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DestinationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCaptionSelectorName sets the CaptionSelectorName field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescription) SetCaptionSelectorName(v string) *CaptionDescription {
	s.CaptionSelectorName = &v
	return s
}

// SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescription) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescription {
	s.CustomLanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescription) SetDestinationSettings(v *CaptionDestinationSettings) *CaptionDescription {
	s.DestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescription) SetLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescription {
	s.LanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageDescription sets the LanguageDescription field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescription) SetLanguageDescription(v string) *CaptionDescription {
	s.LanguageDescription = &v
	return s
}

// Caption Description for preset
type CaptionDescriptionPreset struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Indicates the language of the caption output track, using the ISO 639-2 or
	// ISO 639-3 three-letter language code. For most captions output formats, the
	// encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If
	// your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this
	// language information to choose the font language for rendering the captions
	// text.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Specific settings required by destination type. Note that burnin_destination_settings
	// are not available if the source of the caption data is Embedded or Teletext.
	DestinationSettings *CaptionDestinationSettings `locationName:"destinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the language of this captions output track. For most captions output
	// formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions
	// metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder
	// uses this language information to choose the font language for rendering
	// the captions text.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Human readable information to indicate captions available for players (eg.
	// English, or Spanish). Alphanumeric characters, spaces, and underscore are
	// legal.
	LanguageDescription *string `locationName:"languageDescription" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CaptionDescriptionPreset) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CaptionDescriptionPreset) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CaptionDescriptionPreset"}
	if s.CustomLanguageCode != nil && len(*s.CustomLanguageCode) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("CustomLanguageCode", 3))
	}
	if s.DestinationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DestinationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DestinationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescriptionPreset {
	s.CustomLanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetDestinationSettings sets the DestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetDestinationSettings(v *CaptionDestinationSettings) *CaptionDescriptionPreset {
	s.DestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionDescriptionPreset {
	s.LanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageDescription sets the LanguageDescription field's value.
func (s *CaptionDescriptionPreset) SetLanguageDescription(v string) *CaptionDescriptionPreset {
	s.LanguageDescription = &v
	return s
}

// Specific settings required by destination type. Note that burnin_destination_settings
// are not available if the source of the caption data is Embedded or Teletext.
type CaptionDestinationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Burn-In Destination Settings.
	BurninDestinationSettings *BurninDestinationSettings `locationName:"burninDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the format for this set of captions on this output. The default format
	// is embedded without SCTE-20. Other options are embedded with SCTE-20, burn-in,
	// DVB-sub, SCC, SRT, teletext, TTML, and web-VTT. If you are using SCTE-20,
	// choose SCTE-20 plus embedded (SCTE20_PLUS_EMBEDDED) to create an output that
	// complies with the SCTE-43 spec. To create a non-compliant output where the
	// embedded captions come first, choose Embedded plus SCTE-20 (EMBEDDED_PLUS_SCTE20).
	DestinationType *string `locationName:"destinationType" type:"string" enum:"CaptionDestinationType"`

	// DVB-Sub Destination Settings
	DvbSubDestinationSettings *DvbSubDestinationSettings `locationName:"dvbSubDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings specific to embedded/ancillary caption outputs, including 608/708
	// Channel destination number.
	EmbeddedDestinationSettings *EmbeddedDestinationSettings `locationName:"embeddedDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for SCC caption output.
	SccDestinationSettings *SccDestinationSettings `locationName:"sccDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Teletext caption output
	TeletextDestinationSettings *TeletextDestinationSettings `locationName:"teletextDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings specific to TTML caption outputs, including Pass style information
	// (TtmlStylePassthrough).
	TtmlDestinationSettings *TtmlDestinationSettings `locationName:"ttmlDestinationSettings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CaptionDestinationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CaptionDestinationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CaptionDestinationSettings"}
	if s.BurninDestinationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.BurninDestinationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("BurninDestinationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.DvbSubDestinationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DvbSubDestinationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DvbSubDestinationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.EmbeddedDestinationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.EmbeddedDestinationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("EmbeddedDestinationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.TeletextDestinationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.TeletextDestinationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("TeletextDestinationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBurninDestinationSettings sets the BurninDestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetBurninDestinationSettings(v *BurninDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings {
	s.BurninDestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetDestinationType sets the DestinationType field's value.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetDestinationType(v string) *CaptionDestinationSettings {
	s.DestinationType = &v
	return s
}

// SetDvbSubDestinationSettings sets the DvbSubDestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetDvbSubDestinationSettings(v *DvbSubDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings {
	s.DvbSubDestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetEmbeddedDestinationSettings sets the EmbeddedDestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetEmbeddedDestinationSettings(v *EmbeddedDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings {
	s.EmbeddedDestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetSccDestinationSettings sets the SccDestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetSccDestinationSettings(v *SccDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings {
	s.SccDestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetTeletextDestinationSettings sets the TeletextDestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetTeletextDestinationSettings(v *TeletextDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings {
	s.TeletextDestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetTtmlDestinationSettings sets the TtmlDestinationSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionDestinationSettings) SetTtmlDestinationSettings(v *TtmlDestinationSettings) *CaptionDestinationSettings {
	s.TtmlDestinationSettings = v
	return s
}

// Set up captions in your outputs by first selecting them from your input here.
type CaptionSelector struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The specific language to extract from source, using the ISO 639-2 or ISO
	// 639-3 three-letter language code. If input is SCTE-27, complete this field
	// and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub
	// and output is Burn-in or SMPTE-TT, complete this field and/or PID to select
	// the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub that is being passed
	// through, omit this field (and PID field); there is no way to extract a specific
	// language with pass-through captions.
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// The specific language to extract from source. If input is SCTE-27, complete
	// this field and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input
	// is DVB-Sub and output is Burn-in or SMPTE-TT, complete this field and/or
	// PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub that is
	// being passed through, omit this field (and PID field); there is no way to
	// extract a specific language with pass-through captions.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Source settings (SourceSettings) contains the group of settings for captions
	// in the input.
	SourceSettings *CaptionSourceSettings `locationName:"sourceSettings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CaptionSelector) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CaptionSelector) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CaptionSelector) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CaptionSelector"}
	if s.CustomLanguageCode != nil && len(*s.CustomLanguageCode) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("CustomLanguageCode", 3))
	}
	if s.SourceSettings != nil {
		if err := s.SourceSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("SourceSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.
func (s *CaptionSelector) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionSelector {
	s.CustomLanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.
func (s *CaptionSelector) SetLanguageCode(v string) *CaptionSelector {
	s.LanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetSourceSettings sets the SourceSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionSelector) SetSourceSettings(v *CaptionSourceSettings) *CaptionSelector {
	s.SourceSettings = v
	return s
}

// Source settings (SourceSettings) contains the group of settings for captions
// in the input.
type CaptionSourceSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Settings for ancillary captions source.
	AncillarySourceSettings *AncillarySourceSettings `locationName:"ancillarySourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// DVB Sub Source Settings
	DvbSubSourceSettings *DvbSubSourceSettings `locationName:"dvbSubSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for embedded captions Source
	EmbeddedSourceSettings *EmbeddedSourceSettings `locationName:"embeddedSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for File-based Captions in Source
	FileSourceSettings *FileSourceSettings `locationName:"fileSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use Source (SourceType) to identify the format of your input captions. The
	// service cannot auto-detect caption format.
	SourceType *string `locationName:"sourceType" type:"string" enum:"CaptionSourceType"`

	// Settings specific to Teletext caption sources, including Page number.
	TeletextSourceSettings *TeletextSourceSettings `locationName:"teletextSourceSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings specific to caption sources that are specfied by track number. Sources
	// include IMSC in IMF.
	TrackSourceSettings *TrackSourceSettings `locationName:"trackSourceSettings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CaptionSourceSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CaptionSourceSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CaptionSourceSettings"}
	if s.AncillarySourceSettings != nil {
		if err := s.AncillarySourceSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AncillarySourceSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.DvbSubSourceSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DvbSubSourceSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DvbSubSourceSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.EmbeddedSourceSettings != nil {
		if err := s.EmbeddedSourceSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("EmbeddedSourceSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.FileSourceSettings != nil {
		if err := s.FileSourceSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("FileSourceSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.TeletextSourceSettings != nil {
		if err := s.TeletextSourceSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("TeletextSourceSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.TrackSourceSettings != nil {
		if err := s.TrackSourceSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("TrackSourceSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAncillarySourceSettings sets the AncillarySourceSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetAncillarySourceSettings(v *AncillarySourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings {
	s.AncillarySourceSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetDvbSubSourceSettings sets the DvbSubSourceSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetDvbSubSourceSettings(v *DvbSubSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings {
	s.DvbSubSourceSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetEmbeddedSourceSettings sets the EmbeddedSourceSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetEmbeddedSourceSettings(v *EmbeddedSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings {
	s.EmbeddedSourceSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetFileSourceSettings sets the FileSourceSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetFileSourceSettings(v *FileSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings {
	s.FileSourceSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetSourceType sets the SourceType field's value.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetSourceType(v string) *CaptionSourceSettings {
	s.SourceType = &v
	return s
}

// SetTeletextSourceSettings sets the TeletextSourceSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetTeletextSourceSettings(v *TeletextSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings {
	s.TeletextSourceSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetTrackSourceSettings sets the TrackSourceSettings field's value.
func (s *CaptionSourceSettings) SetTrackSourceSettings(v *TrackSourceSettings) *CaptionSourceSettings {
	s.TrackSourceSettings = v
	return s
}

// Channel mapping (ChannelMapping) contains the group of fields that hold the
// remixing value for each channel. Units are in dB. Acceptable values are within
// the range from -60 (mute) through 6. A setting of 0 passes the input channel
// unchanged to the output channel (no attenuation or amplification).
type ChannelMapping struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// List of output channels
	OutputChannels []*OutputChannelMapping `locationName:"outputChannels" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ChannelMapping) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ChannelMapping) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetOutputChannels sets the OutputChannels field's value.
func (s *ChannelMapping) SetOutputChannels(v []*OutputChannelMapping) *ChannelMapping {
	s.OutputChannels = v
	return s
}

// Settings for CMAF encryption
type CmafEncryptionSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// This is a 128-bit, 16-byte hex value represented by a 32-character text string.
	// If this parameter is not set then the Initialization Vector will follow the
	// segment number by default.
	ConstantInitializationVector *string `locationName:"constantInitializationVector" min:"32" type:"string"`

	// Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable.
	// Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.
	EncryptionMethod *string `locationName:"encryptionMethod" type:"string" enum:"CmafEncryptionType"`

	// The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the
	// key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed
	// in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.
	InitializationVectorInManifest *string `locationName:"initializationVectorInManifest" type:"string" enum:"CmafInitializationVectorInManifest"`

	// Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
	StaticKeyProvider *StaticKeyProvider `locationName:"staticKeyProvider" type:"structure"`

	// Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"CmafKeyProviderType"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CmafEncryptionSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CmafEncryptionSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CmafEncryptionSettings"}
	if s.ConstantInitializationVector != nil && len(*s.ConstantInitializationVector) < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("ConstantInitializationVector", 32))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetConstantInitializationVector sets the ConstantInitializationVector field's value.
func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetConstantInitializationVector(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings {
	s.ConstantInitializationVector = &v
	return s
}

// SetEncryptionMethod sets the EncryptionMethod field's value.
func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionMethod(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings {
	s.EncryptionMethod = &v
	return s
}

// SetInitializationVectorInManifest sets the InitializationVectorInManifest field's value.
func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetInitializationVectorInManifest(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings {
	s.InitializationVectorInManifest = &v
	return s
}

// SetStaticKeyProvider sets the StaticKeyProvider field's value.
func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetStaticKeyProvider(v *StaticKeyProvider) *CmafEncryptionSettings {
	s.StaticKeyProvider = v
	return s
}

// SetType sets the Type field's value.
func (s *CmafEncryptionSettings) SetType(v string) *CmafEncryptionSettings {
	s.Type = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
// CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS. Each output in a CMAF Output Group may only contain
// a single video, audio, or caption output.
type CmafGroupSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A partial URI prefix that will be put in the manifest file at the top level
	// BaseURL element. Can be used if streams are delivered from a different URL
	// than the manifest file.
	BaseUrl *string `locationName:"baseUrl" type:"string"`

	// When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client
	// from saving media segments for later replay.
	ClientCache *string `locationName:"clientCache" type:"string" enum:"CmafClientCache"`

	// Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist
	// generation.
	CodecSpecification *string `locationName:"codecSpecification" type:"string" enum:"CmafCodecSpecification"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// DRM settings.
	Encryption *CmafEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// Length of fragments to generate (in seconds). Fragment length must be compatible
	// with GOP size and Framerate. Note that fragments will end on the next keyframe
	// after this number of seconds, so actual fragment length may be longer. When
	// Emit Single File is checked, the fragmentation is internal to a single output
	// file and it does not cause the creation of many output files as in other
	// output types.
	FragmentLength *int64 `locationName:"fragmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
	ManifestCompression *string `locationName:"manifestCompression" type:"string" enum:"CmafManifestCompression"`

	// Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for
	// segment duration.
	ManifestDurationFormat *string `locationName:"manifestDurationFormat" type:"string" enum:"CmafManifestDurationFormat"`

	// Minimum time of initially buffered media that is needed to ensure smooth
	// playout.
	MinBufferTime *int64 `locationName:"minBufferTime" type:"integer"`

	// Keep this setting at the default value of 0, unless you are troubleshooting
	// a problem with how devices play back the end of your video asset. If you
	// know that player devices are hanging on the final segment of your video because
	// the length of your final segment is too short, use this setting to specify
	// a minimum final segment length, in seconds. Choose a value that is greater
	// than or equal to 1 and less than your segment length. When you specify a
	// value for this setting, the encoder will combine any final segment that is
	// shorter than the length that you specify with the previous segment. For example,
	// your segment length is 3 seconds and your final segment is .5 seconds without
	// a minimum final segment length; when you set the minimum final segment length
	// to 1, your final segment is 3.5 seconds.
	MinFinalSegmentLength *float64 `locationName:"minFinalSegmentLength" type:"double"`

	// When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally
	// segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES,
	// separate segment files will be created.
	SegmentControl *string `locationName:"segmentControl" type:"string" enum:"CmafSegmentControl"`

	// Use this setting to specify the length, in seconds, of each individual CMAF
	// segment. This value applies to the whole package; that is, to every output
	// in the output group. Note that segments end on the first keyframe after this
	// number of seconds, so the actual segment length might be slightly longer.
	// If you set Segment control (CmafSegmentControl) to single file, the service
	// puts the content of each output in a single file that has metadata that marks
	// these segments. If you set it to segmented files, the service creates multiple
	// files for each output, each with the content of one segment.
	SegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"segmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag
	// of variant manifest.
	StreamInfResolution *string `locationName:"streamInfResolution" type:"string" enum:"CmafStreamInfResolution"`

	// When set to ENABLED, a DASH MPD manifest will be generated for this output.
	WriteDashManifest *string `locationName:"writeDashManifest" type:"string" enum:"CmafWriteDASHManifest"`

	// When set to ENABLED, an Apple HLS manifest will be generated for this output.
	WriteHlsManifest *string `locationName:"writeHlsManifest" type:"string" enum:"CmafWriteHLSManifest"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CmafGroupSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CmafGroupSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CmafGroupSettings"}
	if s.FragmentLength != nil && *s.FragmentLength < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FragmentLength", 1))
	}
	if s.SegmentLength != nil && *s.SegmentLength < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SegmentLength", 1))
	}
	if s.Encryption != nil {
		if err := s.Encryption.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Encryption", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBaseUrl sets the BaseUrl field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.BaseUrl = &v
	return s
}

// SetClientCache sets the ClientCache field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetClientCache(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.ClientCache = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecSpecification sets the CodecSpecification field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetCodecSpecification(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.CodecSpecification = &v
	return s
}

// SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.Destination = &v
	return s
}

// SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *CmafEncryptionSettings) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.Encryption = v
	return s
}

// SetFragmentLength sets the FragmentLength field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength(v int64) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.FragmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetManifestCompression sets the ManifestCompression field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetManifestCompression(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.ManifestCompression = &v
	return s
}

// SetManifestDurationFormat sets the ManifestDurationFormat field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetManifestDurationFormat(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.ManifestDurationFormat = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinBufferTime sets the MinBufferTime field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetMinBufferTime(v int64) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.MinBufferTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinFinalSegmentLength sets the MinFinalSegmentLength field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetMinFinalSegmentLength(v float64) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.MinFinalSegmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentControl sets the SegmentControl field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.SegmentControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentLength sets the SegmentLength field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength(v int64) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.SegmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetStreamInfResolution sets the StreamInfResolution field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetStreamInfResolution(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.StreamInfResolution = &v
	return s
}

// SetWriteDashManifest sets the WriteDashManifest field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetWriteDashManifest(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.WriteDashManifest = &v
	return s
}

// SetWriteHlsManifest sets the WriteHlsManifest field's value.
func (s *CmafGroupSettings) SetWriteHlsManifest(v string) *CmafGroupSettings {
	s.WriteHlsManifest = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for color correction.
type ColorCorrector struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Brightness level.
	Brightness *int64 `locationName:"brightness" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Determines if colorspace conversion will be performed. If set to _None_,
	// no conversion will be performed. If _Force 601_ or _Force 709_ are selected,
	// conversion will be performed for inputs with differing colorspaces. An input's
	// colorspace can be specified explicitly in the "Video Selector":#inputs-video_selector
	// if necessary.
	ColorSpaceConversion *string `locationName:"colorSpaceConversion" type:"string" enum:"ColorSpaceConversion"`

	// Contrast level.
	Contrast *int64 `locationName:"contrast" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use the HDR master display (Hdr10Metadata) settings to correct HDR metadata
	// or to provide missing metadata. Note that these settings are not color correction.
	Hdr10Metadata *Hdr10Metadata `locationName:"hdr10Metadata" type:"structure"`

	// Hue in degrees.
	Hue *int64 `locationName:"hue" type:"integer"`

	// Saturation level.
	Saturation *int64 `locationName:"saturation" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ColorCorrector) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ColorCorrector) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ColorCorrector) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ColorCorrector"}
	if s.Brightness != nil && *s.Brightness < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Brightness", 1))
	}
	if s.Contrast != nil && *s.Contrast < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Contrast", 1))
	}
	if s.Hue != nil && *s.Hue < -180 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Hue", -180))
	}
	if s.Saturation != nil && *s.Saturation < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Saturation", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBrightness sets the Brightness field's value.
func (s *ColorCorrector) SetBrightness(v int64) *ColorCorrector {
	s.Brightness = &v
	return s
}

// SetColorSpaceConversion sets the ColorSpaceConversion field's value.
func (s *ColorCorrector) SetColorSpaceConversion(v string) *ColorCorrector {
	s.ColorSpaceConversion = &v
	return s
}

// SetContrast sets the Contrast field's value.
func (s *ColorCorrector) SetContrast(v int64) *ColorCorrector {
	s.Contrast = &v
	return s
}

// SetHdr10Metadata sets the Hdr10Metadata field's value.
func (s *ColorCorrector) SetHdr10Metadata(v *Hdr10Metadata) *ColorCorrector {
	s.Hdr10Metadata = v
	return s
}

// SetHue sets the Hue field's value.
func (s *ColorCorrector) SetHue(v int64) *ColorCorrector {
	s.Hue = &v
	return s
}

// SetSaturation sets the Saturation field's value.
func (s *ColorCorrector) SetSaturation(v int64) *ColorCorrector {
	s.Saturation = &v
	return s
}

// Container specific settings.
type ContainerSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Container for this output. Some containers require a container settings object.
	// If not specified, the default object will be created.
	Container *string `locationName:"container" type:"string" enum:"ContainerType"`

	// Settings for F4v container
	F4vSettings *F4vSettings `locationName:"f4vSettings" type:"structure"`

	// MPEG-2 TS container settings. These apply to outputs in a File output group
	// when the output's container (ContainerType) is MPEG-2 Transport Stream (M2TS).
	// In these assets, data is organized by the program map table (PMT). Each transport
	// stream program contains subsets of data, including audio, video, and metadata.
	// Each of these subsets of data has a numerical label called a packet identifier
	// (PID). Each transport stream program corresponds to one MediaConvert output.
	// The PMT lists the types of data in a program along with their PID. Downstream
	// systems and players use the program map table to look up the PID for each
	// type of data it accesses and then uses the PIDs to locate specific data within
	// the asset.
	M2tsSettings *M2tsSettings `locationName:"m2tsSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for TS segments in HLS
	M3u8Settings *M3u8Settings `locationName:"m3u8Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for MOV Container.
	MovSettings *MovSettings `locationName:"movSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for MP4 Container
	Mp4Settings *Mp4Settings `locationName:"mp4Settings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ContainerSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ContainerSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ContainerSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ContainerSettings"}
	if s.M2tsSettings != nil {
		if err := s.M2tsSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("M2tsSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.M3u8Settings != nil {
		if err := s.M3u8Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("M3u8Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetContainer sets the Container field's value.
func (s *ContainerSettings) SetContainer(v string) *ContainerSettings {
	s.Container = &v
	return s
}

// SetF4vSettings sets the F4vSettings field's value.
func (s *ContainerSettings) SetF4vSettings(v *F4vSettings) *ContainerSettings {
	s.F4vSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetM2tsSettings sets the M2tsSettings field's value.
func (s *ContainerSettings) SetM2tsSettings(v *M2tsSettings) *ContainerSettings {
	s.M2tsSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetM3u8Settings sets the M3u8Settings field's value.
func (s *ContainerSettings) SetM3u8Settings(v *M3u8Settings) *ContainerSettings {
	s.M3u8Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetMovSettings sets the MovSettings field's value.
func (s *ContainerSettings) SetMovSettings(v *MovSettings) *ContainerSettings {
	s.MovSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetMp4Settings sets the Mp4Settings field's value.
func (s *ContainerSettings) SetMp4Settings(v *Mp4Settings) *ContainerSettings {
	s.Mp4Settings = v
	return s
}

// Send your create job request with your job settings and IAM role. Optionally,
// include user metadata and the ARN for the queue.
type CreateJobInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// This is a beta feature. If you are interested in using this feature, please
	// contact AWS customer support.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Optional. Choose a tag type that AWS Billing and Cost Management will use
	// to sort your AWS Elemental MediaConvert costs on any billing report that
	// you set up. Any transcoding outputs that don't have an associated tag will
	// appear in your billing report unsorted. If you don't choose a valid value
	// for this field, your job outputs will appear on the billing report unsorted.
	BillingTagsSource *string `locationName:"billingTagsSource" type:"string" enum:"BillingTagsSource"`

	// Idempotency token for CreateJob operation.
	ClientRequestToken *string `locationName:"clientRequestToken" type:"string" idempotencyToken:"true"`

	// When you create a job, you can either specify a job template or specify the
	// transcoding settings individually
	JobTemplate *string `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"string"`

	// Optional. When you create a job, you can specify a queue to send it to. If
	// you don't specify, the job will go to the default queue. For more about queues,
	// see the User Guide topic at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// Required. The IAM role you use for creating this job. For details about permissions,
	// see the User Guide topic at the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/iam-role.html.
	//
	// Role is a required field
	Role *string `locationName:"role" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// JobSettings contains all the transcode settings for a job.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs *int64 `locationName:"statusUpdateIntervalInSecs" min:"10" type:"long"`

	// User-defined metadata that you want to associate with an MediaConvert job.
	// You specify metadata in key/value pairs.
	UserMetadata map[string]*string `locationName:"userMetadata" type:"map"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CreateJobInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CreateJobInput"}
	if s.Role == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Role"))
	}
	if s.Settings == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Settings"))
	}
	if s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs != nil && *s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs < 10 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs", 10))
	}
	if s.AccelerationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.AccelerationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AccelerationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *CreateJobInput {
	s.AccelerationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetBillingTagsSource sets the BillingTagsSource field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetBillingTagsSource(v string) *CreateJobInput {
	s.BillingTagsSource = &v
	return s
}

// SetClientRequestToken sets the ClientRequestToken field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetClientRequestToken(v string) *CreateJobInput {
	s.ClientRequestToken = &v
	return s
}

// SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetJobTemplate(v string) *CreateJobInput {
	s.JobTemplate = &v
	return s
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetQueue(v string) *CreateJobInput {
	s.Queue = &v
	return s
}

// SetRole sets the Role field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetRole(v string) *CreateJobInput {
	s.Role = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetSettings(v *JobSettings) *CreateJobInput {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs sets the StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs(v int64) *CreateJobInput {
	s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs = &v
	return s
}

// SetUserMetadata sets the UserMetadata field's value.
func (s *CreateJobInput) SetUserMetadata(v map[string]*string) *CreateJobInput {
	s.UserMetadata = v
	return s
}

// Successful create job requests will return the job JSON.
type CreateJobOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Each job converts an input file into an output file or files. For more information,
	// see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
	Job *Job `locationName:"job" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetJob sets the Job field's value.
func (s *CreateJobOutput) SetJob(v *Job) *CreateJobOutput {
	s.Job = v
	return s
}

// Send your create job template request with the name of the template and the
// JSON for the template. The template JSON should include everything in a valid
// job, except for input location and filename, IAM role, and user metadata.
type CreateJobTemplateInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// This is a beta feature. If you are interested in using this feature please
	// contact AWS customer support.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Optional. A category for the job template you are creating
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. A description of the job template you are creating.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the job template you are creating.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Optional. The queue that jobs created from this template are assigned to.
	// If you don't specify this, jobs will go to the default queue.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template
	// that will be applied to jobs created from it.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobTemplateSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs *int64 `locationName:"statusUpdateIntervalInSecs" min:"10" type:"long"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobTemplateInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobTemplateInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CreateJobTemplateInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Settings == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Settings"))
	}
	if s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs != nil && *s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs < 10 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs", 10))
	}
	if s.AccelerationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.AccelerationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AccelerationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.AccelerationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetCategory(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetDescription(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetQueue(v string) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Queue = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetSettings(v *JobTemplateSettings) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs sets the StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs(v int64) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs = &v
	return s
}

// SetTags sets the Tags field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *CreateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Tags = v
	return s
}

// Successful create job template requests will return the template JSON.
type CreateJobTemplateOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use
	// to quickly create a job.
	JobTemplate *JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobTemplateOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreateJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.
func (s *CreateJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate(v *JobTemplate) *CreateJobTemplateOutput {
	s.JobTemplate = v
	return s
}

// Send your create preset request with the name of the preset and the JSON
// for the output settings specified by the preset.
type CreatePresetInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optional. A category for the preset you are creating.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. A description of the preset you are creating.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the preset you are creating.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Settings for preset
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *PresetSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreatePresetInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreatePresetInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CreatePresetInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CreatePresetInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Settings == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Settings"))
	}
	if s.Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetCategory(v string) *CreatePresetInput {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetDescription(v string) *CreatePresetInput {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetName(v string) *CreatePresetInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetSettings(v *PresetSettings) *CreatePresetInput {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetTags sets the Tags field's value.
func (s *CreatePresetInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *CreatePresetInput {
	s.Tags = v
	return s
}

// Successful create preset requests will return the preset JSON.
type CreatePresetOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that
	// you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.
	Preset *Preset `locationName:"preset" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreatePresetOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreatePresetOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.
func (s *CreatePresetOutput) SetPreset(v *Preset) *CreatePresetOutput {
	s.Preset = v
	return s
}

// Create an on-demand queue by sending a CreateQueue request with the name
// of the queue. Create a reserved queue by sending a CreateQueue request with
// the pricing plan set to RESERVED and with values specified for the settings
// under reservationPlanSettings. When you create a reserved queue, you enter
// into a 12-month commitment to purchase the RTS that you specify. You can't
// cancel this commitment.
type CreateQueueInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optional. A description of the queue that you are creating.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the queue that you are creating.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Specifies whether the pricing plan for the queue is on-demand or reserved.
	// For on-demand, you pay per minute, billed in increments of .01 minute. For
	// reserved, you pay for the transcoding capacity of the entire queue, regardless
	// of how much or how little you use it. Reserved pricing requires a 12-month
	// commitment. When you use the API to create a queue, the default is on-demand.
	PricingPlan *string `locationName:"pricingPlan" type:"string" enum:"PricingPlan"`

	// Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved
	// queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.
	ReservationPlanSettings *ReservationPlanSettings `locationName:"reservationPlanSettings" type:"structure"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreateQueueInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreateQueueInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *CreateQueueInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "CreateQueueInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.ReservationPlanSettings != nil {
		if err := s.ReservationPlanSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ReservationPlanSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetDescription(v string) *CreateQueueInput {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetName(v string) *CreateQueueInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetPricingPlan sets the PricingPlan field's value.
func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetPricingPlan(v string) *CreateQueueInput {
	s.PricingPlan = &v
	return s
}

// SetReservationPlanSettings sets the ReservationPlanSettings field's value.
func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetReservationPlanSettings(v *ReservationPlanSettings) *CreateQueueInput {
	s.ReservationPlanSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetTags sets the Tags field's value.
func (s *CreateQueueInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *CreateQueueInput {
	s.Tags = v
	return s
}

// Successful create queue requests return the name of the queue that you just
// created and information about it.
type CreateQueueOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS
	// account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't
	// specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For
	// more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.
	Queue *Queue `locationName:"queue" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s CreateQueueOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s CreateQueueOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *CreateQueueOutput) SetQueue(v *Queue) *CreateQueueOutput {
	s.Queue = v
	return s
}

// Specifies DRM settings for DASH outputs.
type DashIsoEncryptionSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider
	SpekeKeyProvider *SpekeKeyProvider `locationName:"spekeKeyProvider" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DashIsoEncryptionSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DashIsoEncryptionSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetSpekeKeyProvider sets the SpekeKeyProvider field's value.
func (s *DashIsoEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider(v *SpekeKeyProvider) *DashIsoEncryptionSettings {
	s.SpekeKeyProvider = v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
// DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS.
type DashIsoGroupSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A partial URI prefix that will be put in the manifest (.mpd) file at the
	// top level BaseURL element. Can be used if streams are delivered from a different
	// URL than the manifest file.
	BaseUrl *string `locationName:"baseUrl" type:"string"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// DRM settings.
	Encryption *DashIsoEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// Length of fragments to generate (in seconds). Fragment length must be compatible
	// with GOP size and Framerate. Note that fragments will end on the next keyframe
	// after this number of seconds, so actual fragment length may be longer. When
	// Emit Single File is checked, the fragmentation is internal to a single output
	// file and it does not cause the creation of many output files as in other
	// output types.
	FragmentLength *int64 `locationName:"fragmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Supports HbbTV specification as indicated
	HbbtvCompliance *string `locationName:"hbbtvCompliance" type:"string" enum:"DashIsoHbbtvCompliance"`

	// Minimum time of initially buffered media that is needed to ensure smooth
	// playout.
	MinBufferTime *int64 `locationName:"minBufferTime" type:"integer"`

	// When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally
	// segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES,
	// separate segment files will be created.
	SegmentControl *string `locationName:"segmentControl" type:"string" enum:"DashIsoSegmentControl"`

	// Length of mpd segments to create (in seconds). Note that segments will end
	// on the next keyframe after this number of seconds, so actual segment length
	// may be longer. When Emit Single File is checked, the segmentation is internal
	// to a single output file and it does not cause the creation of many output
	// files as in other output types.
	SegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"segmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// When you enable Precise segment duration in manifests (writeSegmentTimelineInRepresentation),
	// your DASH manifest shows precise segment durations. The segment duration
	// information appears inside the SegmentTimeline element, inside SegmentTemplate
	// at the Representation level. When this feature isn't enabled, the segment
	// durations in your DASH manifest are approximate. The segment duration information
	// appears in the duration attribute of the SegmentTemplate element.
	WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation *string `locationName:"writeSegmentTimelineInRepresentation" type:"string" enum:"DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DashIsoGroupSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DashIsoGroupSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DashIsoGroupSettings"}
	if s.FragmentLength != nil && *s.FragmentLength < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FragmentLength", 1))
	}
	if s.SegmentLength != nil && *s.SegmentLength < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SegmentLength", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBaseUrl sets the BaseUrl field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.BaseUrl = &v
	return s
}

// SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.Destination = &v
	return s
}

// SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *DashIsoEncryptionSettings) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.Encryption = v
	return s
}

// SetFragmentLength sets the FragmentLength field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength(v int64) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.FragmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetHbbtvCompliance sets the HbbtvCompliance field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetHbbtvCompliance(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.HbbtvCompliance = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinBufferTime sets the MinBufferTime field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetMinBufferTime(v int64) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.MinBufferTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentControl sets the SegmentControl field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.SegmentControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentLength sets the SegmentLength field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength(v int64) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.SegmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation sets the WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation field's value.
func (s *DashIsoGroupSettings) SetWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation(v string) *DashIsoGroupSettings {
	s.WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for deinterlacer
type Deinterlacer struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Only applies when you set Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to Deinterlace (DEINTERLACE)
	// or Adaptive (ADAPTIVE). Motion adaptive interpolate (INTERPOLATE) produces
	// sharper pictures, while blend (BLEND) produces smoother motion. Use (INTERPOLATE_TICKER)
	// OR (BLEND_TICKER) if your source file includes a ticker, such as a scrolling
	// headline at the bottom of the frame.
	Algorithm *string `locationName:"algorithm" type:"string" enum:"DeinterlaceAlgorithm"`

	// - When set to NORMAL (default), the deinterlacer does not convert frames
	// that are tagged in metadata as progressive. It will only convert those that
	// are tagged as some other type. - When set to FORCE_ALL_FRAMES, the deinterlacer
	// converts every frame to progressive - even those that are already tagged
	// as progressive. Turn Force mode on only if there is a good chance that the
	// metadata has tagged frames as progressive when they are not progressive.
	// Do not turn on otherwise; processing frames that are already progressive
	// into progressive will probably result in lower quality video.
	Control *string `locationName:"control" type:"string" enum:"DeinterlacerControl"`

	// Use Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to choose how the service will do deinterlacing.
	// Default is Deinterlace. - Deinterlace converts interlaced to progressive.
	// - Inverse telecine converts Hard Telecine 29.97i to progressive 23.976p.
	// - Adaptive auto-detects and converts to progressive.
	Mode *string `locationName:"mode" type:"string" enum:"DeinterlacerMode"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Deinterlacer) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Deinterlacer) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetAlgorithm sets the Algorithm field's value.
func (s *Deinterlacer) SetAlgorithm(v string) *Deinterlacer {
	s.Algorithm = &v
	return s
}

// SetControl sets the Control field's value.
func (s *Deinterlacer) SetControl(v string) *Deinterlacer {
	s.Control = &v
	return s
}

// SetMode sets the Mode field's value.
func (s *Deinterlacer) SetMode(v string) *Deinterlacer {
	s.Mode = &v
	return s
}

// Delete a job template by sending a request with the job template name
type DeleteJobTemplateInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The name of the job template to be deleted.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DeleteJobTemplateInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DeleteJobTemplateInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DeleteJobTemplateInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DeleteJobTemplateInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *DeleteJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *DeleteJobTemplateInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// Delete job template requests will return an OK message or error message with
// an empty body.
type DeleteJobTemplateOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DeleteJobTemplateOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DeleteJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Delete a preset by sending a request with the preset name
type DeletePresetInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The name of the preset to be deleted.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DeletePresetInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DeletePresetInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DeletePresetInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DeletePresetInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *DeletePresetInput) SetName(v string) *DeletePresetInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// Delete preset requests will return an OK message or error message with an
// empty body.
type DeletePresetOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DeletePresetOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DeletePresetOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Delete a queue by sending a request with the queue name. You can't delete
// a queue with an active pricing plan or one that has unprocessed jobs in it.
type DeleteQueueInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The name of the queue that you want to delete.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DeleteQueueInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DeleteQueueInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DeleteQueueInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DeleteQueueInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *DeleteQueueInput) SetName(v string) *DeleteQueueInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// Delete queue requests return an OK message or error message with an empty
// body.
type DeleteQueueOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DeleteQueueOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DeleteQueueOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Send an request with an empty body to the regional API endpoint to get your
// account API endpoint.
type DescribeEndpointsInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optional. Max number of endpoints, up to twenty, that will be returned at
	// one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `locationName:"maxResults" type:"integer"`

	// Optional field, defaults to DEFAULT. Specify DEFAULT for this operation to
	// return your endpoints if any exist, or to create an endpoint for you and
	// return it if one doesn't already exist. Specify GET_ONLY to return your endpoints
	// if any exist, or an empty list if none exist.
	Mode *string `locationName:"mode" type:"string" enum:"DescribeEndpointsMode"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of endpoints.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DescribeEndpointsInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DescribeEndpointsInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.
func (s *DescribeEndpointsInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *DescribeEndpointsInput {
	s.MaxResults = &v
	return s
}

// SetMode sets the Mode field's value.
func (s *DescribeEndpointsInput) SetMode(v string) *DescribeEndpointsInput {
	s.Mode = &v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *DescribeEndpointsInput) SetNextToken(v string) *DescribeEndpointsInput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// Successful describe endpoints requests will return your account API endpoint.
type DescribeEndpointsOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// List of endpoints
	Endpoints []*Endpoint `locationName:"endpoints" type:"list"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of endpoints.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DescribeEndpointsOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DescribeEndpointsOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetEndpoints sets the Endpoints field's value.
func (s *DescribeEndpointsOutput) SetEndpoints(v []*Endpoint) *DescribeEndpointsOutput {
	s.Endpoints = v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *DescribeEndpointsOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *DescribeEndpointsOutput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// Removes an association between the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an AWS Certificate
// Manager (ACM) certificate and an AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource.
type DisassociateCertificateInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The ARN of the ACM certificate that you want to disassociate from your MediaConvert
	// resource.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DisassociateCertificateInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DisassociateCertificateInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DisassociateCertificateInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DisassociateCertificateInput"}
	if s.Arn == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Arn"))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *DisassociateCertificateInput) SetArn(v string) *DisassociateCertificateInput {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// Successful disassociation of Certificate Manager Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
// with Mediaconvert returns an OK message.
type DisassociateCertificateOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DisassociateCertificateOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DisassociateCertificateOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Inserts DVB Network Information Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition
// interval.
type DvbNitSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The numeric value placed in the Network Information Table (NIT).
	NetworkId *int64 `locationName:"networkId" type:"integer"`

	// The network name text placed in the network_name_descriptor inside the Network
	// Information Table. Maximum length is 256 characters.
	NetworkName *string `locationName:"networkName" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	NitInterval *int64 `locationName:"nitInterval" min:"25" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DvbNitSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DvbNitSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DvbNitSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DvbNitSettings"}
	if s.NetworkName != nil && len(*s.NetworkName) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("NetworkName", 1))
	}
	if s.NitInterval != nil && *s.NitInterval < 25 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("NitInterval", 25))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetNetworkId sets the NetworkId field's value.
func (s *DvbNitSettings) SetNetworkId(v int64) *DvbNitSettings {
	s.NetworkId = &v
	return s
}

// SetNetworkName sets the NetworkName field's value.
func (s *DvbNitSettings) SetNetworkName(v string) *DvbNitSettings {
	s.NetworkName = &v
	return s
}

// SetNitInterval sets the NitInterval field's value.
func (s *DvbNitSettings) SetNitInterval(v int64) *DvbNitSettings {
	s.NitInterval = &v
	return s
}

// Inserts DVB Service Description Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition
// interval.
type DvbSdtSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Selects method of inserting SDT information into output stream. "Follow input
	// SDT" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream. "Follow input
	// SDT if present" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream
	// if SDT information is present in the input, otherwise it will fall back on
	// the user-defined values. Enter "SDT Manually" means user will enter the SDT
	// information. "No SDT" means output stream will not contain SDT information.
	OutputSdt *string `locationName:"outputSdt" type:"string" enum:"OutputSdt"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	SdtInterval *int64 `locationName:"sdtInterval" min:"25" type:"integer"`

	// The service name placed in the service_descriptor in the Service Description
	// Table. Maximum length is 256 characters.
	ServiceName *string `locationName:"serviceName" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// The service provider name placed in the service_descriptor in the Service
	// Description Table. Maximum length is 256 characters.
	ServiceProviderName *string `locationName:"serviceProviderName" min:"1" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DvbSdtSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DvbSdtSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DvbSdtSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DvbSdtSettings"}
	if s.SdtInterval != nil && *s.SdtInterval < 25 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SdtInterval", 25))
	}
	if s.ServiceName != nil && len(*s.ServiceName) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("ServiceName", 1))
	}
	if s.ServiceProviderName != nil && len(*s.ServiceProviderName) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("ServiceProviderName", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetOutputSdt sets the OutputSdt field's value.
func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetOutputSdt(v string) *DvbSdtSettings {
	s.OutputSdt = &v
	return s
}

// SetSdtInterval sets the SdtInterval field's value.
func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetSdtInterval(v int64) *DvbSdtSettings {
	s.SdtInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetServiceName sets the ServiceName field's value.
func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetServiceName(v string) *DvbSdtSettings {
	s.ServiceName = &v
	return s
}

// SetServiceProviderName sets the ServiceProviderName field's value.
func (s *DvbSdtSettings) SetServiceProviderName(v string) *DvbSdtSettings {
	s.ServiceProviderName = &v
	return s
}

// DVB-Sub Destination Settings
type DvbSubDestinationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to
	// centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly,
	// setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output.
	// If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter,
	// the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	Alignment *string `locationName:"alignment" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleAlignment"`

	// Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundColor *string `locationName:"backgroundColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the background rectangle. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.
	// Leaving this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent).
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	BackgroundOpacity *int64 `locationName:"backgroundOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for
	// source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	FontColor *string `locationName:"fontColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleFontColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the burned-in captions. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontOpacity *int64 `locationName:"fontOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Font resolution in DPI (dots per inch); default is 96 dpi.All burn-in and
	// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	FontResolution *int64 `locationName:"fontResolution" min:"96" type:"integer"`

	// Provide the font script, using an ISO 15924 script code, if the LanguageCode
	// is not sufficient for determining the script type. Where LanguageCode or
	// CustomLanguageCode is sufficient, use "AUTOMATIC" or leave unset. This is
	// used to help determine the appropriate font for rendering DVB-Sub captions.
	FontScript *string `locationName:"fontScript" type:"string" enum:"FontScript"`

	// A positive integer indicates the exact font size in points. Set to 0 for
	// automatic font size selection. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must
	// match.
	FontSize *int64 `locationName:"fontSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions
	// that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already
	// pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings
	// must match.
	OutlineColor *string `locationName:"outlineColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleOutlineColor"`

	// Specifies font outline size in pixels. This option is not valid for source
	// captions that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
	// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
	// settings must match.
	OutlineSize *int64 `locationName:"outlineSize" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub
	// font settings must match.
	ShadowColor *string `locationName:"shadowColor" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleShadowColor"`

	// Specifies the opacity of the shadow. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent. Leaving
	// this parameter blank is equivalent to setting it to 0 (transparent). All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowOpacity *int64 `locationName:"shadowOpacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the horizontal offset of the shadow relative to the captions in
	// pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels to the left.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowXOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowXOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical offset of the shadow relative to the captions in pixels.
	// A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels above the text. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	ShadowYOffset *int64 `locationName:"shadowYOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify
	// whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions
	// grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to
	// the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional
	// to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.
	TeletextSpacing *string `locationName:"teletextSpacing" type:"string" enum:"DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing"`

	// Specifies the horizontal position of the caption relative to the left side
	// of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting
	// 10 pixels from the left of the output. If no explicit x_position is provided,
	// the horizontal caption position will be determined by the alignment parameter.
	// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
	// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
	// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	XPosition *int64 `locationName:"xPosition" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the vertical position of the caption relative to the top of the
	// output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10
	// pixels from the top of the output. If no explicit y_position is provided,
	// the caption will be positioned towards the bottom of the output. This option
	// is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext.
	// These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All
	// burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
	YPosition *int64 `locationName:"yPosition" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DvbSubDestinationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DvbSubDestinationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DvbSubDestinationSettings"}
	if s.FontResolution != nil && *s.FontResolution < 96 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FontResolution", 96))
	}
	if s.ShadowXOffset != nil && *s.ShadowXOffset < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ShadowXOffset", -2.147483648e+09))
	}
	if s.ShadowYOffset != nil && *s.ShadowYOffset < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ShadowYOffset", -2.147483648e+09))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAlignment sets the Alignment field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetAlignment(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.Alignment = &v
	return s
}

// SetBackgroundColor sets the BackgroundColor field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.BackgroundColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetBackgroundOpacity sets the BackgroundOpacity field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetBackgroundOpacity(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.BackgroundOpacity = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontColor sets the FontColor field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.FontColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontOpacity sets the FontOpacity field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontOpacity(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.FontOpacity = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontResolution sets the FontResolution field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontResolution(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.FontResolution = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontScript sets the FontScript field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontScript(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.FontScript = &v
	return s
}

// SetFontSize sets the FontSize field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetFontSize(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.FontSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutlineColor sets the OutlineColor field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetOutlineColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.OutlineColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutlineSize sets the OutlineSize field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetOutlineSize(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.OutlineSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowColor sets the ShadowColor field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowColor(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowColor = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowOpacity sets the ShadowOpacity field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowOpacity(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowOpacity = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowXOffset sets the ShadowXOffset field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowXOffset(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowXOffset = &v
	return s
}

// SetShadowYOffset sets the ShadowYOffset field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetShadowYOffset(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.ShadowYOffset = &v
	return s
}

// SetTeletextSpacing sets the TeletextSpacing field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetTeletextSpacing(v string) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.TeletextSpacing = &v
	return s
}

// SetXPosition sets the XPosition field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetXPosition(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.XPosition = &v
	return s
}

// SetYPosition sets the YPosition field's value.
func (s *DvbSubDestinationSettings) SetYPosition(v int64) *DvbSubDestinationSettings {
	s.YPosition = &v
	return s
}

// DVB Sub Source Settings
type DvbSubSourceSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// When using DVB-Sub with Burn-In or SMPTE-TT, use this PID for the source
	// content. Unused for DVB-Sub passthrough. All DVB-Sub content is passed through,
	// regardless of selectors.
	Pid *int64 `locationName:"pid" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DvbSubSourceSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DvbSubSourceSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DvbSubSourceSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DvbSubSourceSettings"}
	if s.Pid != nil && *s.Pid < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Pid", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetPid sets the Pid field's value.
func (s *DvbSubSourceSettings) SetPid(v int64) *DvbSubSourceSettings {
	s.Pid = &v
	return s
}

// Inserts DVB Time and Date Table (TDT) at the specified table repetition interval.
type DvbTdtSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	TdtInterval *int64 `locationName:"tdtInterval" min:"1000" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s DvbTdtSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s DvbTdtSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *DvbTdtSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "DvbTdtSettings"}
	if s.TdtInterval != nil && *s.TdtInterval < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("TdtInterval", 1000))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetTdtInterval sets the TdtInterval field's value.
func (s *DvbTdtSettings) SetTdtInterval(v int64) *DvbTdtSettings {
	s.TdtInterval = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value EAC3.
type Eac3Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If set to ATTENUATE_3_DB, applies a 3 dB attenuation to the surround channels.
	// Only used for 3/2 coding mode.
	AttenuationControl *string `locationName:"attenuationControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3AttenuationControl"`

	// Average bitrate in bits/second. Valid bitrates depend on the coding mode.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"64000" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the "Bitstream Mode" (bsmod) for the emitted E-AC-3 stream. See
	// ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E) for background on these values.
	BitstreamMode *string `locationName:"bitstreamMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3BitstreamMode"`

	// Dolby Digital Plus coding mode. Determines number of channels.
	CodingMode *string `locationName:"codingMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3CodingMode"`

	// Activates a DC highpass filter for all input channels.
	DcFilter *string `locationName:"dcFilter" type:"string" enum:"Eac3DcFilter"`

	// Sets the dialnorm for the output. If blank and input audio is Dolby Digital
	// Plus, dialnorm will be passed through.
	Dialnorm *int64 `locationName:"dialnorm" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Enables Dynamic Range Compression that restricts the absolute peak level
	// for a signal.
	DynamicRangeCompressionLine *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionLine" type:"string" enum:"Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine"`

	// Enables Heavy Dynamic Range Compression, ensures that the instantaneous signal
	// peaks do not exceed specified levels.
	DynamicRangeCompressionRf *string `locationName:"dynamicRangeCompressionRf" type:"string" enum:"Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf"`

	// When encoding 3/2 audio, controls whether the LFE channel is enabled
	LfeControl *string `locationName:"lfeControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3LfeControl"`

	// Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only
	// valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
	LfeFilter *string `locationName:"lfeFilter" type:"string" enum:"Eac3LfeFilter"`

	// Left only/Right only center mix level. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.Valid
	// values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5 -3.0 -4.5 -6.0 -60
	LoRoCenterMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"loRoCenterMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Left only/Right only surround mix level. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.Valid
	// values: -1.5 -3.0 -4.5 -6.0 -60
	LoRoSurroundMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"loRoSurroundMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Left total/Right total center mix level. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.Valid
	// values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5 -3.0 -4.5 -6.0 -60
	LtRtCenterMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"ltRtCenterMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// Left total/Right total surround mix level. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.Valid
	// values: -1.5 -3.0 -4.5 -6.0 -60
	LtRtSurroundMixLevel *float64 `locationName:"ltRtSurroundMixLevel" type:"double"`

	// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+,
	// or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied
	// from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
	MetadataControl *string `locationName:"metadataControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3MetadataControl"`

	// When set to WHEN_POSSIBLE, input DD+ audio will be passed through if it is
	// present on the input. this detection is dynamic over the life of the transcode.
	// Inputs that alternate between DD+ and non-DD+ content will have a consistent
	// DD+ output as the system alternates between passthrough and encoding.
	PassthroughControl *string `locationName:"passthroughControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3PassthroughControl"`

	// Controls the amount of phase-shift applied to the surround channels. Only
	// used for 3/2 coding mode.
	PhaseControl *string `locationName:"phaseControl" type:"string" enum:"Eac3PhaseControl"`

	// Sample rate in hz. Sample rate is always 48000.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"48000" type:"integer"`

	// Stereo downmix preference. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.
	StereoDownmix *string `locationName:"stereoDownmix" type:"string" enum:"Eac3StereoDownmix"`

	// When encoding 3/2 audio, sets whether an extra center back surround channel
	// is matrix encoded into the left and right surround channels.
	SurroundExMode *string `locationName:"surroundExMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3SurroundExMode"`

	// When encoding 2/0 audio, sets whether Dolby Surround is matrix encoded into
	// the two channels.
	SurroundMode *string `locationName:"surroundMode" type:"string" enum:"Eac3SurroundMode"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Eac3Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Eac3Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *Eac3Settings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "Eac3Settings"}
	if s.Bitrate != nil && *s.Bitrate < 64000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Bitrate", 64000))
	}
	if s.Dialnorm != nil && *s.Dialnorm < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Dialnorm", 1))
	}
	if s.SampleRate != nil && *s.SampleRate < 48000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SampleRate", 48000))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAttenuationControl sets the AttenuationControl field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetAttenuationControl(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.AttenuationControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Eac3Settings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetBitstreamMode sets the BitstreamMode field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetBitstreamMode(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.BitstreamMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodingMode sets the CodingMode field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetCodingMode(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.CodingMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetDcFilter sets the DcFilter field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDcFilter(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.DcFilter = &v
	return s
}

// SetDialnorm sets the Dialnorm field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDialnorm(v int64) *Eac3Settings {
	s.Dialnorm = &v
	return s
}

// SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine sets the DynamicRangeCompressionLine field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionLine(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.DynamicRangeCompressionLine = &v
	return s
}

// SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf sets the DynamicRangeCompressionRf field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetDynamicRangeCompressionRf(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.DynamicRangeCompressionRf = &v
	return s
}

// SetLfeControl sets the LfeControl field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLfeControl(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.LfeControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetLfeFilter sets the LfeFilter field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLfeFilter(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.LfeFilter = &v
	return s
}

// SetLoRoCenterMixLevel sets the LoRoCenterMixLevel field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLoRoCenterMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings {
	s.LoRoCenterMixLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel sets the LoRoSurroundMixLevel field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLoRoSurroundMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings {
	s.LoRoSurroundMixLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetLtRtCenterMixLevel sets the LtRtCenterMixLevel field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLtRtCenterMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings {
	s.LtRtCenterMixLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel sets the LtRtSurroundMixLevel field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetLtRtSurroundMixLevel(v float64) *Eac3Settings {
	s.LtRtSurroundMixLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetMetadataControl sets the MetadataControl field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetMetadataControl(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.MetadataControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetPassthroughControl sets the PassthroughControl field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetPassthroughControl(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.PassthroughControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetPhaseControl sets the PhaseControl field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetPhaseControl(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.PhaseControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *Eac3Settings {
	s.SampleRate = &v
	return s
}

// SetStereoDownmix sets the StereoDownmix field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetStereoDownmix(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.StereoDownmix = &v
	return s
}

// SetSurroundExMode sets the SurroundExMode field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetSurroundExMode(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.SurroundExMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetSurroundMode sets the SurroundMode field's value.
func (s *Eac3Settings) SetSurroundMode(v string) *Eac3Settings {
	s.SurroundMode = &v
	return s
}

// Settings specific to embedded/ancillary caption outputs, including 608/708
// Channel destination number.
type EmbeddedDestinationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Ignore this setting unless your input captions are SCC format and your output
	// container is MXF. With this combination of input captions format and output
	// container, you can optionally use this setting to replace the input channel
	// number with the track number that you specify. Specify a different number
	// for each output captions track. If you don't specify an output track number,
	// the system uses the input channel number for the output channel number. This
	// setting applies to each output individually. You can optionally combine two
	// captions channels in your output. The two output channel numbers can be one
	// of the following pairs: 1,3; 2,4; 1,4; or 2,3.
	Destination608ChannelNumber *int64 `locationName:"destination608ChannelNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s EmbeddedDestinationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s EmbeddedDestinationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *EmbeddedDestinationSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "EmbeddedDestinationSettings"}
	if s.Destination608ChannelNumber != nil && *s.Destination608ChannelNumber < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Destination608ChannelNumber", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetDestination608ChannelNumber sets the Destination608ChannelNumber field's value.
func (s *EmbeddedDestinationSettings) SetDestination608ChannelNumber(v int64) *EmbeddedDestinationSettings {
	s.Destination608ChannelNumber = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for embedded captions Source
type EmbeddedSourceSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// When set to UPCONVERT, 608 data is both passed through via the "608 compatibility
	// bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into 708. 708 data
	// present in the source content will be discarded.
	Convert608To708 *string `locationName:"convert608To708" type:"string" enum:"EmbeddedConvert608To708"`

	// Specifies the 608/708 channel number within the video track from which to
	// extract captions. Unused for passthrough.
	Source608ChannelNumber *int64 `locationName:"source608ChannelNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies the video track index used for extracting captions. The system
	// only supports one input video track, so this should always be set to '1'.
	Source608TrackNumber *int64 `locationName:"source608TrackNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s EmbeddedSourceSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s EmbeddedSourceSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "EmbeddedSourceSettings"}
	if s.Source608ChannelNumber != nil && *s.Source608ChannelNumber < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Source608ChannelNumber", 1))
	}
	if s.Source608TrackNumber != nil && *s.Source608TrackNumber < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Source608TrackNumber", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetConvert608To708 sets the Convert608To708 field's value.
func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetConvert608To708(v string) *EmbeddedSourceSettings {
	s.Convert608To708 = &v
	return s
}

// SetSource608ChannelNumber sets the Source608ChannelNumber field's value.
func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetSource608ChannelNumber(v int64) *EmbeddedSourceSettings {
	s.Source608ChannelNumber = &v
	return s
}

// SetSource608TrackNumber sets the Source608TrackNumber field's value.
func (s *EmbeddedSourceSettings) SetSource608TrackNumber(v int64) *EmbeddedSourceSettings {
	s.Source608TrackNumber = &v
	return s
}

// Describes an account-specific API endpoint.
type Endpoint struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// URL of endpoint
	Url *string `locationName:"url" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Endpoint) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Endpoint) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetUrl sets the Url field's value.
func (s *Endpoint) SetUrl(v string) *Endpoint {
	s.Url = &v
	return s
}

// ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification defined by OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
type EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Provide your ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification XML document inside
	// your JSON job settings. Form the XML document as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
	// The transcoder will use the Manifest Conditioning instructions in the message
	// that you supply.
	MccXml *string `locationName:"mccXml" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetMccXml sets the MccXml field's value.
func (s *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) SetMccXml(v string) *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification {
	s.MccXml = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for Event Signaling And Messaging (ESAM). If you don't do ad insertion,
// you can ignore these settings.
type EsamSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specifies an ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification XML as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
	// The transcoder uses the manifest conditioning instructions that you provide
	// in the setting MCC XML (mccXml).
	ManifestConfirmConditionNotification *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification `locationName:"manifestConfirmConditionNotification" type:"structure"`

	// Specifies the stream distance, in milliseconds, between the SCTE 35 messages
	// that the transcoder places and the splice points that they refer to. If the
	// time between the start of the asset and the SCTE-35 message is less than
	// this value, then the transcoder places the SCTE-35 marker at the beginning
	// of the stream.
	ResponseSignalPreroll *int64 `locationName:"responseSignalPreroll" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies an ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
	// The transcoder uses the signal processing instructions that you provide in
	// the setting SCC XML (sccXml).
	SignalProcessingNotification *EsamSignalProcessingNotification `locationName:"signalProcessingNotification" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s EsamSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s EsamSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetManifestConfirmConditionNotification sets the ManifestConfirmConditionNotification field's value.
func (s *EsamSettings) SetManifestConfirmConditionNotification(v *EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification) *EsamSettings {
	s.ManifestConfirmConditionNotification = v
	return s
}

// SetResponseSignalPreroll sets the ResponseSignalPreroll field's value.
func (s *EsamSettings) SetResponseSignalPreroll(v int64) *EsamSettings {
	s.ResponseSignalPreroll = &v
	return s
}

// SetSignalProcessingNotification sets the SignalProcessingNotification field's value.
func (s *EsamSettings) SetSignalProcessingNotification(v *EsamSignalProcessingNotification) *EsamSettings {
	s.SignalProcessingNotification = v
	return s
}

// ESAM SignalProcessingNotification data defined by OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
type EsamSignalProcessingNotification struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Provide your ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML document inside your JSON
	// job settings. Form the XML document as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025. The
	// transcoder will use the signal processing instructions in the message that
	// you supply. Provide your ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML document inside
	// your JSON job settings. If you want the service to place SCTE-35 markers
	// at the insertion points you specify in the XML document, you must also enable
	// SCTE-35 ESAM (scte35Esam). Note that you can either specify an ESAM XML document
	// or enable SCTE-35 passthrough. You can't do both.
	SccXml *string `locationName:"sccXml" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s EsamSignalProcessingNotification) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s EsamSignalProcessingNotification) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetSccXml sets the SccXml field's value.
func (s *EsamSignalProcessingNotification) SetSccXml(v string) *EsamSignalProcessingNotification {
	s.SccXml = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for F4v container
type F4vSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning
	// of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed
	// normally at the end.
	MoovPlacement *string `locationName:"moovPlacement" type:"string" enum:"F4vMoovPlacement"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s F4vSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s F4vSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetMoovPlacement sets the MoovPlacement field's value.
func (s *F4vSettings) SetMoovPlacement(v string) *F4vSettings {
	s.MoovPlacement = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
// FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS.
type FileGroupSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s FileGroupSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s FileGroupSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.
func (s *FileGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *FileGroupSettings {
	s.Destination = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for File-based Captions in Source
type FileSourceSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If set to UPCONVERT, 608 caption data is both passed through via the "608
	// compatibility bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into
	// 708. 708 data present in the source content will be discarded.
	Convert608To708 *string `locationName:"convert608To708" type:"string" enum:"FileSourceConvert608To708"`

	// External caption file used for loading captions. Accepted file extensions
	// are 'scc', 'ttml', 'dfxp', 'stl', 'srt', and 'smi'.
	SourceFile *string `locationName:"sourceFile" min:"14" type:"string"`

	// Specifies a time delta in seconds to offset the captions from the source
	// file.
	TimeDelta *int64 `locationName:"timeDelta" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s FileSourceSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s FileSourceSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *FileSourceSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "FileSourceSettings"}
	if s.SourceFile != nil && len(*s.SourceFile) < 14 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("SourceFile", 14))
	}
	if s.TimeDelta != nil && *s.TimeDelta < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("TimeDelta", -2.147483648e+09))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetConvert608To708 sets the Convert608To708 field's value.
func (s *FileSourceSettings) SetConvert608To708(v string) *FileSourceSettings {
	s.Convert608To708 = &v
	return s
}

// SetSourceFile sets the SourceFile field's value.
func (s *FileSourceSettings) SetSourceFile(v string) *FileSourceSettings {
	s.SourceFile = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimeDelta sets the TimeDelta field's value.
func (s *FileSourceSettings) SetTimeDelta(v int64) *FileSourceSettings {
	s.TimeDelta = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value FRAME_CAPTURE.
type FrameCaptureSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Frame capture will encode the first frame of the output stream, then one
	// frame every framerateDenominator/framerateNumerator seconds. For example,
	// settings of framerateNumerator = 1 and framerateDenominator = 3 (a rate of
	// 1/3 frame per second) will capture the first frame, then 1 frame every 3s.
	// Files will be named as filename.n.jpg where n is the 0-based sequence number
	// of each Capture.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame capture will encode the first frame of the output stream, then one
	// frame every framerateDenominator/framerateNumerator seconds. For example,
	// settings of framerateNumerator = 1 and framerateDenominator = 3 (a rate of
	// 1/3 frame per second) will capture the first frame, then 1 frame every 3s.
	// Files will be named as filename.NNNNNNN.jpg where N is the 0-based frame
	// sequence number zero padded to 7 decimal places.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Maximum number of captures (encoded jpg output files).
	MaxCaptures *int64 `locationName:"maxCaptures" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// JPEG Quality - a higher value equals higher quality.
	Quality *int64 `locationName:"quality" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s FrameCaptureSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s FrameCaptureSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "FrameCaptureSettings"}
	if s.FramerateDenominator != nil && *s.FramerateDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.FramerateNumerator != nil && *s.FramerateNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateNumerator", 1))
	}
	if s.MaxCaptures != nil && *s.MaxCaptures < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxCaptures", 1))
	}
	if s.Quality != nil && *s.Quality < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Quality", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.
func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings {
	s.FramerateDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.
func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings {
	s.FramerateNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxCaptures sets the MaxCaptures field's value.
func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetMaxCaptures(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings {
	s.MaxCaptures = &v
	return s
}

// SetQuality sets the Quality field's value.
func (s *FrameCaptureSettings) SetQuality(v int64) *FrameCaptureSettings {
	s.Quality = &v
	return s
}

// Query a job by sending a request with the job ID.
type GetJobInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// the job ID of the job.
	//
	// Id is a required field
	Id *string `location:"uri" locationName:"id" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetJobInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetJobInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *GetJobInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "GetJobInput"}
	if s.Id == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Id"))
	}
	if s.Id != nil && len(*s.Id) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Id", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetId sets the Id field's value.
func (s *GetJobInput) SetId(v string) *GetJobInput {
	s.Id = &v
	return s
}

// Successful get job requests will return an OK message and the job JSON.
type GetJobOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Each job converts an input file into an output file or files. For more information,
	// see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
	Job *Job `locationName:"job" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetJobOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetJobOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetJob sets the Job field's value.
func (s *GetJobOutput) SetJob(v *Job) *GetJobOutput {
	s.Job = v
	return s
}

// Query a job template by sending a request with the job template name.
type GetJobTemplateInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The name of the job template.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetJobTemplateInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetJobTemplateInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *GetJobTemplateInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "GetJobTemplateInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *GetJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *GetJobTemplateInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// Successful get job template requests will return an OK message and the job
// template JSON.
type GetJobTemplateOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use
	// to quickly create a job.
	JobTemplate *JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetJobTemplateOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.
func (s *GetJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate(v *JobTemplate) *GetJobTemplateOutput {
	s.JobTemplate = v
	return s
}

// Query a preset by sending a request with the preset name.
type GetPresetInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The name of the preset.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetPresetInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetPresetInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *GetPresetInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "GetPresetInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *GetPresetInput) SetName(v string) *GetPresetInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// Successful get preset requests will return an OK message and the preset JSON.
type GetPresetOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that
	// you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.
	Preset *Preset `locationName:"preset" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetPresetOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetPresetOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.
func (s *GetPresetOutput) SetPreset(v *Preset) *GetPresetOutput {
	s.Preset = v
	return s
}

// Get information about a queue by sending a request with the queue name.
type GetQueueInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The name of the queue that you want information about.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetQueueInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetQueueInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *GetQueueInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "GetQueueInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *GetQueueInput) SetName(v string) *GetQueueInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// Successful get queue requests return an OK message and information about
// the queue in JSON.
type GetQueueOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS
	// account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't
	// specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For
	// more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.
	Queue *Queue `locationName:"queue" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s GetQueueOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s GetQueueOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *GetQueueOutput) SetQueue(v *Queue) *GetQueueOutput {
	s.Queue = v
	return s
}

// Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.264 codec.
// Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate
// control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control
// mode.
type H264QvbrSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use this setting only when Rate control mode is QVBR and Quality tuning level
	// is Multi-pass HQ. For Max average bitrate values suited to the complexity
	// of your input video, the service limits the average bitrate of the video
	// part of this output to the value you choose. That is, the total size of the
	// video element is less than or equal to the value you set multiplied by the
	// number of seconds of encoded output.
	MaxAverageBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxAverageBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Required when you use QVBR rate control mode. That is, when you specify qvbrSettings
	// within h264Settings. Specify the target quality level for this output, from
	// 1 to 10. Use higher numbers for greater quality. Level 10 results in nearly
	// lossless compression. The quality level for most broadcast-quality transcodes
	// is between 6 and 9.
	QvbrQualityLevel *int64 `locationName:"qvbrQualityLevel" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s H264QvbrSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s H264QvbrSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *H264QvbrSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "H264QvbrSettings"}
	if s.MaxAverageBitrate != nil && *s.MaxAverageBitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxAverageBitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.QvbrQualityLevel != nil && *s.QvbrQualityLevel < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("QvbrQualityLevel", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetMaxAverageBitrate sets the MaxAverageBitrate field's value.
func (s *H264QvbrSettings) SetMaxAverageBitrate(v int64) *H264QvbrSettings {
	s.MaxAverageBitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetQvbrQualityLevel sets the QvbrQualityLevel field's value.
func (s *H264QvbrSettings) SetQvbrQualityLevel(v int64) *H264QvbrSettings {
	s.QvbrQualityLevel = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value H_264.
type H264Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
	// quality.
	AdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"adaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264AdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Average bitrate in bits/second. Required for VBR and CBR. For MS Smooth outputs,
	// bitrates must be unique when rounded down to the nearest multiple of 1000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Specify an H.264 level that is consistent with your output video settings.
	// If you aren't sure what level to specify, choose Auto (AUTO).
	CodecLevel *string `locationName:"codecLevel" type:"string" enum:"H264CodecLevel"`

	// H.264 Profile. High 4:2:2 and 10-bit profiles are only available with the
	// AVC-I License.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"H264CodecProfile"`

	// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
	// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
	// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
	// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
	// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
	DynamicSubGop *string `locationName:"dynamicSubGop" type:"string" enum:"H264DynamicSubGop"`

	// Entropy encoding mode. Use CABAC (must be in Main or High profile) or CAVLC.
	EntropyEncoding *string `locationName:"entropyEncoding" type:"string" enum:"H264EntropyEncoding"`

	// Choosing FORCE_FIELD disables PAFF encoding for interlaced outputs.
	FieldEncoding *string `locationName:"fieldEncoding" type:"string" enum:"H264FieldEncoding"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.
	FlickerAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"flickerAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job specification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"H264FramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"H264FramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// When you use the API for transcode jobs that use frame rate conversion, specify
	// the frame rate as a fraction. For example, 24000 / 1001 = 23.976 fps. Use
	// FramerateDenominator to specify the denominator of this fraction. In this
	// example, use 1001 for the value of FramerateDenominator. When you use the
	// console for transcode jobs that use frame rate conversion, provide the value
	// as a decimal number for Framerate. In this example, specify 23.976.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame rate numerator - frame rate is a fraction, e.g. 24000 / 1001 = 23.976
	// fps.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames >
	// 1.
	GopBReference *string `locationName:"gopBReference" type:"string" enum:"H264GopBReference"`

	// Frequency of closed GOPs. In streaming applications, it is recommended that
	// this be set to 1 so a decoder joining mid-stream will receive an IDR frame
	// as quickly as possible. Setting this value to 0 will break output segmenting.
	GopClosedCadence *int64 `locationName:"gopClosedCadence" type:"integer"`

	// GOP Length (keyframe interval) in frames or seconds. Must be greater than
	// zero.
	GopSize *float64 `locationName:"gopSize" type:"double"`

	// Indicates if the GOP Size in H264 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds
	// the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
	GopSizeUnits *string `locationName:"gopSizeUnits" type:"string" enum:"H264GopSizeUnits"`

	// Percentage of the buffer that should initially be filled (HRD buffer model).
	HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferInitialFillPercentage" type:"integer"`

	// Size of buffer (HRD buffer model) in bits. For example, enter five megabits
	// as 5000000.
	HrdBufferSize *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferSize" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type, as follows. - If the source is interlaced,
	// the output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will
	// follow the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first"
	// and "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will
	// be interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"H264InterlaceMode"`

	// Maximum bitrate in bits/second. For example, enter five megabits per second
	// as 5000000. Required when Rate control mode is QVBR.
	MaxBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Enforces separation between repeated (cadence) I-frames and I-frames inserted
	// by Scene Change Detection. If a scene change I-frame is within I-interval
	// frames of a cadence I-frame, the GOP is shrunk and/or stretched to the scene
	// change I-frame. GOP stretch requires enabling lookahead as well as setting
	// I-interval. The normal cadence resumes for the next GOP. This setting is
	// only used when Scene Change Detect is enabled. Note: Maximum GOP stretch
	// = GOP size + Min-I-interval - 1
	MinIInterval *int64 `locationName:"minIInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Number of B-frames between reference frames.
	NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames" type:"integer"`

	// Number of reference frames to use. The encoder may use more than requested
	// if using B-frames and/or interlaced encoding.
	NumberReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberReferenceFrames" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
	// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
	// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"H264ParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Quality tuning level (H264QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
	// use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass
	// video encoding.
	QualityTuningLevel *string `locationName:"qualityTuningLevel" type:"string" enum:"H264QualityTuningLevel"`

	// Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.264 codec.
	// Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate
	// control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control
	// mode.
	QvbrSettings *H264QvbrSettings `locationName:"qvbrSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR),
	// constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"H264RateControlMode"`

	// Places a PPS header on each encoded picture, even if repeated.
	RepeatPps *string `locationName:"repeatPps" type:"string" enum:"H264RepeatPps"`

	// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
	SceneChangeDetect *string `locationName:"sceneChangeDetect" type:"string" enum:"H264SceneChangeDetect"`

	// Number of slices per picture. Must be less than or equal to the number of
	// macroblock rows for progressive pictures, and less than or equal to half
	// the number of macroblock rows for interlaced pictures.
	Slices *int64 `locationName:"slices" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"H264SlowPal"`

	// Softness. Selects quantizer matrix, larger values reduce high-frequency content
	// in the encoded image.
	Softness *int64 `locationName:"softness" type:"integer"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
	// complexity.
	SpatialAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"spatialAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Produces a bitstream compliant with SMPTE RP-2027.
	Syntax *string `locationName:"syntax" type:"string" enum:"H264Syntax"`

	// This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate)
	// field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors
	// > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced
	// Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive,
	// Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output
	// from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output
	// to 29.97i.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"H264Telecine"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
	// complexity.
	TemporalAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"temporalAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.
	UnregisteredSeiTimecode *string `locationName:"unregisteredSeiTimecode" type:"string" enum:"H264UnregisteredSeiTimecode"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s H264Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s H264Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *H264Settings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "H264Settings"}
	if s.Bitrate != nil && *s.Bitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Bitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.FramerateDenominator != nil && *s.FramerateDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.FramerateNumerator != nil && *s.FramerateNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateNumerator", 1))
	}
	if s.MaxBitrate != nil && *s.MaxBitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxBitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.NumberReferenceFrames != nil && *s.NumberReferenceFrames < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("NumberReferenceFrames", 1))
	}
	if s.ParDenominator != nil && *s.ParDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.ParNumerator != nil && *s.ParNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParNumerator", 1))
	}
	if s.Slices != nil && *s.Slices < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Slices", 1))
	}
	if s.QvbrSettings != nil {
		if err := s.QvbrSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("QvbrSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAdaptiveQuantization sets the AdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.AdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecLevel sets the CodecLevel field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetCodecLevel(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.CodecLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.CodecProfile = &v
	return s
}

// SetDynamicSubGop sets the DynamicSubGop field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetDynamicSubGop(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.DynamicSubGop = &v
	return s
}

// SetEntropyEncoding sets the EntropyEncoding field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetEntropyEncoding(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.EntropyEncoding = &v
	return s
}

// SetFieldEncoding sets the FieldEncoding field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetFieldEncoding(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.FieldEncoding = &v
	return s
}

// SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization sets the FlickerAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.FlickerAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.FramerateControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.FramerateConversionAlgorithm = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.FramerateDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.FramerateNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopBReference sets the GopBReference field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetGopBReference(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.GopBReference = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopClosedCadence sets the GopClosedCadence field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetGopClosedCadence(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.GopClosedCadence = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopSize sets the GopSize field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetGopSize(v float64) *H264Settings {
	s.GopSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopSizeUnits sets the GopSizeUnits field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetGopSizeUnits(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.GopSizeUnits = &v
	return s
}

// SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage sets the HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage = &v
	return s
}

// SetHrdBufferSize sets the HrdBufferSize field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetHrdBufferSize(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.HrdBufferSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.InterlaceMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxBitrate sets the MaxBitrate field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetMaxBitrate(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.MaxBitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinIInterval sets the MinIInterval field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetMinIInterval(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.MinIInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames sets the NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames = &v
	return s
}

// SetNumberReferenceFrames sets the NumberReferenceFrames field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetNumberReferenceFrames(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.NumberReferenceFrames = &v
	return s
}

// SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetParControl(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.ParControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.ParDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.ParNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetQualityTuningLevel sets the QualityTuningLevel field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.QualityTuningLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetQvbrSettings sets the QvbrSettings field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetQvbrSettings(v *H264QvbrSettings) *H264Settings {
	s.QvbrSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.RateControlMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetRepeatPps sets the RepeatPps field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetRepeatPps(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.RepeatPps = &v
	return s
}

// SetSceneChangeDetect sets the SceneChangeDetect field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.SceneChangeDetect = &v
	return s
}

// SetSlices sets the Slices field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetSlices(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.Slices = &v
	return s
}

// SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetSlowPal(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.SlowPal = &v
	return s
}

// SetSoftness sets the Softness field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetSoftness(v int64) *H264Settings {
	s.Softness = &v
	return s
}

// SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization sets the SpatialAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.SpatialAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetSyntax sets the Syntax field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetSyntax(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.Syntax = &v
	return s
}

// SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetTelecine(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.Telecine = &v
	return s
}

// SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization sets the TemporalAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.TemporalAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode sets the UnregisteredSeiTimecode field's value.
func (s *H264Settings) SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode(v string) *H264Settings {
	s.UnregisteredSeiTimecode = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.265 codec.
// Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate
// control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control
// mode.
type H265QvbrSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use this setting only when Rate control mode is QVBR and Quality tuning level
	// is Multi-pass HQ. For Max average bitrate values suited to the complexity
	// of your input video, the service limits the average bitrate of the video
	// part of this output to the value you choose. That is, the total size of the
	// video element is less than or equal to the value you set multiplied by the
	// number of seconds of encoded output.
	MaxAverageBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxAverageBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Required when you use QVBR rate control mode. That is, when you specify qvbrSettings
	// within h265Settings. Specify the target quality level for this output, from
	// 1 to 10. Use higher numbers for greater quality. Level 10 results in nearly
	// lossless compression. The quality level for most broadcast-quality transcodes
	// is between 6 and 9.
	QvbrQualityLevel *int64 `locationName:"qvbrQualityLevel" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s H265QvbrSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s H265QvbrSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *H265QvbrSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "H265QvbrSettings"}
	if s.MaxAverageBitrate != nil && *s.MaxAverageBitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxAverageBitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.QvbrQualityLevel != nil && *s.QvbrQualityLevel < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("QvbrQualityLevel", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetMaxAverageBitrate sets the MaxAverageBitrate field's value.
func (s *H265QvbrSettings) SetMaxAverageBitrate(v int64) *H265QvbrSettings {
	s.MaxAverageBitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetQvbrQualityLevel sets the QvbrQualityLevel field's value.
func (s *H265QvbrSettings) SetQvbrQualityLevel(v int64) *H265QvbrSettings {
	s.QvbrQualityLevel = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for H265 codec
type H265Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
	// quality.
	AdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"adaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265AdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Enables Alternate Transfer Function SEI message for outputs using Hybrid
	// Log Gamma (HLG) Electro-Optical Transfer Function (EOTF).
	AlternateTransferFunctionSei *string `locationName:"alternateTransferFunctionSei" type:"string" enum:"H265AlternateTransferFunctionSei"`

	// Average bitrate in bits/second. Required for VBR and CBR. For MS Smooth outputs,
	// bitrates must be unique when rounded down to the nearest multiple of 1000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// H.265 Level.
	CodecLevel *string `locationName:"codecLevel" type:"string" enum:"H265CodecLevel"`

	// Represents the Profile and Tier, per the HEVC (H.265) specification. Selections
	// are grouped as [Profile] / [Tier], so "Main/High" represents Main Profile
	// with High Tier. 4:2:2 profiles are only available with the HEVC 4:2:2 License.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"H265CodecProfile"`

	// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
	// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
	// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
	// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
	// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
	DynamicSubGop *string `locationName:"dynamicSubGop" type:"string" enum:"H265DynamicSubGop"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.
	FlickerAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"flickerAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"H265FramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"H265FramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// Frame rate denominator.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame rate numerator - frame rate is a fraction, e.g. 24000 / 1001 = 23.976
	// fps.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames >
	// 1.
	GopBReference *string `locationName:"gopBReference" type:"string" enum:"H265GopBReference"`

	// Frequency of closed GOPs. In streaming applications, it is recommended that
	// this be set to 1 so a decoder joining mid-stream will receive an IDR frame
	// as quickly as possible. Setting this value to 0 will break output segmenting.
	GopClosedCadence *int64 `locationName:"gopClosedCadence" type:"integer"`

	// GOP Length (keyframe interval) in frames or seconds. Must be greater than
	// zero.
	GopSize *float64 `locationName:"gopSize" type:"double"`

	// Indicates if the GOP Size in H265 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds
	// the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
	GopSizeUnits *string `locationName:"gopSizeUnits" type:"string" enum:"H265GopSizeUnits"`

	// Percentage of the buffer that should initially be filled (HRD buffer model).
	HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferInitialFillPercentage" type:"integer"`

	// Size of buffer (HRD buffer model) in bits. For example, enter five megabits
	// as 5000000.
	HrdBufferSize *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferSize" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
	// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
	// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
	// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
	// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"H265InterlaceMode"`

	// Maximum bitrate in bits/second. For example, enter five megabits per second
	// as 5000000. Required when Rate control mode is QVBR.
	MaxBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Enforces separation between repeated (cadence) I-frames and I-frames inserted
	// by Scene Change Detection. If a scene change I-frame is within I-interval
	// frames of a cadence I-frame, the GOP is shrunk and/or stretched to the scene
	// change I-frame. GOP stretch requires enabling lookahead as well as setting
	// I-interval. The normal cadence resumes for the next GOP. This setting is
	// only used when Scene Change Detect is enabled. Note: Maximum GOP stretch
	// = GOP size + Min-I-interval - 1
	MinIInterval *int64 `locationName:"minIInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Number of B-frames between reference frames.
	NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames" type:"integer"`

	// Number of reference frames to use. The encoder may use more than requested
	// if using B-frames and/or interlaced encoding.
	NumberReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberReferenceFrames" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
	// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
	// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"H265ParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Quality tuning level (H265QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
	// use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass
	// video encoding.
	QualityTuningLevel *string `locationName:"qualityTuningLevel" type:"string" enum:"H265QualityTuningLevel"`

	// Settings for quality-defined variable bitrate encoding with the H.265 codec.
	// Required when you set Rate control mode to QVBR. Not valid when you set Rate
	// control mode to a value other than QVBR, or when you don't define Rate control
	// mode.
	QvbrSettings *H265QvbrSettings `locationName:"qvbrSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR),
	// constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"H265RateControlMode"`

	// Specify Sample Adaptive Offset (SAO) filter strength. Adaptive mode dynamically
	// selects best strength based on content
	SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode *string `locationName:"sampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode" type:"string" enum:"H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode"`

	// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
	SceneChangeDetect *string `locationName:"sceneChangeDetect" type:"string" enum:"H265SceneChangeDetect"`

	// Number of slices per picture. Must be less than or equal to the number of
	// macroblock rows for progressive pictures, and less than or equal to half
	// the number of macroblock rows for interlaced pictures.
	Slices *int64 `locationName:"slices" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"H265SlowPal"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
	// complexity.
	SpatialAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"spatialAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate)
	// field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors
	// > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced
	// Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive,
	// Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output
	// from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output
	// to 29.97i.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"H265Telecine"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
	// complexity.
	TemporalAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"temporalAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Enables temporal layer identifiers in the encoded bitstream. Up to 3 layers
	// are supported depending on GOP structure: I- and P-frames form one layer,
	// reference B-frames can form a second layer and non-reference b-frames can
	// form a third layer. Decoders can optionally decode only the lower temporal
	// layers to generate a lower frame rate output. For example, given a bitstream
	// with temporal IDs and with b-frames = 1 (i.e. IbPbPb display order), a decoder
	// could decode all the frames for full frame rate output or only the I and
	// P frames (lowest temporal layer) for a half frame rate output.
	TemporalIds *string `locationName:"temporalIds" type:"string" enum:"H265TemporalIds"`

	// Enable use of tiles, allowing horizontal as well as vertical subdivision
	// of the encoded pictures.
	Tiles *string `locationName:"tiles" type:"string" enum:"H265Tiles"`

	// Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.
	UnregisteredSeiTimecode *string `locationName:"unregisteredSeiTimecode" type:"string" enum:"H265UnregisteredSeiTimecode"`

	// Use this setting only for outputs encoded with H.265 that are in CMAF or
	// DASH output groups. If you include writeMp4PackagingType in your JSON job
	// specification for other outputs, your video might not work properly with
	// downstream systems and video players. If the location of parameter set NAL
	// units don't matter in your workflow, ignore this setting. The service defaults
	// to marking your output as HEV1. Choose HVC1 to mark your output as HVC1.
	// This makes your output compliant with this specification: ISO IECJTC1 SC29
	// N13798 Text ISO/IEC FDIS 14496-15 3rd Edition. For these outputs, the service
	// stores parameter set NAL units in the sample headers but not in the samples
	// directly. Keep the default HEV1 to mark your output as HEV1. For these outputs,
	// the service writes parameter set NAL units directly into the samples.
	WriteMp4PackagingType *string `locationName:"writeMp4PackagingType" type:"string" enum:"H265WriteMp4PackagingType"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s H265Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s H265Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *H265Settings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "H265Settings"}
	if s.Bitrate != nil && *s.Bitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Bitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.FramerateDenominator != nil && *s.FramerateDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.FramerateNumerator != nil && *s.FramerateNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateNumerator", 1))
	}
	if s.MaxBitrate != nil && *s.MaxBitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxBitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.NumberReferenceFrames != nil && *s.NumberReferenceFrames < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("NumberReferenceFrames", 1))
	}
	if s.ParDenominator != nil && *s.ParDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.ParNumerator != nil && *s.ParNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParNumerator", 1))
	}
	if s.Slices != nil && *s.Slices < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Slices", 1))
	}
	if s.QvbrSettings != nil {
		if err := s.QvbrSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("QvbrSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAdaptiveQuantization sets the AdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.AdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetAlternateTransferFunctionSei sets the AlternateTransferFunctionSei field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetAlternateTransferFunctionSei(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.AlternateTransferFunctionSei = &v
	return s
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecLevel sets the CodecLevel field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetCodecLevel(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.CodecLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.CodecProfile = &v
	return s
}

// SetDynamicSubGop sets the DynamicSubGop field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetDynamicSubGop(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.DynamicSubGop = &v
	return s
}

// SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization sets the FlickerAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetFlickerAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.FlickerAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.FramerateControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.FramerateConversionAlgorithm = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.FramerateDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.FramerateNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopBReference sets the GopBReference field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetGopBReference(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.GopBReference = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopClosedCadence sets the GopClosedCadence field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetGopClosedCadence(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.GopClosedCadence = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopSize sets the GopSize field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetGopSize(v float64) *H265Settings {
	s.GopSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopSizeUnits sets the GopSizeUnits field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetGopSizeUnits(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.GopSizeUnits = &v
	return s
}

// SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage sets the HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage = &v
	return s
}

// SetHrdBufferSize sets the HrdBufferSize field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetHrdBufferSize(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.HrdBufferSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.InterlaceMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxBitrate sets the MaxBitrate field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetMaxBitrate(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.MaxBitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinIInterval sets the MinIInterval field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetMinIInterval(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.MinIInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames sets the NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames = &v
	return s
}

// SetNumberReferenceFrames sets the NumberReferenceFrames field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetNumberReferenceFrames(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.NumberReferenceFrames = &v
	return s
}

// SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetParControl(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.ParControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.ParDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.ParNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetQualityTuningLevel sets the QualityTuningLevel field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.QualityTuningLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetQvbrSettings sets the QvbrSettings field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetQvbrSettings(v *H265QvbrSettings) *H265Settings {
	s.QvbrSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.RateControlMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetSampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode sets the SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetSampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetSceneChangeDetect sets the SceneChangeDetect field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.SceneChangeDetect = &v
	return s
}

// SetSlices sets the Slices field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetSlices(v int64) *H265Settings {
	s.Slices = &v
	return s
}

// SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetSlowPal(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.SlowPal = &v
	return s
}

// SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization sets the SpatialAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.SpatialAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetTelecine(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.Telecine = &v
	return s
}

// SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization sets the TemporalAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.TemporalAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetTemporalIds sets the TemporalIds field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetTemporalIds(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.TemporalIds = &v
	return s
}

// SetTiles sets the Tiles field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetTiles(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.Tiles = &v
	return s
}

// SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode sets the UnregisteredSeiTimecode field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetUnregisteredSeiTimecode(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.UnregisteredSeiTimecode = &v
	return s
}

// SetWriteMp4PackagingType sets the WriteMp4PackagingType field's value.
func (s *H265Settings) SetWriteMp4PackagingType(v string) *H265Settings {
	s.WriteMp4PackagingType = &v
	return s
}

// Use the "HDR master display information" (Hdr10Metadata) settings to correct
// HDR metadata or to provide missing metadata. These values vary depending
// on the input video and must be provided by a color grader. Range is 0 to
// 50,000; each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note
// that these settings are not color correction. Note that if you are creating
// HDR outputs inside of an HLS CMAF package, to comply with the Apple specification,
// you must use the following settings. Set "MP4 packaging type" (writeMp4PackagingType)
// to HVC1 (HVC1). Set "Profile" (H265Settings > codecProfile) to Main10/High
// (MAIN10_HIGH). Set "Level" (H265Settings > codecLevel) to 5 (LEVEL_5).
type Hdr10Metadata struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	BluePrimaryX *int64 `locationName:"bluePrimaryX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	BluePrimaryY *int64 `locationName:"bluePrimaryY" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	GreenPrimaryX *int64 `locationName:"greenPrimaryX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	GreenPrimaryY *int64 `locationName:"greenPrimaryY" type:"integer"`

	// Maximum light level among all samples in the coded video sequence, in units
	// of candelas per square meter.
	MaxContentLightLevel *int64 `locationName:"maxContentLightLevel" type:"integer"`

	// Maximum average light level of any frame in the coded video sequence, in
	// units of candelas per square meter.
	MaxFrameAverageLightLevel *int64 `locationName:"maxFrameAverageLightLevel" type:"integer"`

	// Nominal maximum mastering display luminance in units of of 0.0001 candelas
	// per square meter.
	MaxLuminance *int64 `locationName:"maxLuminance" type:"integer"`

	// Nominal minimum mastering display luminance in units of of 0.0001 candelas
	// per square meter
	MinLuminance *int64 `locationName:"minLuminance" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	RedPrimaryX *int64 `locationName:"redPrimaryX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	RedPrimaryY *int64 `locationName:"redPrimaryY" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	WhitePointX *int64 `locationName:"whitePointX" type:"integer"`

	// HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using
	// color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002
	// in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
	WhitePointY *int64 `locationName:"whitePointY" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Hdr10Metadata) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Hdr10Metadata) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetBluePrimaryX sets the BluePrimaryX field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetBluePrimaryX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.BluePrimaryX = &v
	return s
}

// SetBluePrimaryY sets the BluePrimaryY field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetBluePrimaryY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.BluePrimaryY = &v
	return s
}

// SetGreenPrimaryX sets the GreenPrimaryX field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetGreenPrimaryX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.GreenPrimaryX = &v
	return s
}

// SetGreenPrimaryY sets the GreenPrimaryY field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetGreenPrimaryY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.GreenPrimaryY = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxContentLightLevel sets the MaxContentLightLevel field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxContentLightLevel(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.MaxContentLightLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxFrameAverageLightLevel sets the MaxFrameAverageLightLevel field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxFrameAverageLightLevel(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.MaxFrameAverageLightLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxLuminance sets the MaxLuminance field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMaxLuminance(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.MaxLuminance = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinLuminance sets the MinLuminance field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetMinLuminance(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.MinLuminance = &v
	return s
}

// SetRedPrimaryX sets the RedPrimaryX field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetRedPrimaryX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.RedPrimaryX = &v
	return s
}

// SetRedPrimaryY sets the RedPrimaryY field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetRedPrimaryY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.RedPrimaryY = &v
	return s
}

// SetWhitePointX sets the WhitePointX field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetWhitePointX(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.WhitePointX = &v
	return s
}

// SetWhitePointY sets the WhitePointY field's value.
func (s *Hdr10Metadata) SetWhitePointY(v int64) *Hdr10Metadata {
	s.WhitePointY = &v
	return s
}

// Caption Language Mapping
type HlsCaptionLanguageMapping struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Caption channel.
	CaptionChannel *int64 `locationName:"captionChannel" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the language for this caption channel, using the ISO 639-2 or ISO
	// 639-3 three-letter language code
	CustomLanguageCode *string `locationName:"customLanguageCode" min:"3" type:"string"`

	// Specify the language, using the ISO 639-2 three-letter code listed at https://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/php/code_list.php.
	LanguageCode *string `locationName:"languageCode" type:"string" enum:"LanguageCode"`

	// Caption language description.
	LanguageDescription *string `locationName:"languageDescription" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "HlsCaptionLanguageMapping"}
	if s.CaptionChannel != nil && *s.CaptionChannel < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("CaptionChannel", -2.147483648e+09))
	}
	if s.CustomLanguageCode != nil && len(*s.CustomLanguageCode) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("CustomLanguageCode", 3))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCaptionChannel sets the CaptionChannel field's value.
func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetCaptionChannel(v int64) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping {
	s.CaptionChannel = &v
	return s
}

// SetCustomLanguageCode sets the CustomLanguageCode field's value.
func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetCustomLanguageCode(v string) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping {
	s.CustomLanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageCode sets the LanguageCode field's value.
func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetLanguageCode(v string) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping {
	s.LanguageCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetLanguageDescription sets the LanguageDescription field's value.
func (s *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) SetLanguageDescription(v string) *HlsCaptionLanguageMapping {
	s.LanguageDescription = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for HLS encryption
type HlsEncryptionSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// This is a 128-bit, 16-byte hex value represented by a 32-character text string.
	// If this parameter is not set then the Initialization Vector will follow the
	// segment number by default.
	ConstantInitializationVector *string `locationName:"constantInitializationVector" min:"32" type:"string"`

	// Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable.
	// Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.
	EncryptionMethod *string `locationName:"encryptionMethod" type:"string" enum:"HlsEncryptionType"`

	// The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the
	// key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed
	// in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.
	InitializationVectorInManifest *string `locationName:"initializationVectorInManifest" type:"string" enum:"HlsInitializationVectorInManifest"`

	// Enable this setting to insert the EXT-X-SESSION-KEY element into the master
	// playlist. This allows for offline Apple HLS FairPlay content protection.
	OfflineEncrypted *string `locationName:"offlineEncrypted" type:"string" enum:"HlsOfflineEncrypted"`

	// Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider
	SpekeKeyProvider *SpekeKeyProvider `locationName:"spekeKeyProvider" type:"structure"`

	// Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
	StaticKeyProvider *StaticKeyProvider `locationName:"staticKeyProvider" type:"structure"`

	// Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"HlsKeyProviderType"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s HlsEncryptionSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s HlsEncryptionSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "HlsEncryptionSettings"}
	if s.ConstantInitializationVector != nil && len(*s.ConstantInitializationVector) < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("ConstantInitializationVector", 32))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetConstantInitializationVector sets the ConstantInitializationVector field's value.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetConstantInitializationVector(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings {
	s.ConstantInitializationVector = &v
	return s
}

// SetEncryptionMethod sets the EncryptionMethod field's value.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetEncryptionMethod(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings {
	s.EncryptionMethod = &v
	return s
}

// SetInitializationVectorInManifest sets the InitializationVectorInManifest field's value.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetInitializationVectorInManifest(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings {
	s.InitializationVectorInManifest = &v
	return s
}

// SetOfflineEncrypted sets the OfflineEncrypted field's value.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetOfflineEncrypted(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings {
	s.OfflineEncrypted = &v
	return s
}

// SetSpekeKeyProvider sets the SpekeKeyProvider field's value.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider(v *SpekeKeyProvider) *HlsEncryptionSettings {
	s.SpekeKeyProvider = v
	return s
}

// SetStaticKeyProvider sets the StaticKeyProvider field's value.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetStaticKeyProvider(v *StaticKeyProvider) *HlsEncryptionSettings {
	s.StaticKeyProvider = v
	return s
}

// SetType sets the Type field's value.
func (s *HlsEncryptionSettings) SetType(v string) *HlsEncryptionSettings {
	s.Type = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
// HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS.
type HlsGroupSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Choose one or more ad marker types to pass SCTE35 signals through to this
	// group of Apple HLS outputs.
	AdMarkers []*string `locationName:"adMarkers" type:"list"`

	// A partial URI prefix that will be prepended to each output in the media .m3u8
	// file. Can be used if base manifest is delivered from a different URL than
	// the main .m3u8 file.
	BaseUrl *string `locationName:"baseUrl" type:"string"`

	// Language to be used on Caption outputs
	CaptionLanguageMappings []*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping `locationName:"captionLanguageMappings" type:"list"`

	// Applies only to 608 Embedded output captions. Insert: Include CLOSED-CAPTIONS
	// lines in the manifest. Specify at least one language in the CC1 Language
	// Code field. One CLOSED-CAPTION line is added for each Language Code you specify.
	// Make sure to specify the languages in the order in which they appear in the
	// original source (if the source is embedded format) or the order of the caption
	// selectors (if the source is other than embedded). Otherwise, languages in
	// the manifest will not match up properly with the output captions. None: Include
	// CLOSED-CAPTIONS=NONE line in the manifest. Omit: Omit any CLOSED-CAPTIONS
	// line from the manifest.
	CaptionLanguageSetting *string `locationName:"captionLanguageSetting" type:"string" enum:"HlsCaptionLanguageSetting"`

	// When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client
	// from saving media segments for later replay.
	ClientCache *string `locationName:"clientCache" type:"string" enum:"HlsClientCache"`

	// Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist
	// generation.
	CodecSpecification *string `locationName:"codecSpecification" type:"string" enum:"HlsCodecSpecification"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// Indicates whether segments should be placed in subdirectories.
	DirectoryStructure *string `locationName:"directoryStructure" type:"string" enum:"HlsDirectoryStructure"`

	// DRM settings.
	Encryption *HlsEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
	ManifestCompression *string `locationName:"manifestCompression" type:"string" enum:"HlsManifestCompression"`

	// Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for
	// segment duration.
	ManifestDurationFormat *string `locationName:"manifestDurationFormat" type:"string" enum:"HlsManifestDurationFormat"`

	// Keep this setting at the default value of 0, unless you are troubleshooting
	// a problem with how devices play back the end of your video asset. If you
	// know that player devices are hanging on the final segment of your video because
	// the length of your final segment is too short, use this setting to specify
	// a minimum final segment length, in seconds. Choose a value that is greater
	// than or equal to 1 and less than your segment length. When you specify a
	// value for this setting, the encoder will combine any final segment that is
	// shorter than the length that you specify with the previous segment. For example,
	// your segment length is 3 seconds and your final segment is .5 seconds without
	// a minimum final segment length; when you set the minimum final segment length
	// to 1, your final segment is 3.5 seconds.
	MinFinalSegmentLength *float64 `locationName:"minFinalSegmentLength" type:"double"`

	// When set, Minimum Segment Size is enforced by looking ahead and back within
	// the specified range for a nearby avail and extending the segment size if
	// needed.
	MinSegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"minSegmentLength" type:"integer"`

	// Indicates whether the .m3u8 manifest file should be generated for this HLS
	// output group.
	OutputSelection *string `locationName:"outputSelection" type:"string" enum:"HlsOutputSelection"`

	// Includes or excludes EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME tag in .m3u8 manifest files.
	// The value is calculated as follows: either the program date and time are
	// initialized using the input timecode source, or the time is initialized using
	// the input timecode source and the date is initialized using the timestamp_offset.
	ProgramDateTime *string `locationName:"programDateTime" type:"string" enum:"HlsProgramDateTime"`

	// Period of insertion of EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME entry, in seconds.
	ProgramDateTimePeriod *int64 `locationName:"programDateTimePeriod" type:"integer"`

	// When set to SINGLE_FILE, emits program as a single media resource (.ts) file,
	// uses #EXT-X-BYTERANGE tags to index segment for playback.
	SegmentControl *string `locationName:"segmentControl" type:"string" enum:"HlsSegmentControl"`

	// Length of MPEG-2 Transport Stream segments to create (in seconds). Note that
	// segments will end on the next keyframe after this number of seconds, so actual
	// segment length may be longer.
	SegmentLength *int64 `locationName:"segmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Number of segments to write to a subdirectory before starting a new one.
	// directoryStructure must be SINGLE_DIRECTORY for this setting to have an effect.
	SegmentsPerSubdirectory *int64 `locationName:"segmentsPerSubdirectory" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag
	// of variant manifest.
	StreamInfResolution *string `locationName:"streamInfResolution" type:"string" enum:"HlsStreamInfResolution"`

	// Indicates ID3 frame that has the timecode.
	TimedMetadataId3Frame *string `locationName:"timedMetadataId3Frame" type:"string" enum:"HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame"`

	// Timed Metadata interval in seconds.
	TimedMetadataId3Period *int64 `locationName:"timedMetadataId3Period" type:"integer"`

	// Provides an extra millisecond delta offset to fine tune the timestamps.
	TimestampDeltaMilliseconds *int64 `locationName:"timestampDeltaMilliseconds" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s HlsGroupSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s HlsGroupSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "HlsGroupSettings"}
	if s.SegmentLength != nil && *s.SegmentLength < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SegmentLength", 1))
	}
	if s.SegmentsPerSubdirectory != nil && *s.SegmentsPerSubdirectory < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SegmentsPerSubdirectory", 1))
	}
	if s.TimedMetadataId3Period != nil && *s.TimedMetadataId3Period < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("TimedMetadataId3Period", -2.147483648e+09))
	}
	if s.TimestampDeltaMilliseconds != nil && *s.TimestampDeltaMilliseconds < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("TimestampDeltaMilliseconds", -2.147483648e+09))
	}
	if s.CaptionLanguageMappings != nil {
		for i, v := range s.CaptionLanguageMappings {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "CaptionLanguageMappings", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.Encryption != nil {
		if err := s.Encryption.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Encryption", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAdMarkers sets the AdMarkers field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetAdMarkers(v []*string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.AdMarkers = v
	return s
}

// SetBaseUrl sets the BaseUrl field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetBaseUrl(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.BaseUrl = &v
	return s
}

// SetCaptionLanguageMappings sets the CaptionLanguageMappings field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetCaptionLanguageMappings(v []*HlsCaptionLanguageMapping) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.CaptionLanguageMappings = v
	return s
}

// SetCaptionLanguageSetting sets the CaptionLanguageSetting field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetCaptionLanguageSetting(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.CaptionLanguageSetting = &v
	return s
}

// SetClientCache sets the ClientCache field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetClientCache(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.ClientCache = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecSpecification sets the CodecSpecification field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetCodecSpecification(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.CodecSpecification = &v
	return s
}

// SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.Destination = &v
	return s
}

// SetDirectoryStructure sets the DirectoryStructure field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetDirectoryStructure(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.DirectoryStructure = &v
	return s
}

// SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *HlsEncryptionSettings) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.Encryption = v
	return s
}

// SetManifestCompression sets the ManifestCompression field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetManifestCompression(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.ManifestCompression = &v
	return s
}

// SetManifestDurationFormat sets the ManifestDurationFormat field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetManifestDurationFormat(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.ManifestDurationFormat = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinFinalSegmentLength sets the MinFinalSegmentLength field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetMinFinalSegmentLength(v float64) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.MinFinalSegmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinSegmentLength sets the MinSegmentLength field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetMinSegmentLength(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.MinSegmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutputSelection sets the OutputSelection field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetOutputSelection(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.OutputSelection = &v
	return s
}

// SetProgramDateTime sets the ProgramDateTime field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetProgramDateTime(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.ProgramDateTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetProgramDateTimePeriod sets the ProgramDateTimePeriod field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetProgramDateTimePeriod(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.ProgramDateTimePeriod = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentControl sets the SegmentControl field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentControl(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.SegmentControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentLength sets the SegmentLength field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentLength(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.SegmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentsPerSubdirectory sets the SegmentsPerSubdirectory field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetSegmentsPerSubdirectory(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.SegmentsPerSubdirectory = &v
	return s
}

// SetStreamInfResolution sets the StreamInfResolution field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetStreamInfResolution(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.StreamInfResolution = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimedMetadataId3Frame sets the TimedMetadataId3Frame field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetTimedMetadataId3Frame(v string) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.TimedMetadataId3Frame = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimedMetadataId3Period sets the TimedMetadataId3Period field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetTimedMetadataId3Period(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.TimedMetadataId3Period = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimestampDeltaMilliseconds sets the TimestampDeltaMilliseconds field's value.
func (s *HlsGroupSettings) SetTimestampDeltaMilliseconds(v int64) *HlsGroupSettings {
	s.TimestampDeltaMilliseconds = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for HLS output groups
type HlsSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specifies the group to which the audio Rendition belongs.
	AudioGroupId *string `locationName:"audioGroupId" type:"string"`

	// List all the audio groups that are used with the video output stream. Input
	// all the audio GROUP-IDs that are associated to the video, separate by ','.
	AudioRenditionSets *string `locationName:"audioRenditionSets" type:"string"`

	// Four types of audio-only tracks are supported: Audio-Only Variant Stream
	// The client can play back this audio-only stream instead of video in low-bandwidth
	// scenarios. Represented as an EXT-X-STREAM-INF in the HLS manifest. Alternate
	// Audio, Auto Select, Default Alternate rendition that the client should try
	// to play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest
	// with DEFAULT=YES, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate Audio, Auto Select, Not Default
	// Alternate rendition that the client may try to play back by default. Represented
	// as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate
	// Audio, not Auto Select Alternate rendition that the client will not try to
	// play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with
	// DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=NO
	AudioTrackType *string `locationName:"audioTrackType" type:"string" enum:"HlsAudioTrackType"`

	// When set to INCLUDE, writes I-Frame Only Manifest in addition to the HLS
	// manifest
	IFrameOnlyManifest *string `locationName:"iFrameOnlyManifest" type:"string" enum:"HlsIFrameOnlyManifest"`

	// String concatenated to end of segment filenames. Accepts "Format Identifiers":#format_identifier_parameters.
	SegmentModifier *string `locationName:"segmentModifier" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s HlsSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s HlsSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetAudioGroupId sets the AudioGroupId field's value.
func (s *HlsSettings) SetAudioGroupId(v string) *HlsSettings {
	s.AudioGroupId = &v
	return s
}

// SetAudioRenditionSets sets the AudioRenditionSets field's value.
func (s *HlsSettings) SetAudioRenditionSets(v string) *HlsSettings {
	s.AudioRenditionSets = &v
	return s
}

// SetAudioTrackType sets the AudioTrackType field's value.
func (s *HlsSettings) SetAudioTrackType(v string) *HlsSettings {
	s.AudioTrackType = &v
	return s
}

// SetIFrameOnlyManifest sets the IFrameOnlyManifest field's value.
func (s *HlsSettings) SetIFrameOnlyManifest(v string) *HlsSettings {
	s.IFrameOnlyManifest = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentModifier sets the SegmentModifier field's value.
func (s *HlsSettings) SetSegmentModifier(v string) *HlsSettings {
	s.SegmentModifier = &v
	return s
}

// To insert ID3 tags in your output, specify two values. Use ID3 tag (Id3)
// to specify the base 64 encoded string and use Timecode (TimeCode) to specify
// the time when the tag should be inserted. To insert multiple ID3 tags in
// your output, create multiple instances of ID3 insertion (Id3Insertion).
type Id3Insertion struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use ID3 tag (Id3) to provide a tag value in base64-encode format.
	Id3 *string `locationName:"id3" type:"string"`

	// Provide a Timecode (TimeCode) in HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF format.
	Timecode *string `locationName:"timecode" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Id3Insertion) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Id3Insertion) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetId3 sets the Id3 field's value.
func (s *Id3Insertion) SetId3(v string) *Id3Insertion {
	s.Id3 = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimecode sets the Timecode field's value.
func (s *Id3Insertion) SetTimecode(v string) *Id3Insertion {
	s.Timecode = &v
	return s
}

// Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video.
// Enable or disable this feature for each input or output individually. This
// setting is disabled by default.
type ImageInserter struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specify the images that you want to overlay on your video. The images must
	// be PNG or TGA files.
	InsertableImages []*InsertableImage `locationName:"insertableImages" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ImageInserter) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ImageInserter) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ImageInserter) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ImageInserter"}
	if s.InsertableImages != nil {
		for i, v := range s.InsertableImages {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "InsertableImages", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetInsertableImages sets the InsertableImages field's value.
func (s *ImageInserter) SetInsertableImages(v []*InsertableImage) *ImageInserter {
	s.InsertableImages = v
	return s
}

// Specifies media input
type Input struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specifies set of audio selectors within an input to combine. An input may
	// have multiple audio selector groups. See "Audio Selector Group":#inputs-audio_selector_group
	// for more information.
	AudioSelectorGroups map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup `locationName:"audioSelectorGroups" type:"map"`

	// Use Audio selectors (AudioSelectors) to specify a track or set of tracks
	// from the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple Audio
	// selectors per input.
	AudioSelectors map[string]*AudioSelector `locationName:"audioSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Use Captions selectors (CaptionSelectors) to specify the captions data from
	// the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple captions
	// selectors per input.
	CaptionSelectors map[string]*CaptionSelector `locationName:"captionSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Enable Deblock (InputDeblockFilter) to produce smoother motion in the output.
	// Default is disabled. Only manaully controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed
	// video inputs.
	DeblockFilter *string `locationName:"deblockFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDeblockFilter"`

	// Settings for decrypting any input files that are encrypted.
	DecryptionSettings *InputDecryptionSettings `locationName:"decryptionSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) to filter noise from the input. Default
	// is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video
	// inputs.
	DenoiseFilter *string `locationName:"denoiseFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDenoiseFilter"`

	// Specify the source file for your transcoding job. You can use multiple inputs
	// in a single job. The service concatenates these inputs, in the order that
	// you specify them in the job, to create the outputs. If your input format
	// is IMF, specify your input by providing the path to your CPL. For example,
	// "s3://bucket/vf/cpl.xml". If the CPL is in an incomplete IMP, make sure to
	// use *Supplemental IMPs* (SupplementalImps) to specify any supplemental IMPs
	// that contain assets referenced by the CPL.
	FileInput *string `locationName:"fileInput" type:"string"`

	// Use Filter enable (InputFilterEnable) to specify how the transcoding service
	// applies the denoise and deblock filters. You must also enable the filters
	// separately, with Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) and Deblock (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Auto - The transcoding service determines whether to apply filtering, depending
	// on input type and quality. * Disable - The input is not filtered. This is
	// true even if you use the API to enable them in (InputDeblockFilter) and (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Force - The in put is filtered regardless of input type.
	FilterEnable *string `locationName:"filterEnable" type:"string" enum:"InputFilterEnable"`

	// Use Filter strength (FilterStrength) to adjust the magnitude the input filter
	// settings (Deblock and Denoise). The range is -5 to 5. Default is 0.
	FilterStrength *int64 `locationName:"filterStrength" type:"integer"`

	// Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video.
	// Enable or disable this feature for each input individually. This setting
	// is disabled by default.
	ImageInserter *ImageInserter `locationName:"imageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// (InputClippings) contains sets of start and end times that together specify
	// a portion of the input to be used in the outputs. If you provide only a start
	// time, the clip will be the entire input from that point to the end. If you
	// provide only an end time, it will be the entire input up to that point. When
	// you specify more than one input clip, the transcoding service creates the
	// job outputs by stringing the clips together in the order you specify them.
	InputClippings []*InputClipping `locationName:"inputClippings" type:"list"`

	// Use Program (programNumber) to select a specific program from within a multi-program
	// transport stream. Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported. Default is
	// the first program within the transport stream. If the program you specify
	// doesn't exist, the transcoding service will use this default.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Set PSI control (InputPsiControl) for transport stream inputs to specify
	// which data the demux process to scans. * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio
	// and video. * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.
	PsiControl *string `locationName:"psiControl" type:"string" enum:"InputPsiControl"`

	// Provide a list of any necessary supplemental IMPs. You need supplemental
	// IMPs if the CPL that you're using for your input is in an incomplete IMP.
	// Specify either the supplemental IMP directories with a trailing slash or
	// the ASSETMAP.xml files. For example ["s3://bucket/ov/", "s3://bucket/vf2/ASSETMAP.xml"].
	// You don't need to specify the IMP that contains your input CPL, because the
	// service automatically detects it.
	SupplementalImps []*string `locationName:"supplementalImps" type:"list"`

	// Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource) only affects the
	// behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input
	// clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Use this setting to specify
	// whether the service counts frames by timecodes embedded in the video (EMBEDDED)
	// or by starting the first frame at zero (ZEROBASED). In both cases, the timecode
	// format is HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where FF is the frame number. Only
	// set this to EMBEDDED if your source video has embedded timecodes.
	TimecodeSource *string `locationName:"timecodeSource" type:"string" enum:"InputTimecodeSource"`

	// Selector for video.
	VideoSelector *VideoSelector `locationName:"videoSelector" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Input) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Input) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *Input) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "Input"}
	if s.FilterStrength != nil && *s.FilterStrength < -5 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FilterStrength", -5))
	}
	if s.ProgramNumber != nil && *s.ProgramNumber < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ProgramNumber", 1))
	}
	if s.AudioSelectors != nil {
		for i, v := range s.AudioSelectors {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "AudioSelectors", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.CaptionSelectors != nil {
		for i, v := range s.CaptionSelectors {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "CaptionSelectors", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.DecryptionSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DecryptionSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DecryptionSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.ImageInserter != nil {
		if err := s.ImageInserter.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ImageInserter", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.VideoSelector != nil {
		if err := s.VideoSelector.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("VideoSelector", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioSelectorGroups sets the AudioSelectorGroups field's value.
func (s *Input) SetAudioSelectorGroups(v map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup) *Input {
	s.AudioSelectorGroups = v
	return s
}

// SetAudioSelectors sets the AudioSelectors field's value.
func (s *Input) SetAudioSelectors(v map[string]*AudioSelector) *Input {
	s.AudioSelectors = v
	return s
}

// SetCaptionSelectors sets the CaptionSelectors field's value.
func (s *Input) SetCaptionSelectors(v map[string]*CaptionSelector) *Input {
	s.CaptionSelectors = v
	return s
}

// SetDeblockFilter sets the DeblockFilter field's value.
func (s *Input) SetDeblockFilter(v string) *Input {
	s.DeblockFilter = &v
	return s
}

// SetDecryptionSettings sets the DecryptionSettings field's value.
func (s *Input) SetDecryptionSettings(v *InputDecryptionSettings) *Input {
	s.DecryptionSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetDenoiseFilter sets the DenoiseFilter field's value.
func (s *Input) SetDenoiseFilter(v string) *Input {
	s.DenoiseFilter = &v
	return s
}

// SetFileInput sets the FileInput field's value.
func (s *Input) SetFileInput(v string) *Input {
	s.FileInput = &v
	return s
}

// SetFilterEnable sets the FilterEnable field's value.
func (s *Input) SetFilterEnable(v string) *Input {
	s.FilterEnable = &v
	return s
}

// SetFilterStrength sets the FilterStrength field's value.
func (s *Input) SetFilterStrength(v int64) *Input {
	s.FilterStrength = &v
	return s
}

// SetImageInserter sets the ImageInserter field's value.
func (s *Input) SetImageInserter(v *ImageInserter) *Input {
	s.ImageInserter = v
	return s
}

// SetInputClippings sets the InputClippings field's value.
func (s *Input) SetInputClippings(v []*InputClipping) *Input {
	s.InputClippings = v
	return s
}

// SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.
func (s *Input) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *Input {
	s.ProgramNumber = &v
	return s
}

// SetPsiControl sets the PsiControl field's value.
func (s *Input) SetPsiControl(v string) *Input {
	s.PsiControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetSupplementalImps sets the SupplementalImps field's value.
func (s *Input) SetSupplementalImps(v []*string) *Input {
	s.SupplementalImps = v
	return s
}

// SetTimecodeSource sets the TimecodeSource field's value.
func (s *Input) SetTimecodeSource(v string) *Input {
	s.TimecodeSource = &v
	return s
}

// SetVideoSelector sets the VideoSelector field's value.
func (s *Input) SetVideoSelector(v *VideoSelector) *Input {
	s.VideoSelector = v
	return s
}

// To transcode only portions of your input (clips), include one Input clipping
// (one instance of InputClipping in the JSON job file) for each input clip.
// All input clips you specify will be included in every output of the job.
type InputClipping struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Set End timecode (EndTimecode) to the end of the portion of the input you
	// are clipping. The frame corresponding to the End timecode value is included
	// in the clip. Start timecode or End timecode may be left blank, but not both.
	// Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the
	// minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When choosing this
	// value, take into account your setting for timecode source under input settings
	// (InputTimecodeSource). For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start
	// at 01:00:00:00 and you want your clip to end six minutes into the video,
	// use 01:06:00:00.
	EndTimecode *string `locationName:"endTimecode" type:"string"`

	// Set Start timecode (StartTimecode) to the beginning of the portion of the
	// input you are clipping. The frame corresponding to the Start timecode value
	// is included in the clip. Start timecode or End timecode may be left blank,
	// but not both. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the
	// hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When
	// choosing this value, take into account your setting for Input timecode source.
	// For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start at 01:00:00:00 and
	// you want your clip to begin five minutes into the video, use 01:05:00:00.
	StartTimecode *string `locationName:"startTimecode" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s InputClipping) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s InputClipping) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetEndTimecode sets the EndTimecode field's value.
func (s *InputClipping) SetEndTimecode(v string) *InputClipping {
	s.EndTimecode = &v
	return s
}

// SetStartTimecode sets the StartTimecode field's value.
func (s *InputClipping) SetStartTimecode(v string) *InputClipping {
	s.StartTimecode = &v
	return s
}

// Specify the decryption settings used to decrypt encrypted input
type InputDecryptionSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// This specifies how the encrypted file needs to be decrypted.
	DecryptionMode *string `locationName:"decryptionMode" type:"string" enum:"DecryptionMode"`

	// Decryption key either 128 or 192 or 256 bits encrypted with KMS
	EncryptedDecryptionKey *string `locationName:"encryptedDecryptionKey" min:"24" type:"string"`

	// Initialization Vector 96 bits (CTR/GCM mode only) or 128 bits.
	InitializationVector *string `locationName:"initializationVector" min:"16" type:"string"`

	// The AWS region in which decryption key was encrypted with KMS
	KmsKeyRegion *string `locationName:"kmsKeyRegion" min:"9" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s InputDecryptionSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s InputDecryptionSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "InputDecryptionSettings"}
	if s.EncryptedDecryptionKey != nil && len(*s.EncryptedDecryptionKey) < 24 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("EncryptedDecryptionKey", 24))
	}
	if s.InitializationVector != nil && len(*s.InitializationVector) < 16 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("InitializationVector", 16))
	}
	if s.KmsKeyRegion != nil && len(*s.KmsKeyRegion) < 9 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("KmsKeyRegion", 9))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetDecryptionMode sets the DecryptionMode field's value.
func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetDecryptionMode(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings {
	s.DecryptionMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetEncryptedDecryptionKey sets the EncryptedDecryptionKey field's value.
func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetEncryptedDecryptionKey(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings {
	s.EncryptedDecryptionKey = &v
	return s
}

// SetInitializationVector sets the InitializationVector field's value.
func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetInitializationVector(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings {
	s.InitializationVector = &v
	return s
}

// SetKmsKeyRegion sets the KmsKeyRegion field's value.
func (s *InputDecryptionSettings) SetKmsKeyRegion(v string) *InputDecryptionSettings {
	s.KmsKeyRegion = &v
	return s
}

// Specified video input in a template.
type InputTemplate struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specifies set of audio selectors within an input to combine. An input may
	// have multiple audio selector groups. See "Audio Selector Group":#inputs-audio_selector_group
	// for more information.
	AudioSelectorGroups map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup `locationName:"audioSelectorGroups" type:"map"`

	// Use Audio selectors (AudioSelectors) to specify a track or set of tracks
	// from the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple Audio
	// selectors per input.
	AudioSelectors map[string]*AudioSelector `locationName:"audioSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Use Captions selectors (CaptionSelectors) to specify the captions data from
	// the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use mutiple captions
	// selectors per input.
	CaptionSelectors map[string]*CaptionSelector `locationName:"captionSelectors" type:"map"`

	// Enable Deblock (InputDeblockFilter) to produce smoother motion in the output.
	// Default is disabled. Only manaully controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed
	// video inputs.
	DeblockFilter *string `locationName:"deblockFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDeblockFilter"`

	// Enable Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) to filter noise from the input. Default
	// is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video
	// inputs.
	DenoiseFilter *string `locationName:"denoiseFilter" type:"string" enum:"InputDenoiseFilter"`

	// Use Filter enable (InputFilterEnable) to specify how the transcoding service
	// applies the denoise and deblock filters. You must also enable the filters
	// separately, with Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) and Deblock (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Auto - The transcoding service determines whether to apply filtering, depending
	// on input type and quality. * Disable - The input is not filtered. This is
	// true even if you use the API to enable them in (InputDeblockFilter) and (InputDeblockFilter).
	// * Force - The in put is filtered regardless of input type.
	FilterEnable *string `locationName:"filterEnable" type:"string" enum:"InputFilterEnable"`

	// Use Filter strength (FilterStrength) to adjust the magnitude the input filter
	// settings (Deblock and Denoise). The range is -5 to 5. Default is 0.
	FilterStrength *int64 `locationName:"filterStrength" type:"integer"`

	// Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video.
	// Enable or disable this feature for each input individually. This setting
	// is disabled by default.
	ImageInserter *ImageInserter `locationName:"imageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// (InputClippings) contains sets of start and end times that together specify
	// a portion of the input to be used in the outputs. If you provide only a start
	// time, the clip will be the entire input from that point to the end. If you
	// provide only an end time, it will be the entire input up to that point. When
	// you specify more than one input clip, the transcoding service creates the
	// job outputs by stringing the clips together in the order you specify them.
	InputClippings []*InputClipping `locationName:"inputClippings" type:"list"`

	// Use Program (programNumber) to select a specific program from within a multi-program
	// transport stream. Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported. Default is
	// the first program within the transport stream. If the program you specify
	// doesn't exist, the transcoding service will use this default.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Set PSI control (InputPsiControl) for transport stream inputs to specify
	// which data the demux process to scans. * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio
	// and video. * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.
	PsiControl *string `locationName:"psiControl" type:"string" enum:"InputPsiControl"`

	// Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource) only affects the
	// behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input
	// clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Use this setting to specify
	// whether the service counts frames by timecodes embedded in the video (EMBEDDED)
	// or by starting the first frame at zero (ZEROBASED). In both cases, the timecode
	// format is HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where FF is the frame number. Only
	// set this to EMBEDDED if your source video has embedded timecodes.
	TimecodeSource *string `locationName:"timecodeSource" type:"string" enum:"InputTimecodeSource"`

	// Selector for video.
	VideoSelector *VideoSelector `locationName:"videoSelector" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s InputTemplate) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s InputTemplate) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *InputTemplate) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "InputTemplate"}
	if s.FilterStrength != nil && *s.FilterStrength < -5 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FilterStrength", -5))
	}
	if s.ProgramNumber != nil && *s.ProgramNumber < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ProgramNumber", 1))
	}
	if s.AudioSelectors != nil {
		for i, v := range s.AudioSelectors {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "AudioSelectors", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.CaptionSelectors != nil {
		for i, v := range s.CaptionSelectors {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "CaptionSelectors", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.ImageInserter != nil {
		if err := s.ImageInserter.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ImageInserter", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.VideoSelector != nil {
		if err := s.VideoSelector.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("VideoSelector", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioSelectorGroups sets the AudioSelectorGroups field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetAudioSelectorGroups(v map[string]*AudioSelectorGroup) *InputTemplate {
	s.AudioSelectorGroups = v
	return s
}

// SetAudioSelectors sets the AudioSelectors field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetAudioSelectors(v map[string]*AudioSelector) *InputTemplate {
	s.AudioSelectors = v
	return s
}

// SetCaptionSelectors sets the CaptionSelectors field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetCaptionSelectors(v map[string]*CaptionSelector) *InputTemplate {
	s.CaptionSelectors = v
	return s
}

// SetDeblockFilter sets the DeblockFilter field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetDeblockFilter(v string) *InputTemplate {
	s.DeblockFilter = &v
	return s
}

// SetDenoiseFilter sets the DenoiseFilter field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetDenoiseFilter(v string) *InputTemplate {
	s.DenoiseFilter = &v
	return s
}

// SetFilterEnable sets the FilterEnable field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetFilterEnable(v string) *InputTemplate {
	s.FilterEnable = &v
	return s
}

// SetFilterStrength sets the FilterStrength field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetFilterStrength(v int64) *InputTemplate {
	s.FilterStrength = &v
	return s
}

// SetImageInserter sets the ImageInserter field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetImageInserter(v *ImageInserter) *InputTemplate {
	s.ImageInserter = v
	return s
}

// SetInputClippings sets the InputClippings field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetInputClippings(v []*InputClipping) *InputTemplate {
	s.InputClippings = v
	return s
}

// SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *InputTemplate {
	s.ProgramNumber = &v
	return s
}

// SetPsiControl sets the PsiControl field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetPsiControl(v string) *InputTemplate {
	s.PsiControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimecodeSource sets the TimecodeSource field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetTimecodeSource(v string) *InputTemplate {
	s.TimecodeSource = &v
	return s
}

// SetVideoSelector sets the VideoSelector field's value.
func (s *InputTemplate) SetVideoSelector(v *VideoSelector) *InputTemplate {
	s.VideoSelector = v
	return s
}

// Settings that specify how your still graphic overlay appears.
type InsertableImage struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specify the time, in milliseconds, for the image to remain on the output
	// video. This duration includes fade-in time but not fade-out time.
	Duration *int64 `locationName:"duration" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the length of time, in milliseconds, between the Start time that
	// you specify for the image insertion and the time that the image appears at
	// full opacity. Full opacity is the level that you specify for the opacity
	// setting. If you don't specify a value for Fade-in, the image will appear
	// abruptly at the overlay start time.
	FadeIn *int64 `locationName:"fadeIn" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the length of time, in milliseconds, between the end of the time
	// that you have specified for the image overlay Duration and when the overlaid
	// image has faded to total transparency. If you don't specify a value for Fade-out,
	// the image will disappear abruptly at the end of the inserted image duration.
	FadeOut *int64 `locationName:"fadeOut" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the height of the inserted image in pixels. If you specify a value
	// that's larger than the video resolution height, the service will crop your
	// overlaid image to fit. To use the native height of the image, keep this setting
	// blank.
	Height *int64 `locationName:"height" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the Amazon S3 location of the image that you want to overlay on the
	// video. Use a PNG or TGA file.
	ImageInserterInput *string `locationName:"imageInserterInput" min:"14" type:"string"`

	// Specify the distance, in pixels, between the inserted image and the left
	// edge of the video frame. Required for any image overlay that you specify.
	ImageX *int64 `locationName:"imageX" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the distance, in pixels, between the overlaid image and the top edge
	// of the video frame. Required for any image overlay that you specify.
	ImageY *int64 `locationName:"imageY" type:"integer"`

	// Specify how overlapping inserted images appear. Images with higher values
	// for Layer appear on top of images with lower values for Layer.
	Layer *int64 `locationName:"layer" type:"integer"`

	// Use Opacity (Opacity) to specify how much of the underlying video shows through
	// the inserted image. 0 is transparent and 100 is fully opaque. Default is
	// 50.
	Opacity *int64 `locationName:"opacity" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the timecode of the frame that you want the overlay to first appear
	// on. This must be in timecode (HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF) format. Remember
	// to take into account your timecode source settings.
	StartTime *string `locationName:"startTime" type:"string"`

	// Specify the width of the inserted image in pixels. If you specify a value
	// that's larger than the video resolution width, the service will crop your
	// overlaid image to fit. To use the native width of the image, keep this setting
	// blank.
	Width *int64 `locationName:"width" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s InsertableImage) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s InsertableImage) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *InsertableImage) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "InsertableImage"}
	if s.ImageInserterInput != nil && len(*s.ImageInserterInput) < 14 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("ImageInserterInput", 14))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetDuration sets the Duration field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetDuration(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.Duration = &v
	return s
}

// SetFadeIn sets the FadeIn field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetFadeIn(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.FadeIn = &v
	return s
}

// SetFadeOut sets the FadeOut field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetFadeOut(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.FadeOut = &v
	return s
}

// SetHeight sets the Height field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetHeight(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.Height = &v
	return s
}

// SetImageInserterInput sets the ImageInserterInput field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetImageInserterInput(v string) *InsertableImage {
	s.ImageInserterInput = &v
	return s
}

// SetImageX sets the ImageX field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetImageX(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.ImageX = &v
	return s
}

// SetImageY sets the ImageY field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetImageY(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.ImageY = &v
	return s
}

// SetLayer sets the Layer field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetLayer(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.Layer = &v
	return s
}

// SetOpacity sets the Opacity field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetOpacity(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.Opacity = &v
	return s
}

// SetStartTime sets the StartTime field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetStartTime(v string) *InsertableImage {
	s.StartTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetWidth sets the Width field's value.
func (s *InsertableImage) SetWidth(v int64) *InsertableImage {
	s.Width = &v
	return s
}

// Each job converts an input file into an output file or files. For more information,
// see the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
type Job struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Acceleration settings for job execution.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// Optional. Choose a tag type that AWS Billing and Cost Management will use
	// to sort your AWS Elemental MediaConvert costs on any billing report that
	// you set up. Any transcoding outputs that don't have an associated tag will
	// appear in your billing report unsorted. If you don't choose a valid value
	// for this field, your job outputs will appear on the billing report unsorted.
	BillingTagsSource *string `locationName:"billingTagsSource" type:"string" enum:"BillingTagsSource"`

	// The time, in Unix epoch format in seconds, when the job got created.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// Error code for the job
	ErrorCode *int64 `locationName:"errorCode" type:"integer"`

	// Error message of Job
	ErrorMessage *string `locationName:"errorMessage" type:"string"`

	// A portion of the job's ARN, unique within your AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// resources
	Id *string `locationName:"id" type:"string"`

	// The job template that the job is created from, if it is created from a job
	// template.
	JobTemplate *string `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"string"`

	// List of output group details
	OutputGroupDetails []*OutputGroupDetail `locationName:"outputGroupDetails" type:"list"`

	// Optional. When you create a job, you can specify a queue to send it to. If
	// you don't specify, the job will go to the default queue. For more about queues,
	// see the User Guide topic at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/what-is.html
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// The IAM role you use for creating this job. For details about permissions,
	// see the User Guide topic at the User Guide at http://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/iam-role.html
	//
	// Role is a required field
	Role *string `locationName:"role" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// JobSettings contains all the transcode settings for a job.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// A job's status can be SUBMITTED, PROGRESSING, COMPLETE, CANCELED, or ERROR.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"JobStatus"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs *int64 `locationName:"statusUpdateIntervalInSecs" min:"10" type:"long"`

	// Information about when jobs are submitted, started, and finished is specified
	// in Unix epoch format in seconds.
	Timing *Timing `locationName:"timing" type:"structure"`

	// User-defined metadata that you want to associate with an MediaConvert job.
	// You specify metadata in key/value pairs.
	UserMetadata map[string]*string `locationName:"userMetadata" type:"map"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Job) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Job) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.
func (s *Job) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *Job {
	s.AccelerationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *Job) SetArn(v string) *Job {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// SetBillingTagsSource sets the BillingTagsSource field's value.
func (s *Job) SetBillingTagsSource(v string) *Job {
	s.BillingTagsSource = &v
	return s
}

// SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.
func (s *Job) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *Job {
	s.CreatedAt = &v
	return s
}

// SetErrorCode sets the ErrorCode field's value.
func (s *Job) SetErrorCode(v int64) *Job {
	s.ErrorCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetErrorMessage sets the ErrorMessage field's value.
func (s *Job) SetErrorMessage(v string) *Job {
	s.ErrorMessage = &v
	return s
}

// SetId sets the Id field's value.
func (s *Job) SetId(v string) *Job {
	s.Id = &v
	return s
}

// SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.
func (s *Job) SetJobTemplate(v string) *Job {
	s.JobTemplate = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutputGroupDetails sets the OutputGroupDetails field's value.
func (s *Job) SetOutputGroupDetails(v []*OutputGroupDetail) *Job {
	s.OutputGroupDetails = v
	return s
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *Job) SetQueue(v string) *Job {
	s.Queue = &v
	return s
}

// SetRole sets the Role field's value.
func (s *Job) SetRole(v string) *Job {
	s.Role = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *Job) SetSettings(v *JobSettings) *Job {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetStatus sets the Status field's value.
func (s *Job) SetStatus(v string) *Job {
	s.Status = &v
	return s
}

// SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs sets the StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs field's value.
func (s *Job) SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs(v int64) *Job {
	s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs = &v
	return s
}

// SetTiming sets the Timing field's value.
func (s *Job) SetTiming(v *Timing) *Job {
	s.Timing = v
	return s
}

// SetUserMetadata sets the UserMetadata field's value.
func (s *Job) SetUserMetadata(v map[string]*string) *Job {
	s.UserMetadata = v
	return s
}

// JobSettings contains all the transcode settings for a job.
type JobSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// When specified, this offset (in milliseconds) is added to the input Ad Avail
	// PTS time.
	AdAvailOffset *int64 `locationName:"adAvailOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Settings for ad avail blanking. Video can be blanked or overlaid with an
	// image, and audio muted during SCTE-35 triggered ad avails.
	AvailBlanking *AvailBlanking `locationName:"availBlanking" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Event Signaling And Messaging (ESAM).
	Esam *EsamSettings `locationName:"esam" type:"structure"`

	// Use Inputs (inputs) to define source file used in the transcode job. There
	// can be multiple inputs add in a job. These inputs will be concantenated together
	// to create the output.
	Inputs []*Input `locationName:"inputs" type:"list"`

	// Overlay motion graphics on top of your video. The motion graphics that you
	// specify here appear on all outputs in all output groups.
	MotionImageInserter *MotionImageInserter `locationName:"motionImageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Nielsen Configuration
	NielsenConfiguration *NielsenConfiguration `locationName:"nielsenConfiguration" type:"structure"`

	// (OutputGroups) contains one group of settings for each set of outputs that
	// share a common package type. All unpackaged files (MPEG-4, MPEG-2 TS, Quicktime,
	// MXF, and no container) are grouped in a single output group as well. Required
	// in (OutputGroups) is a group of settings that apply to the whole group. This
	// required object depends on the value you set for (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings).
	// Type, settings object pairs are as follows. * FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS, FileGroupSettings
	// * HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS, HlsGroupSettings * DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS, DashIsoGroupSettings
	// * MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS, MsSmoothGroupSettings * CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS,
	// CmafGroupSettings
	OutputGroups []*OutputGroup `locationName:"outputGroups" type:"list"`

	// Contains settings used to acquire and adjust timecode information from inputs.
	TimecodeConfig *TimecodeConfig `locationName:"timecodeConfig" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Timed metadata insertion (TimedMetadataInsertion) to include ID3 tags
	// in your job. To include timed metadata, you must enable it here, enable it
	// in each output container, and specify tags and timecodes in ID3 insertion
	// (Id3Insertion) objects.
	TimedMetadataInsertion *TimedMetadataInsertion `locationName:"timedMetadataInsertion" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s JobSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s JobSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *JobSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "JobSettings"}
	if s.AdAvailOffset != nil && *s.AdAvailOffset < -1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("AdAvailOffset", -1000))
	}
	if s.AvailBlanking != nil {
		if err := s.AvailBlanking.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AvailBlanking", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Inputs != nil {
		for i, v := range s.Inputs {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "Inputs", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.MotionImageInserter != nil {
		if err := s.MotionImageInserter.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("MotionImageInserter", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.OutputGroups != nil {
		for i, v := range s.OutputGroups {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "OutputGroups", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAdAvailOffset sets the AdAvailOffset field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetAdAvailOffset(v int64) *JobSettings {
	s.AdAvailOffset = &v
	return s
}

// SetAvailBlanking sets the AvailBlanking field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetAvailBlanking(v *AvailBlanking) *JobSettings {
	s.AvailBlanking = v
	return s
}

// SetEsam sets the Esam field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetEsam(v *EsamSettings) *JobSettings {
	s.Esam = v
	return s
}

// SetInputs sets the Inputs field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetInputs(v []*Input) *JobSettings {
	s.Inputs = v
	return s
}

// SetMotionImageInserter sets the MotionImageInserter field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetMotionImageInserter(v *MotionImageInserter) *JobSettings {
	s.MotionImageInserter = v
	return s
}

// SetNielsenConfiguration sets the NielsenConfiguration field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetNielsenConfiguration(v *NielsenConfiguration) *JobSettings {
	s.NielsenConfiguration = v
	return s
}

// SetOutputGroups sets the OutputGroups field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetOutputGroups(v []*OutputGroup) *JobSettings {
	s.OutputGroups = v
	return s
}

// SetTimecodeConfig sets the TimecodeConfig field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetTimecodeConfig(v *TimecodeConfig) *JobSettings {
	s.TimecodeConfig = v
	return s
}

// SetTimedMetadataInsertion sets the TimedMetadataInsertion field's value.
func (s *JobSettings) SetTimedMetadataInsertion(v *TimedMetadataInsertion) *JobSettings {
	s.TimedMetadataInsertion = v
	return s
}

// A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use
// to quickly create a job.
type JobTemplate struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Acceleration settings for job execution.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// An optional category you create to organize your job templates.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for Job template creation.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// An optional description you create for each job template.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds when the Job template was last updated.
	LastUpdated *time.Time `locationName:"lastUpdated" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// A name you create for each job template. Each name must be unique within
	// your account.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Optional. The queue that jobs created from this template are assigned to.
	// If you don't specify this, jobs will go to the default queue.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template
	// that will be applied to jobs created from it.
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *JobTemplateSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs *int64 `locationName:"statusUpdateIntervalInSecs" min:"10" type:"long"`

	// A job template can be of two types: system or custom. System or built-in
	// job templates can't be modified or deleted by the user.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"Type"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s JobTemplate) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s JobTemplate) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *JobTemplate {
	s.AccelerationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetArn(v string) *JobTemplate {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetCategory(v string) *JobTemplate {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *JobTemplate {
	s.CreatedAt = &v
	return s
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetDescription(v string) *JobTemplate {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetLastUpdated sets the LastUpdated field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetLastUpdated(v time.Time) *JobTemplate {
	s.LastUpdated = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetName(v string) *JobTemplate {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetQueue(v string) *JobTemplate {
	s.Queue = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetSettings(v *JobTemplateSettings) *JobTemplate {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs sets the StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs(v int64) *JobTemplate {
	s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs = &v
	return s
}

// SetType sets the Type field's value.
func (s *JobTemplate) SetType(v string) *JobTemplate {
	s.Type = &v
	return s
}

// JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template
// that will be applied to jobs created from it.
type JobTemplateSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// When specified, this offset (in milliseconds) is added to the input Ad Avail
	// PTS time.
	AdAvailOffset *int64 `locationName:"adAvailOffset" type:"integer"`

	// Settings for ad avail blanking. Video can be blanked or overlaid with an
	// image, and audio muted during SCTE-35 triggered ad avails.
	AvailBlanking *AvailBlanking `locationName:"availBlanking" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Event Signaling And Messaging (ESAM).
	Esam *EsamSettings `locationName:"esam" type:"structure"`

	// Use Inputs (inputs) to define the source file used in the transcode job.
	// There can only be one input in a job template. Using the API, you can include
	// multiple inputs when referencing a job template.
	Inputs []*InputTemplate `locationName:"inputs" type:"list"`

	// Overlay motion graphics on top of your video. The motion graphics that you
	// specify here appear on all outputs in all output groups.
	MotionImageInserter *MotionImageInserter `locationName:"motionImageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for Nielsen Configuration
	NielsenConfiguration *NielsenConfiguration `locationName:"nielsenConfiguration" type:"structure"`

	// (OutputGroups) contains one group of settings for each set of outputs that
	// share a common package type. All unpackaged files (MPEG-4, MPEG-2 TS, Quicktime,
	// MXF, and no container) are grouped in a single output group as well. Required
	// in (OutputGroups) is a group of settings that apply to the whole group. This
	// required object depends on the value you set for (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings).
	// Type, settings object pairs are as follows. * FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS, FileGroupSettings
	// * HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS, HlsGroupSettings * DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS, DashIsoGroupSettings
	// * MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS, MsSmoothGroupSettings * CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS,
	// CmafGroupSettings
	OutputGroups []*OutputGroup `locationName:"outputGroups" type:"list"`

	// Contains settings used to acquire and adjust timecode information from inputs.
	TimecodeConfig *TimecodeConfig `locationName:"timecodeConfig" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Timed metadata insertion (TimedMetadataInsertion) to include ID3 tags
	// in your job. To include timed metadata, you must enable it here, enable it
	// in each output container, and specify tags and timecodes in ID3 insertion
	// (Id3Insertion) objects.
	TimedMetadataInsertion *TimedMetadataInsertion `locationName:"timedMetadataInsertion" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s JobTemplateSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s JobTemplateSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "JobTemplateSettings"}
	if s.AdAvailOffset != nil && *s.AdAvailOffset < -1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("AdAvailOffset", -1000))
	}
	if s.AvailBlanking != nil {
		if err := s.AvailBlanking.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AvailBlanking", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Inputs != nil {
		for i, v := range s.Inputs {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "Inputs", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.MotionImageInserter != nil {
		if err := s.MotionImageInserter.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("MotionImageInserter", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.OutputGroups != nil {
		for i, v := range s.OutputGroups {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "OutputGroups", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAdAvailOffset sets the AdAvailOffset field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetAdAvailOffset(v int64) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.AdAvailOffset = &v
	return s
}

// SetAvailBlanking sets the AvailBlanking field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetAvailBlanking(v *AvailBlanking) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.AvailBlanking = v
	return s
}

// SetEsam sets the Esam field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetEsam(v *EsamSettings) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.Esam = v
	return s
}

// SetInputs sets the Inputs field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetInputs(v []*InputTemplate) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.Inputs = v
	return s
}

// SetMotionImageInserter sets the MotionImageInserter field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetMotionImageInserter(v *MotionImageInserter) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.MotionImageInserter = v
	return s
}

// SetNielsenConfiguration sets the NielsenConfiguration field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetNielsenConfiguration(v *NielsenConfiguration) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.NielsenConfiguration = v
	return s
}

// SetOutputGroups sets the OutputGroups field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetOutputGroups(v []*OutputGroup) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.OutputGroups = v
	return s
}

// SetTimecodeConfig sets the TimecodeConfig field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetTimecodeConfig(v *TimecodeConfig) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.TimecodeConfig = v
	return s
}

// SetTimedMetadataInsertion sets the TimedMetadataInsertion field's value.
func (s *JobTemplateSettings) SetTimedMetadataInsertion(v *TimedMetadataInsertion) *JobTemplateSettings {
	s.TimedMetadataInsertion = v
	return s
}

// You can send list job templates requests with an empty body. Optionally,
// you can filter the response by category by specifying it in your request
// body. You can also optionally specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of
// job templates to be returned.
type ListJobTemplatesInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optionally, specify a job template category to limit responses to only job
	// templates from that category.
	Category *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. When you request a list of job templates, you can choose to list
	// them alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
	// specify, the service will list them by name.
	ListBy *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"listBy" type:"string" enum:"JobTemplateListBy"`

	// Optional. Number of job templates, up to twenty, that will be returned at
	// one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of job templates.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListJobTemplatesInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListJobTemplatesInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ListJobTemplatesInput"}
	if s.MaxResults != nil && *s.MaxResults < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxResults", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetCategory(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetListBy sets the ListBy field's value.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetListBy(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput {
	s.ListBy = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListJobTemplatesInput {
	s.MaxResults = &v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// SetOrder sets the Order field's value.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListJobTemplatesInput {
	s.Order = &v
	return s
}

// Successful list job templates requests return a JSON array of job templates.
// If you don't specify how they are ordered, you will receive them in alphabetical
// order by name.
type ListJobTemplatesOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// List of Job templates.
	JobTemplates []*JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplates" type:"list"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of job templates.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListJobTemplatesOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListJobTemplatesOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetJobTemplates sets the JobTemplates field's value.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesOutput) SetJobTemplates(v []*JobTemplate) *ListJobTemplatesOutput {
	s.JobTemplates = v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListJobTemplatesOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobTemplatesOutput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// You can send list jobs requests with an empty body. Optionally, you can filter
// the response by queue and/or job status by specifying them in your request
// body. You can also optionally specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of
// jobs to be returned.
type ListJobsInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optional. Number of jobs, up to twenty, that will be returned at one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of jobs.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`

	// Provide a queue name to get back only jobs from that queue.
	Queue *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// A job's status can be SUBMITTED, PROGRESSING, COMPLETE, CANCELED, or ERROR.
	Status *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"JobStatus"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListJobsInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListJobsInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ListJobsInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ListJobsInput"}
	if s.MaxResults != nil && *s.MaxResults < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxResults", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.
func (s *ListJobsInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListJobsInput {
	s.MaxResults = &v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListJobsInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobsInput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// SetOrder sets the Order field's value.
func (s *ListJobsInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListJobsInput {
	s.Order = &v
	return s
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *ListJobsInput) SetQueue(v string) *ListJobsInput {
	s.Queue = &v
	return s
}

// SetStatus sets the Status field's value.
func (s *ListJobsInput) SetStatus(v string) *ListJobsInput {
	s.Status = &v
	return s
}

// Successful list jobs requests return a JSON array of jobs. If you don't specify
// how they are ordered, you will receive the most recently created first.
type ListJobsOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// List of jobs
	Jobs []*Job `locationName:"jobs" type:"list"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of jobs.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListJobsOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListJobsOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetJobs sets the Jobs field's value.
func (s *ListJobsOutput) SetJobs(v []*Job) *ListJobsOutput {
	s.Jobs = v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListJobsOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListJobsOutput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// You can send list presets requests with an empty body. Optionally, you can
// filter the response by category by specifying it in your request body. You
// can also optionally specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of queues to
// be returned.
type ListPresetsInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optionally, specify a preset category to limit responses to only presets
	// from that category.
	Category *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// Optional. When you request a list of presets, you can choose to list them
	// alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
	// specify, the service will list them by name.
	ListBy *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"listBy" type:"string" enum:"PresetListBy"`

	// Optional. Number of presets, up to twenty, that will be returned at one time
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of presets.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListPresetsInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListPresetsInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ListPresetsInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ListPresetsInput"}
	if s.MaxResults != nil && *s.MaxResults < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxResults", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetCategory(v string) *ListPresetsInput {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetListBy sets the ListBy field's value.
func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetListBy(v string) *ListPresetsInput {
	s.ListBy = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.
func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListPresetsInput {
	s.MaxResults = &v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListPresetsInput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// SetOrder sets the Order field's value.
func (s *ListPresetsInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListPresetsInput {
	s.Order = &v
	return s
}

// Successful list presets requests return a JSON array of presets. If you don't
// specify how they are ordered, you will receive them alphabetically by name.
type ListPresetsOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of presets.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// List of presets
	Presets []*Preset `locationName:"presets" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListPresetsOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListPresetsOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListPresetsOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListPresetsOutput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// SetPresets sets the Presets field's value.
func (s *ListPresetsOutput) SetPresets(v []*Preset) *ListPresetsOutput {
	s.Presets = v
	return s
}

// You can send list queues requests with an empty body. You can optionally
// specify the maximum number, up to twenty, of queues to be returned.
type ListQueuesInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optional. When you request a list of queues, you can choose to list them
	// alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
	// specify, the service will list them by creation date.
	ListBy *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"listBy" type:"string" enum:"QueueListBy"`

	// Optional. Number of queues, up to twenty, that will be returned at one time.
	MaxResults *int64 `location:"querystring" locationName:"maxResults" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use this string, provided with the response to a previous request, to request
	// the next batch of queues.
	NextToken *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
	// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
	Order *string `location:"querystring" locationName:"order" type:"string" enum:"Order"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListQueuesInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListQueuesInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ListQueuesInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ListQueuesInput"}
	if s.MaxResults != nil && *s.MaxResults < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxResults", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetListBy sets the ListBy field's value.
func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetListBy(v string) *ListQueuesInput {
	s.ListBy = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxResults sets the MaxResults field's value.
func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetMaxResults(v int64) *ListQueuesInput {
	s.MaxResults = &v
	return s
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListQueuesInput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// SetOrder sets the Order field's value.
func (s *ListQueuesInput) SetOrder(v string) *ListQueuesInput {
	s.Order = &v
	return s
}

// Successful list queues requests return a JSON array of queues. If you don't
// specify how they are ordered, you will receive them alphabetically by name.
type ListQueuesOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use this string to request the next batch of queues.
	NextToken *string `locationName:"nextToken" type:"string"`

	// List of queues.
	Queues []*Queue `locationName:"queues" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListQueuesOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListQueuesOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetNextToken sets the NextToken field's value.
func (s *ListQueuesOutput) SetNextToken(v string) *ListQueuesOutput {
	s.NextToken = &v
	return s
}

// SetQueues sets the Queues field's value.
func (s *ListQueuesOutput) SetQueues(v []*Queue) *ListQueuesOutput {
	s.Queues = v
	return s
}

// List the tags for your AWS Elemental MediaConvert resource by sending a request
// with the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. To get the ARN, send
// a GET request with the resource name.
type ListTagsForResourceInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to list tags
	// for. To get the ARN, send a GET request with the resource name.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `location:"uri" locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListTagsForResourceInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListTagsForResourceInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ListTagsForResourceInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ListTagsForResourceInput"}
	if s.Arn == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Arn"))
	}
	if s.Arn != nil && len(*s.Arn) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Arn", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *ListTagsForResourceInput) SetArn(v string) *ListTagsForResourceInput {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// A successful request to list the tags for a resource returns a JSON map of
// tags.
type ListTagsForResourceOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) and tags for an AWS Elemental MediaConvert
	// resource.
	ResourceTags *ResourceTags `locationName:"resourceTags" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ListTagsForResourceOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ListTagsForResourceOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetResourceTags sets the ResourceTags field's value.
func (s *ListTagsForResourceOutput) SetResourceTags(v *ResourceTags) *ListTagsForResourceOutput {
	s.ResourceTags = v
	return s
}

// Settings for SCTE-35 signals from ESAM. Include this in your job settings
// to put SCTE-35 markers in your HLS and transport stream outputs at the insertion
// points that you specify in an ESAM XML document. Provide the document in
// the setting SCC XML (sccXml).
type M2tsScte35Esam struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the SCTE-35 stream in the transport stream generated
	// by ESAM.
	Scte35EsamPid *int64 `locationName:"scte35EsamPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s M2tsScte35Esam) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s M2tsScte35Esam) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *M2tsScte35Esam) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "M2tsScte35Esam"}
	if s.Scte35EsamPid != nil && *s.Scte35EsamPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Scte35EsamPid", 32))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetScte35EsamPid sets the Scte35EsamPid field's value.
func (s *M2tsScte35Esam) SetScte35EsamPid(v int64) *M2tsScte35Esam {
	s.Scte35EsamPid = &v
	return s
}

// MPEG-2 TS container settings. These apply to outputs in a File output group
// when the output's container (ContainerType) is MPEG-2 Transport Stream (M2TS).
// In these assets, data is organized by the program map table (PMT). Each transport
// stream program contains subsets of data, including audio, video, and metadata.
// Each of these subsets of data has a numerical label called a packet identifier
// (PID). Each transport stream program corresponds to one MediaConvert output.
// The PMT lists the types of data in a program along with their PID. Downstream
// systems and players use the program map table to look up the PID for each
// type of data it accesses and then uses the PIDs to locate specific data within
// the asset.
type M2tsSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Selects between the DVB and ATSC buffer models for Dolby Digital audio.
	AudioBufferModel *string `locationName:"audioBufferModel" type:"string" enum:"M2tsAudioBufferModel"`

	// The number of audio frames to insert for each PES packet.
	AudioFramesPerPes *int64 `locationName:"audioFramesPerPes" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifiers (PIDs) for any elementary audio streams you
	// include in this output. Specify multiple PIDs as a JSON array. Default is
	// the range 482-492.
	AudioPids []*int64 `locationName:"audioPids" type:"list"`

	// Specify the output bitrate of the transport stream in bits per second. Setting
	// to 0 lets the muxer automatically determine the appropriate bitrate. Other
	// common values are 3750000, 7500000, and 15000000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" type:"integer"`

	// Controls what buffer model to use for accurate interleaving. If set to MULTIPLEX,
	// use multiplex buffer model. If set to NONE, this can lead to lower latency,
	// but low-memory devices may not be able to play back the stream without interruptions.
	BufferModel *string `locationName:"bufferModel" type:"string" enum:"M2tsBufferModel"`

	// Inserts DVB Network Information Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition
	// interval.
	DvbNitSettings *DvbNitSettings `locationName:"dvbNitSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Inserts DVB Service Description Table (NIT) at the specified table repetition
	// interval.
	DvbSdtSettings *DvbSdtSettings `locationName:"dvbSdtSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the packet identifiers (PIDs) for DVB subtitle data included in this
	// output. Specify multiple PIDs as a JSON array. Default is the range 460-479.
	DvbSubPids []*int64 `locationName:"dvbSubPids" type:"list"`

	// Inserts DVB Time and Date Table (TDT) at the specified table repetition interval.
	DvbTdtSettings *DvbTdtSettings `locationName:"dvbTdtSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for DVB teletext data you include in
	// this output. Default is 499.
	DvbTeletextPid *int64 `locationName:"dvbTeletextPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// When set to VIDEO_AND_FIXED_INTERVALS, audio EBP markers will be added to
	// partitions 3 and 4. The interval between these additional markers will be
	// fixed, and will be slightly shorter than the video EBP marker interval. When
	// set to VIDEO_INTERVAL, these additional markers will not be inserted. Only
	// applicable when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers
	// is EBP or EBP_LEGACY).
	EbpAudioInterval *string `locationName:"ebpAudioInterval" type:"string" enum:"M2tsEbpAudioInterval"`

	// Selects which PIDs to place EBP markers on. They can either be placed only
	// on the video PID, or on both the video PID and all audio PIDs. Only applicable
	// when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers is EBP
	// or EBP_LEGACY).
	EbpPlacement *string `locationName:"ebpPlacement" type:"string" enum:"M2tsEbpPlacement"`

	// Controls whether to include the ES Rate field in the PES header.
	EsRateInPes *string `locationName:"esRateInPes" type:"string" enum:"M2tsEsRateInPes"`

	// Keep the default value (DEFAULT) unless you know that your audio EBP markers
	// are incorrectly appearing before your video EBP markers. To correct this
	// problem, set this value to Force (FORCE).
	ForceTsVideoEbpOrder *string `locationName:"forceTsVideoEbpOrder" type:"string" enum:"M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrder"`

	// The length, in seconds, of each fragment. Only used with EBP markers.
	FragmentTime *float64 `locationName:"fragmentTime" type:"double"`

	// Specify the maximum time, in milliseconds, between Program Clock References
	// (PCRs) inserted into the transport stream.
	MaxPcrInterval *int64 `locationName:"maxPcrInterval" type:"integer"`

	// When set, enforces that Encoder Boundary Points do not come within the specified
	// time interval of each other by looking ahead at input video. If another EBP
	// is going to come in within the specified time interval, the current EBP is
	// not emitted, and the segment is "stretched" to the next marker. The lookahead
	// value does not add latency to the system. The Live Event must be configured
	// elsewhere to create sufficient latency to make the lookahead accurate.
	MinEbpInterval *int64 `locationName:"minEbpInterval" type:"integer"`

	// If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in
	// the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.
	NielsenId3 *string `locationName:"nielsenId3" type:"string" enum:"M2tsNielsenId3"`

	// Value in bits per second of extra null packets to insert into the transport
	// stream. This can be used if a downstream encryption system requires periodic
	// null packets.
	NullPacketBitrate *float64 `locationName:"nullPacketBitrate" type:"double"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	PatInterval *int64 `locationName:"patInterval" type:"integer"`

	// When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET, a Program Clock Reference value is inserted
	// for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This is effective only
	// when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.
	PcrControl *string `locationName:"pcrControl" type:"string" enum:"M2tsPcrControl"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for the program clock reference (PCR)
	// in this output. If you do not specify a value, the service will use the value
	// for Video PID (VideoPid).
	PcrPid *int64 `locationName:"pcrPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the number of milliseconds between instances of the program map table
	// (PMT) in the output transport stream.
	PmtInterval *int64 `locationName:"pmtInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for the program map table (PMT) itself.
	// Default is 480.
	PmtPid *int64 `locationName:"pmtPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) of the private metadata stream. Default
	// is 503.
	PrivateMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"privateMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Use Program number (programNumber) to specify the program number used in
	// the program map table (PMT) for this output. Default is 1. Program numbers
	// and program map tables are parts of MPEG-2 transport stream containers, used
	// for organizing data.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" type:"integer"`

	// When set to CBR, inserts null packets into transport stream to fill specified
	// bitrate. When set to VBR, the bitrate setting acts as the maximum bitrate,
	// but the output will not be padded up to that bitrate.
	RateMode *string `locationName:"rateMode" type:"string" enum:"M2tsRateMode"`

	// Include this in your job settings to put SCTE-35 markers in your HLS and
	// transport stream outputs at the insertion points that you specify in an ESAM
	// XML document. Provide the document in the setting SCC XML (sccXml).
	Scte35Esam *M2tsScte35Esam `locationName:"scte35Esam" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) of the SCTE-35 stream in the transport
	// stream.
	Scte35Pid *int64 `locationName:"scte35Pid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Enables SCTE-35 passthrough (scte35Source) to pass any SCTE-35 signals from
	// input to output.
	Scte35Source *string `locationName:"scte35Source" type:"string" enum:"M2tsScte35Source"`

	// Inserts segmentation markers at each segmentation_time period. rai_segstart
	// sets the Random Access Indicator bit in the adaptation field. rai_adapt sets
	// the RAI bit and adds the current timecode in the private data bytes. psi_segstart
	// inserts PAT and PMT tables at the start of segments. ebp adds Encoder Boundary
	// Point information to the adaptation field as per OpenCable specification
	// OC-SP-EBP-I01-130118. ebp_legacy adds Encoder Boundary Point information
	// to the adaptation field using a legacy proprietary format.
	SegmentationMarkers *string `locationName:"segmentationMarkers" type:"string" enum:"M2tsSegmentationMarkers"`

	// The segmentation style parameter controls how segmentation markers are inserted
	// into the transport stream. With avails, it is possible that segments may
	// be truncated, which can influence where future segmentation markers are inserted.
	// When a segmentation style of "reset_cadence" is selected and a segment is
	// truncated due to an avail, we will reset the segmentation cadence. This means
	// the subsequent segment will have a duration of of $segmentation_time seconds.
	// When a segmentation style of "maintain_cadence" is selected and a segment
	// is truncated due to an avail, we will not reset the segmentation cadence.
	// This means the subsequent segment will likely be truncated as well. However,
	// all segments after that will have a duration of $segmentation_time seconds.
	// Note that EBP lookahead is a slight exception to this rule.
	SegmentationStyle *string `locationName:"segmentationStyle" type:"string" enum:"M2tsSegmentationStyle"`

	// Specify the length, in seconds, of each segment. Required unless markers
	// is set to _none_.
	SegmentationTime *float64 `locationName:"segmentationTime" type:"double"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) for timed metadata in this output. Default
	// is 502.
	TimedMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"timedMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the ID for the transport stream itself in the program map table for
	// this output. Transport stream IDs and program map tables are parts of MPEG-2
	// transport stream containers, used for organizing data.
	TransportStreamId *int64 `locationName:"transportStreamId" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the packet identifier (PID) of the elementary video stream in the
	// transport stream.
	VideoPid *int64 `locationName:"videoPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s M2tsSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s M2tsSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *M2tsSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "M2tsSettings"}
	if s.DvbTeletextPid != nil && *s.DvbTeletextPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("DvbTeletextPid", 32))
	}
	if s.PcrPid != nil && *s.PcrPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("PcrPid", 32))
	}
	if s.PmtPid != nil && *s.PmtPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("PmtPid", 32))
	}
	if s.PrivateMetadataPid != nil && *s.PrivateMetadataPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("PrivateMetadataPid", 32))
	}
	if s.Scte35Pid != nil && *s.Scte35Pid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Scte35Pid", 32))
	}
	if s.TimedMetadataPid != nil && *s.TimedMetadataPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("TimedMetadataPid", 32))
	}
	if s.VideoPid != nil && *s.VideoPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("VideoPid", 32))
	}
	if s.DvbNitSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DvbNitSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DvbNitSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.DvbSdtSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DvbSdtSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DvbSdtSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.DvbTdtSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DvbTdtSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DvbTdtSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Scte35Esam != nil {
		if err := s.Scte35Esam.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Scte35Esam", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioBufferModel sets the AudioBufferModel field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetAudioBufferModel(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.AudioBufferModel = &v
	return s
}

// SetAudioFramesPerPes sets the AudioFramesPerPes field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetAudioFramesPerPes(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.AudioFramesPerPes = &v
	return s
}

// SetAudioPids sets the AudioPids field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetAudioPids(v []*int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.AudioPids = v
	return s
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetBitrate(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetBufferModel sets the BufferModel field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetBufferModel(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.BufferModel = &v
	return s
}

// SetDvbNitSettings sets the DvbNitSettings field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbNitSettings(v *DvbNitSettings) *M2tsSettings {
	s.DvbNitSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetDvbSdtSettings sets the DvbSdtSettings field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbSdtSettings(v *DvbSdtSettings) *M2tsSettings {
	s.DvbSdtSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetDvbSubPids sets the DvbSubPids field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbSubPids(v []*int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.DvbSubPids = v
	return s
}

// SetDvbTdtSettings sets the DvbTdtSettings field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbTdtSettings(v *DvbTdtSettings) *M2tsSettings {
	s.DvbTdtSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetDvbTeletextPid sets the DvbTeletextPid field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetDvbTeletextPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.DvbTeletextPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetEbpAudioInterval sets the EbpAudioInterval field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetEbpAudioInterval(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.EbpAudioInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetEbpPlacement sets the EbpPlacement field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetEbpPlacement(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.EbpPlacement = &v
	return s
}

// SetEsRateInPes sets the EsRateInPes field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetEsRateInPes(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.EsRateInPes = &v
	return s
}

// SetForceTsVideoEbpOrder sets the ForceTsVideoEbpOrder field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetForceTsVideoEbpOrder(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.ForceTsVideoEbpOrder = &v
	return s
}

// SetFragmentTime sets the FragmentTime field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetFragmentTime(v float64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.FragmentTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxPcrInterval sets the MaxPcrInterval field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetMaxPcrInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.MaxPcrInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinEbpInterval sets the MinEbpInterval field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetMinEbpInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.MinEbpInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetNielsenId3 sets the NielsenId3 field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetNielsenId3(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.NielsenId3 = &v
	return s
}

// SetNullPacketBitrate sets the NullPacketBitrate field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetNullPacketBitrate(v float64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.NullPacketBitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetPatInterval sets the PatInterval field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPatInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.PatInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetPcrControl sets the PcrControl field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPcrControl(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.PcrControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetPcrPid sets the PcrPid field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPcrPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.PcrPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetPmtInterval sets the PmtInterval field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPmtInterval(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.PmtInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetPmtPid sets the PmtPid field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPmtPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.PmtPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetPrivateMetadataPid sets the PrivateMetadataPid field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetPrivateMetadataPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.PrivateMetadataPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.ProgramNumber = &v
	return s
}

// SetRateMode sets the RateMode field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetRateMode(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.RateMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetScte35Esam sets the Scte35Esam field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetScte35Esam(v *M2tsScte35Esam) *M2tsSettings {
	s.Scte35Esam = v
	return s
}

// SetScte35Pid sets the Scte35Pid field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetScte35Pid(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.Scte35Pid = &v
	return s
}

// SetScte35Source sets the Scte35Source field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetScte35Source(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.Scte35Source = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentationMarkers sets the SegmentationMarkers field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationMarkers(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.SegmentationMarkers = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentationStyle sets the SegmentationStyle field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationStyle(v string) *M2tsSettings {
	s.SegmentationStyle = &v
	return s
}

// SetSegmentationTime sets the SegmentationTime field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetSegmentationTime(v float64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.SegmentationTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimedMetadataPid sets the TimedMetadataPid field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetTimedMetadataPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.TimedMetadataPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetTransportStreamId sets the TransportStreamId field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetTransportStreamId(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.TransportStreamId = &v
	return s
}

// SetVideoPid sets the VideoPid field's value.
func (s *M2tsSettings) SetVideoPid(v int64) *M2tsSettings {
	s.VideoPid = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for TS segments in HLS
type M3u8Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The number of audio frames to insert for each PES packet.
	AudioFramesPerPes *int64 `locationName:"audioFramesPerPes" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the elementary audio stream(s) in the transport
	// stream. Multiple values are accepted, and can be entered in ranges and/or
	// by comma separation.
	AudioPids []*int64 `locationName:"audioPids" type:"list"`

	// If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in
	// the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.
	NielsenId3 *string `locationName:"nielsenId3" type:"string" enum:"M3u8NielsenId3"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	PatInterval *int64 `locationName:"patInterval" type:"integer"`

	// When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET a Program Clock Reference value is inserted
	// for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This parameter is effective
	// only when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.
	PcrControl *string `locationName:"pcrControl" type:"string" enum:"M3u8PcrControl"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the Program Clock Reference (PCR) in the transport
	// stream. When no value is given, the encoder will assign the same value as
	// the Video PID.
	PcrPid *int64 `locationName:"pcrPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// The number of milliseconds between instances of this table in the output
	// transport stream.
	PmtInterval *int64 `locationName:"pmtInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) for the Program Map Table (PMT) in the transport
	// stream.
	PmtPid *int64 `locationName:"pmtPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the private metadata stream in the transport stream.
	PrivateMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"privateMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// The value of the program number field in the Program Map Table.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the SCTE-35 stream in the transport stream.
	Scte35Pid *int64 `locationName:"scte35Pid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Enables SCTE-35 passthrough (scte35Source) to pass any SCTE-35 signals from
	// input to output.
	Scte35Source *string `locationName:"scte35Source" type:"string" enum:"M3u8Scte35Source"`

	// Applies only to HLS outputs. Use this setting to specify whether the service
	// inserts the ID3 timed metadata from the input in this output.
	TimedMetadata *string `locationName:"timedMetadata" type:"string" enum:"TimedMetadata"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the timed metadata stream in the transport stream.
	TimedMetadataPid *int64 `locationName:"timedMetadataPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// The value of the transport stream ID field in the Program Map Table.
	TransportStreamId *int64 `locationName:"transportStreamId" type:"integer"`

	// Packet Identifier (PID) of the elementary video stream in the transport stream.
	VideoPid *int64 `locationName:"videoPid" min:"32" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s M3u8Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s M3u8Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *M3u8Settings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "M3u8Settings"}
	if s.PcrPid != nil && *s.PcrPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("PcrPid", 32))
	}
	if s.PmtPid != nil && *s.PmtPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("PmtPid", 32))
	}
	if s.PrivateMetadataPid != nil && *s.PrivateMetadataPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("PrivateMetadataPid", 32))
	}
	if s.Scte35Pid != nil && *s.Scte35Pid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Scte35Pid", 32))
	}
	if s.TimedMetadataPid != nil && *s.TimedMetadataPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("TimedMetadataPid", 32))
	}
	if s.VideoPid != nil && *s.VideoPid < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("VideoPid", 32))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioFramesPerPes sets the AudioFramesPerPes field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetAudioFramesPerPes(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.AudioFramesPerPes = &v
	return s
}

// SetAudioPids sets the AudioPids field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetAudioPids(v []*int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.AudioPids = v
	return s
}

// SetNielsenId3 sets the NielsenId3 field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetNielsenId3(v string) *M3u8Settings {
	s.NielsenId3 = &v
	return s
}

// SetPatInterval sets the PatInterval field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPatInterval(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.PatInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetPcrControl sets the PcrControl field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPcrControl(v string) *M3u8Settings {
	s.PcrControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetPcrPid sets the PcrPid field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPcrPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.PcrPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetPmtInterval sets the PmtInterval field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPmtInterval(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.PmtInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetPmtPid sets the PmtPid field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPmtPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.PmtPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetPrivateMetadataPid sets the PrivateMetadataPid field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetPrivateMetadataPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.PrivateMetadataPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.ProgramNumber = &v
	return s
}

// SetScte35Pid sets the Scte35Pid field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetScte35Pid(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.Scte35Pid = &v
	return s
}

// SetScte35Source sets the Scte35Source field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetScte35Source(v string) *M3u8Settings {
	s.Scte35Source = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimedMetadata sets the TimedMetadata field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetTimedMetadata(v string) *M3u8Settings {
	s.TimedMetadata = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimedMetadataPid sets the TimedMetadataPid field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetTimedMetadataPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.TimedMetadataPid = &v
	return s
}

// SetTransportStreamId sets the TransportStreamId field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetTransportStreamId(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.TransportStreamId = &v
	return s
}

// SetVideoPid sets the VideoPid field's value.
func (s *M3u8Settings) SetVideoPid(v int64) *M3u8Settings {
	s.VideoPid = &v
	return s
}

// Overlay motion graphics on top of your video at the time that you specify.
type MotionImageInserter struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If your motion graphic asset is a .mov file, keep this setting unspecified.
	// If your motion graphic asset is a series of .png files, specify the frame
	// rate of the overlay in frames per second, as a fraction. For example, specify
	// 24 fps as 24/1. Make sure that the number of images in your series matches
	// the frame rate and your intended overlay duration. For example, if you want
	// a 30-second overlay at 30 fps, you should have 900 .png images. This overlay
	// frame rate doesn't need to match the frame rate of the underlying video.
	Framerate *MotionImageInsertionFramerate `locationName:"framerate" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the .mov file or series of .png files that you want to overlay on
	// your video. For .png files, provide the file name of the first file in the
	// series. Make sure that the names of the .png files end with sequential numbers
	// that specify the order that they are played in. For example, overlay_000.png,
	// overlay_001.png, overlay_002.png, and so on. The sequence must start at zero,
	// and each image file name must have the same number of digits. Pad your initial
	// file names with enough zeros to complete the sequence. For example, if the
	// first image is overlay_0.png, there can be only 10 images in the sequence,
	// with the last image being overlay_9.png. But if the first image is overlay_00.png,
	// there can be 100 images in the sequence.
	Input *string `locationName:"input" min:"14" type:"string"`

	// Choose the type of motion graphic asset that you are providing for your overlay.
	// You can choose either a .mov file or a series of .png files.
	InsertionMode *string `locationName:"insertionMode" type:"string" enum:"MotionImageInsertionMode"`

	// Use Offset to specify the placement of your motion graphic overlay on the
	// video frame. Specify in pixels, from the upper-left corner of the frame.
	// If you don't specify an offset, the service scales your overlay to the full
	// size of the frame. Otherwise, the service inserts the overlay at its native
	// resolution and scales the size up or down with any video scaling.
	Offset *MotionImageInsertionOffset `locationName:"offset" type:"structure"`

	// Specify whether your motion graphic overlay repeats on a loop or plays only
	// once.
	Playback *string `locationName:"playback" type:"string" enum:"MotionImagePlayback"`

	// Specify when the motion overlay begins. Use timecode format (HH:MM:SS:FF
	// or HH:MM:SS;FF). Make sure that the timecode you provide here takes into
	// account how you have set up your timecode configuration under both job settings
	// and input settings. The simplest way to do that is to set both to start at
	// 0. If you need to set up your job to follow timecodes embedded in your source
	// that don't start at zero, make sure that you specify a start time that is
	// after the first embedded timecode. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/setting-up-timecode.html
	// Find job-wide and input timecode configuration settings in your JSON job
	// settings specification at settings>timecodeConfig>source and settings>inputs>timecodeSource.
	StartTime *string `locationName:"startTime" min:"11" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s MotionImageInserter) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s MotionImageInserter) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *MotionImageInserter) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "MotionImageInserter"}
	if s.Input != nil && len(*s.Input) < 14 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Input", 14))
	}
	if s.StartTime != nil && len(*s.StartTime) < 11 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("StartTime", 11))
	}
	if s.Framerate != nil {
		if err := s.Framerate.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Framerate", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetFramerate sets the Framerate field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetFramerate(v *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) *MotionImageInserter {
	s.Framerate = v
	return s
}

// SetInput sets the Input field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetInput(v string) *MotionImageInserter {
	s.Input = &v
	return s
}

// SetInsertionMode sets the InsertionMode field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetInsertionMode(v string) *MotionImageInserter {
	s.InsertionMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetOffset sets the Offset field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetOffset(v *MotionImageInsertionOffset) *MotionImageInserter {
	s.Offset = v
	return s
}

// SetPlayback sets the Playback field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetPlayback(v string) *MotionImageInserter {
	s.Playback = &v
	return s
}

// SetStartTime sets the StartTime field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInserter) SetStartTime(v string) *MotionImageInserter {
	s.StartTime = &v
	return s
}

// For motion overlays that don't have a built-in frame rate, specify the frame
// rate of the overlay in frames per second, as a fraction. For example, specify
// 24 fps as 24/1. The overlay frame rate doesn't need to match the frame rate
// of the underlying video.
type MotionImageInsertionFramerate struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The bottom of the fraction that expresses your overlay frame rate. For example,
	// if your frame rate is 24 fps, set this value to 1.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// The top of the fraction that expresses your overlay frame rate. For example,
	// if your frame rate is 24 fps, set this value to 24.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s MotionImageInsertionFramerate) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s MotionImageInsertionFramerate) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "MotionImageInsertionFramerate"}
	if s.FramerateDenominator != nil && *s.FramerateDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.FramerateNumerator != nil && *s.FramerateNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateNumerator", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionFramerate {
	s.FramerateDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInsertionFramerate) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionFramerate {
	s.FramerateNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// Specify the offset between the upper-left corner of the video frame and the
// top left corner of the overlay.
type MotionImageInsertionOffset struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Set the distance, in pixels, between the overlay and the left edge of the
	// video frame.
	ImageX *int64 `locationName:"imageX" type:"integer"`

	// Set the distance, in pixels, between the overlay and the top edge of the
	// video frame.
	ImageY *int64 `locationName:"imageY" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s MotionImageInsertionOffset) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s MotionImageInsertionOffset) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetImageX sets the ImageX field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInsertionOffset) SetImageX(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionOffset {
	s.ImageX = &v
	return s
}

// SetImageY sets the ImageY field's value.
func (s *MotionImageInsertionOffset) SetImageY(v int64) *MotionImageInsertionOffset {
	s.ImageY = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for MOV Container.
type MovSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// When enabled, include 'clap' atom if appropriate for the video output settings.
	ClapAtom *string `locationName:"clapAtom" type:"string" enum:"MovClapAtom"`

	// When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times
	// in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative,
	// and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per
	// 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.
	CslgAtom *string `locationName:"cslgAtom" type:"string" enum:"MovCslgAtom"`

	// When set to XDCAM, writes MPEG2 video streams into the QuickTime file using
	// XDCAM fourcc codes. This increases compatibility with Apple editors and players,
	// but may decrease compatibility with other players. Only applicable when the
	// video codec is MPEG2.
	Mpeg2FourCCControl *string `locationName:"mpeg2FourCCControl" type:"string" enum:"MovMpeg2FourCCControl"`

	// If set to OMNEON, inserts Omneon-compatible padding
	PaddingControl *string `locationName:"paddingControl" type:"string" enum:"MovPaddingControl"`

	// Always keep the default value (SELF_CONTAINED) for this setting.
	Reference *string `locationName:"reference" type:"string" enum:"MovReference"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s MovSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s MovSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetClapAtom sets the ClapAtom field's value.
func (s *MovSettings) SetClapAtom(v string) *MovSettings {
	s.ClapAtom = &v
	return s
}

// SetCslgAtom sets the CslgAtom field's value.
func (s *MovSettings) SetCslgAtom(v string) *MovSettings {
	s.CslgAtom = &v
	return s
}

// SetMpeg2FourCCControl sets the Mpeg2FourCCControl field's value.
func (s *MovSettings) SetMpeg2FourCCControl(v string) *MovSettings {
	s.Mpeg2FourCCControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetPaddingControl sets the PaddingControl field's value.
func (s *MovSettings) SetPaddingControl(v string) *MovSettings {
	s.PaddingControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetReference sets the Reference field's value.
func (s *MovSettings) SetReference(v string) *MovSettings {
	s.Reference = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value MP2.
type Mp2Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Average bitrate in bits/second.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"32000" type:"integer"`

	// Set Channels to specify the number of channels in this output audio track.
	// Choosing Mono in the console will give you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo
	// will give you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2.
	Channels *int64 `locationName:"channels" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Sample rate in hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"32000" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Mp2Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Mp2Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *Mp2Settings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "Mp2Settings"}
	if s.Bitrate != nil && *s.Bitrate < 32000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Bitrate", 32000))
	}
	if s.Channels != nil && *s.Channels < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Channels", 1))
	}
	if s.SampleRate != nil && *s.SampleRate < 32000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SampleRate", 32000))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *Mp2Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Mp2Settings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetChannels sets the Channels field's value.
func (s *Mp2Settings) SetChannels(v int64) *Mp2Settings {
	s.Channels = &v
	return s
}

// SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.
func (s *Mp2Settings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *Mp2Settings {
	s.SampleRate = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for MP4 Container
type Mp4Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times
	// in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative,
	// and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per
	// 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.
	CslgAtom *string `locationName:"cslgAtom" type:"string" enum:"Mp4CslgAtom"`

	// Inserts a free-space box immediately after the moov box.
	FreeSpaceBox *string `locationName:"freeSpaceBox" type:"string" enum:"Mp4FreeSpaceBox"`

	// If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning
	// of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed
	// normally at the end.
	MoovPlacement *string `locationName:"moovPlacement" type:"string" enum:"Mp4MoovPlacement"`

	// Overrides the "Major Brand" field in the output file. Usually not necessary
	// to specify.
	Mp4MajorBrand *string `locationName:"mp4MajorBrand" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Mp4Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Mp4Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetCslgAtom sets the CslgAtom field's value.
func (s *Mp4Settings) SetCslgAtom(v string) *Mp4Settings {
	s.CslgAtom = &v
	return s
}

// SetFreeSpaceBox sets the FreeSpaceBox field's value.
func (s *Mp4Settings) SetFreeSpaceBox(v string) *Mp4Settings {
	s.FreeSpaceBox = &v
	return s
}

// SetMoovPlacement sets the MoovPlacement field's value.
func (s *Mp4Settings) SetMoovPlacement(v string) *Mp4Settings {
	s.MoovPlacement = &v
	return s
}

// SetMp4MajorBrand sets the Mp4MajorBrand field's value.
func (s *Mp4Settings) SetMp4MajorBrand(v string) *Mp4Settings {
	s.Mp4MajorBrand = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value MPEG2.
type Mpeg2Settings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
	// quality.
	AdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"adaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Average bitrate in bits/second. Required for VBR and CBR. For MS Smooth outputs,
	// bitrates must be unique when rounded down to the nearest multiple of 1000.
	Bitrate *int64 `locationName:"bitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Use Level (Mpeg2CodecLevel) to set the MPEG-2 level for the video output.
	CodecLevel *string `locationName:"codecLevel" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2CodecLevel"`

	// Use Profile (Mpeg2CodecProfile) to set the MPEG-2 profile for the video output.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2CodecProfile"`

	// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
	// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
	// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
	// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
	// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
	DynamicSubGop *string `locationName:"dynamicSubGop" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2DynamicSubGop"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2FramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// Frame rate denominator.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Frame rate numerator - frame rate is a fraction, e.g. 24000 / 1001 = 23.976
	// fps.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"24" type:"integer"`

	// Frequency of closed GOPs. In streaming applications, it is recommended that
	// this be set to 1 so a decoder joining mid-stream will receive an IDR frame
	// as quickly as possible. Setting this value to 0 will break output segmenting.
	GopClosedCadence *int64 `locationName:"gopClosedCadence" type:"integer"`

	// GOP Length (keyframe interval) in frames or seconds. Must be greater than
	// zero.
	GopSize *float64 `locationName:"gopSize" type:"double"`

	// Indicates if the GOP Size in MPEG2 is specified in frames or seconds. If
	// seconds the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
	GopSizeUnits *string `locationName:"gopSizeUnits" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2GopSizeUnits"`

	// Percentage of the buffer that should initially be filled (HRD buffer model).
	HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferInitialFillPercentage" type:"integer"`

	// Size of buffer (HRD buffer model) in bits. For example, enter five megabits
	// as 5000000.
	HrdBufferSize *int64 `locationName:"hrdBufferSize" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
	// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
	// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
	// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
	// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2InterlaceMode"`

	// Use Intra DC precision (Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision) to set quantization precision
	// for intra-block DC coefficients. If you choose the value auto, the service
	// will automatically select the precision based on the per-frame compression
	// ratio.
	IntraDcPrecision *string `locationName:"intraDcPrecision" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision"`

	// Maximum bitrate in bits/second. For example, enter five megabits per second
	// as 5000000.
	MaxBitrate *int64 `locationName:"maxBitrate" min:"1000" type:"integer"`

	// Enforces separation between repeated (cadence) I-frames and I-frames inserted
	// by Scene Change Detection. If a scene change I-frame is within I-interval
	// frames of a cadence I-frame, the GOP is shrunk and/or stretched to the scene
	// change I-frame. GOP stretch requires enabling lookahead as well as setting
	// I-interval. The normal cadence resumes for the next GOP. This setting is
	// only used when Scene Change Detect is enabled. Note: Maximum GOP stretch
	// = GOP size + Min-I-interval - 1
	MinIInterval *int64 `locationName:"minIInterval" type:"integer"`

	// Number of B-frames between reference frames.
	NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames *int64 `locationName:"numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames" type:"integer"`

	// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
	// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
	// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2ParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Quality tuning level (Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
	// use single-pass or multipass video encoding.
	QualityTuningLevel *string `locationName:"qualityTuningLevel" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel"`

	// Use Rate control mode (Mpeg2RateControlMode) to specifiy whether the bitrate
	// is variable (vbr) or constant (cbr).
	RateControlMode *string `locationName:"rateControlMode" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2RateControlMode"`

	// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
	SceneChangeDetect *string `locationName:"sceneChangeDetect" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2SceneChangeDetect"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2SlowPal"`

	// Softness. Selects quantizer matrix, larger values reduce high-frequency content
	// in the encoded image.
	Softness *int64 `locationName:"softness" type:"integer"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
	// complexity.
	SpatialAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"spatialAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantization"`

	// Produces a Type D-10 compatible bitstream (SMPTE 356M-2001).
	Syntax *string `locationName:"syntax" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2Syntax"`

	// Only use Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to 29.970.
	// Set Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i output from
	// a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output and leave
	// converstion to the player.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2Telecine"`

	// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
	// complexity.
	TemporalAdaptiveQuantization *string `locationName:"temporalAdaptiveQuantization" type:"string" enum:"Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantization"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Mpeg2Settings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Mpeg2Settings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "Mpeg2Settings"}
	if s.Bitrate != nil && *s.Bitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Bitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.FramerateDenominator != nil && *s.FramerateDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.FramerateNumerator != nil && *s.FramerateNumerator < 24 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateNumerator", 24))
	}
	if s.MaxBitrate != nil && *s.MaxBitrate < 1000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("MaxBitrate", 1000))
	}
	if s.ParDenominator != nil && *s.ParDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.ParNumerator != nil && *s.ParNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParNumerator", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAdaptiveQuantization sets the AdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.AdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetBitrate sets the Bitrate field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetBitrate(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.Bitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecLevel sets the CodecLevel field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetCodecLevel(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.CodecLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.CodecProfile = &v
	return s
}

// SetDynamicSubGop sets the DynamicSubGop field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetDynamicSubGop(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.DynamicSubGop = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.FramerateControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.FramerateConversionAlgorithm = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.FramerateDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.FramerateNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopClosedCadence sets the GopClosedCadence field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetGopClosedCadence(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.GopClosedCadence = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopSize sets the GopSize field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetGopSize(v float64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.GopSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetGopSizeUnits sets the GopSizeUnits field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetGopSizeUnits(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.GopSizeUnits = &v
	return s
}

// SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage sets the HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetHrdBufferInitialFillPercentage(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.HrdBufferInitialFillPercentage = &v
	return s
}

// SetHrdBufferSize sets the HrdBufferSize field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetHrdBufferSize(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.HrdBufferSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.InterlaceMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetIntraDcPrecision sets the IntraDcPrecision field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetIntraDcPrecision(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.IntraDcPrecision = &v
	return s
}

// SetMaxBitrate sets the MaxBitrate field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetMaxBitrate(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.MaxBitrate = &v
	return s
}

// SetMinIInterval sets the MinIInterval field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetMinIInterval(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.MinIInterval = &v
	return s
}

// SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames sets the NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetNumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.NumberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames = &v
	return s
}

// SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetParControl(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.ParControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.ParDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.ParNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetQualityTuningLevel sets the QualityTuningLevel field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetQualityTuningLevel(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.QualityTuningLevel = &v
	return s
}

// SetRateControlMode sets the RateControlMode field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetRateControlMode(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.RateControlMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetSceneChangeDetect sets the SceneChangeDetect field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSceneChangeDetect(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.SceneChangeDetect = &v
	return s
}

// SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSlowPal(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.SlowPal = &v
	return s
}

// SetSoftness sets the Softness field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSoftness(v int64) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.Softness = &v
	return s
}

// SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization sets the SpatialAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSpatialAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.SpatialAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// SetSyntax sets the Syntax field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetSyntax(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.Syntax = &v
	return s
}

// SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetTelecine(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.Telecine = &v
	return s
}

// SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization sets the TemporalAdaptiveQuantization field's value.
func (s *Mpeg2Settings) SetTemporalAdaptiveQuantization(v string) *Mpeg2Settings {
	s.TemporalAdaptiveQuantization = &v
	return s
}

// If you are using DRM, set DRM System (MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) to specify
// the value SpekeKeyProvider.
type MsSmoothEncryptionSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider
	SpekeKeyProvider *SpekeKeyProvider `locationName:"spekeKeyProvider" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetSpekeKeyProvider sets the SpekeKeyProvider field's value.
func (s *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) SetSpekeKeyProvider(v *SpekeKeyProvider) *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings {
	s.SpekeKeyProvider = v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
// MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS.
type MsSmoothGroupSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// COMBINE_DUPLICATE_STREAMS combines identical audio encoding settings across
	// a Microsoft Smooth output group into a single audio stream.
	AudioDeduplication *string `locationName:"audioDeduplication" type:"string" enum:"MsSmoothAudioDeduplication"`

	// Use Destination (Destination) to specify the S3 output location and the output
	// filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify
	// the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input
	// file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the
	// first input file.
	Destination *string `locationName:"destination" type:"string"`

	// If you are using DRM, set DRM System (MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) to specify
	// the value SpekeKeyProvider.
	Encryption *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings `locationName:"encryption" type:"structure"`

	// Use Fragment length (FragmentLength) to specify the mp4 fragment sizes in
	// seconds. Fragment length must be compatible with GOP size and frame rate.
	FragmentLength *int64 `locationName:"fragmentLength" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Manifest encoding (MsSmoothManifestEncoding) to specify the encoding
	// format for the server and client manifest. Valid options are utf8 and utf16.
	ManifestEncoding *string `locationName:"manifestEncoding" type:"string" enum:"MsSmoothManifestEncoding"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s MsSmoothGroupSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s MsSmoothGroupSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "MsSmoothGroupSettings"}
	if s.FragmentLength != nil && *s.FragmentLength < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FragmentLength", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioDeduplication sets the AudioDeduplication field's value.
func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetAudioDeduplication(v string) *MsSmoothGroupSettings {
	s.AudioDeduplication = &v
	return s
}

// SetDestination sets the Destination field's value.
func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetDestination(v string) *MsSmoothGroupSettings {
	s.Destination = &v
	return s
}

// SetEncryption sets the Encryption field's value.
func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetEncryption(v *MsSmoothEncryptionSettings) *MsSmoothGroupSettings {
	s.Encryption = v
	return s
}

// SetFragmentLength sets the FragmentLength field's value.
func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetFragmentLength(v int64) *MsSmoothGroupSettings {
	s.FragmentLength = &v
	return s
}

// SetManifestEncoding sets the ManifestEncoding field's value.
func (s *MsSmoothGroupSettings) SetManifestEncoding(v string) *MsSmoothGroupSettings {
	s.ManifestEncoding = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for Nielsen Configuration
type NielsenConfiguration struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use Nielsen Configuration (NielsenConfiguration) to set the Nielsen measurement
	// system breakout code. Supported values are 0, 3, 7, and 9.
	BreakoutCode *int64 `locationName:"breakoutCode" type:"integer"`

	// Use Distributor ID (DistributorID) to specify the distributor ID that is
	// assigned to your organization by Neilsen.
	DistributorId *string `locationName:"distributorId" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s NielsenConfiguration) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s NielsenConfiguration) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetBreakoutCode sets the BreakoutCode field's value.
func (s *NielsenConfiguration) SetBreakoutCode(v int64) *NielsenConfiguration {
	s.BreakoutCode = &v
	return s
}

// SetDistributorId sets the DistributorId field's value.
func (s *NielsenConfiguration) SetDistributorId(v string) *NielsenConfiguration {
	s.DistributorId = &v
	return s
}

// Enable the Noise reducer (NoiseReducer) feature to remove noise from your
// video output if necessary. Enable or disable this feature for each output
// individually. This setting is disabled by default. When you enable Noise
// reducer (NoiseReducer), you must also select a value for Noise reducer filter
// (NoiseReducerFilter).
type NoiseReducer struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use Noise reducer filter (NoiseReducerFilter) to select one of the following
	// spatial image filtering functions. To use this setting, you must also enable
	// Noise reducer (NoiseReducer). * Bilateral is an edge preserving noise reduction
	// filter. * Mean (softest), Gaussian, Lanczos, and Sharpen (sharpest) are convolution
	// filters. * Conserve is a min/max noise reduction filter. * Spatial is a frequency-domain
	// filter based on JND principles.
	Filter *string `locationName:"filter" type:"string" enum:"NoiseReducerFilter"`

	// Settings for a noise reducer filter
	FilterSettings *NoiseReducerFilterSettings `locationName:"filterSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Noise reducer filter settings for spatial filter.
	SpatialFilterSettings *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings `locationName:"spatialFilterSettings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s NoiseReducer) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s NoiseReducer) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *NoiseReducer) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "NoiseReducer"}
	if s.SpatialFilterSettings != nil {
		if err := s.SpatialFilterSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("SpatialFilterSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetFilter sets the Filter field's value.
func (s *NoiseReducer) SetFilter(v string) *NoiseReducer {
	s.Filter = &v
	return s
}

// SetFilterSettings sets the FilterSettings field's value.
func (s *NoiseReducer) SetFilterSettings(v *NoiseReducerFilterSettings) *NoiseReducer {
	s.FilterSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetSpatialFilterSettings sets the SpatialFilterSettings field's value.
func (s *NoiseReducer) SetSpatialFilterSettings(v *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) *NoiseReducer {
	s.SpatialFilterSettings = v
	return s
}

// Settings for a noise reducer filter
type NoiseReducerFilterSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Relative strength of noise reducing filter. Higher values produce stronger
	// filtering.
	Strength *int64 `locationName:"strength" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s NoiseReducerFilterSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s NoiseReducerFilterSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetStrength sets the Strength field's value.
func (s *NoiseReducerFilterSettings) SetStrength(v int64) *NoiseReducerFilterSettings {
	s.Strength = &v
	return s
}

// Noise reducer filter settings for spatial filter.
type NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specify strength of post noise reduction sharpening filter, with 0 disabling
	// the filter and 3 enabling it at maximum strength.
	PostFilterSharpenStrength *int64 `locationName:"postFilterSharpenStrength" type:"integer"`

	// The speed of the filter, from -2 (lower speed) to 3 (higher speed), with
	// 0 being the nominal value.
	Speed *int64 `locationName:"speed" type:"integer"`

	// Relative strength of noise reducing filter. Higher values produce stronger
	// filtering.
	Strength *int64 `locationName:"strength" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings"}
	if s.Speed != nil && *s.Speed < -2 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Speed", -2))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetPostFilterSharpenStrength sets the PostFilterSharpenStrength field's value.
func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetPostFilterSharpenStrength(v int64) *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings {
	s.PostFilterSharpenStrength = &v
	return s
}

// SetSpeed sets the Speed field's value.
func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetSpeed(v int64) *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings {
	s.Speed = &v
	return s
}

// SetStrength sets the Strength field's value.
func (s *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings) SetStrength(v int64) *NoiseReducerSpatialFilterSettings {
	s.Strength = &v
	return s
}

// An output object describes the settings for a single output file or stream
// in an output group.
type Output struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// (AudioDescriptions) contains groups of audio encoding settings organized
	// by audio codec. Include one instance of (AudioDescriptions) per output. (AudioDescriptions)
	// can contain multiple groups of encoding settings.
	AudioDescriptions []*AudioDescription `locationName:"audioDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// (CaptionDescriptions) contains groups of captions settings. For each output
	// that has captions, include one instance of (CaptionDescriptions). (CaptionDescriptions)
	// can contain multiple groups of captions settings.
	CaptionDescriptions []*CaptionDescription `locationName:"captionDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// Container specific settings.
	ContainerSettings *ContainerSettings `locationName:"containerSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use Extension (Extension) to specify the file extension for outputs in File
	// output groups. If you do not specify a value, the service will use default
	// extensions by container type as follows * MPEG-2 transport stream, m2ts *
	// Quicktime, mov * MXF container, mxf * MPEG-4 container, mp4 * No Container,
	// the service will use codec extensions (e.g. AAC, H265, H265, AC3)
	Extension *string `locationName:"extension" type:"string"`

	// Use Name modifier (NameModifier) to have the service add a string to the
	// end of each output filename. You specify the base filename as part of your
	// destination URI. When you create multiple outputs in the same output group,
	// Name modifier (NameModifier) is required. Name modifier also accepts format
	// identifiers. For DASH ISO outputs, if you use the format identifiers $Number$
	// or $Time$ in one output, you must use them in the same way in all outputs
	// of the output group.
	NameModifier *string `locationName:"nameModifier" min:"1" type:"string"`

	// Specific settings for this type of output.
	OutputSettings *OutputSettings `locationName:"outputSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Use Preset (Preset) to specifiy a preset for your transcoding settings. Provide
	// the system or custom preset name. You can specify either Preset (Preset)
	// or Container settings (ContainerSettings), but not both.
	Preset *string `locationName:"preset" type:"string"`

	// (VideoDescription) contains a group of video encoding settings. The specific
	// video settings depend on the video codec you choose when you specify a value
	// for Video codec (codec). Include one instance of (VideoDescription) per output.
	VideoDescription *VideoDescription `locationName:"videoDescription" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Output) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Output) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *Output) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "Output"}
	if s.NameModifier != nil && len(*s.NameModifier) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("NameModifier", 1))
	}
	if s.AudioDescriptions != nil {
		for i, v := range s.AudioDescriptions {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "AudioDescriptions", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.CaptionDescriptions != nil {
		for i, v := range s.CaptionDescriptions {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "CaptionDescriptions", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.ContainerSettings != nil {
		if err := s.ContainerSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ContainerSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.VideoDescription != nil {
		if err := s.VideoDescription.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("VideoDescription", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioDescriptions sets the AudioDescriptions field's value.
func (s *Output) SetAudioDescriptions(v []*AudioDescription) *Output {
	s.AudioDescriptions = v
	return s
}

// SetCaptionDescriptions sets the CaptionDescriptions field's value.
func (s *Output) SetCaptionDescriptions(v []*CaptionDescription) *Output {
	s.CaptionDescriptions = v
	return s
}

// SetContainerSettings sets the ContainerSettings field's value.
func (s *Output) SetContainerSettings(v *ContainerSettings) *Output {
	s.ContainerSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetExtension sets the Extension field's value.
func (s *Output) SetExtension(v string) *Output {
	s.Extension = &v
	return s
}

// SetNameModifier sets the NameModifier field's value.
func (s *Output) SetNameModifier(v string) *Output {
	s.NameModifier = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutputSettings sets the OutputSettings field's value.
func (s *Output) SetOutputSettings(v *OutputSettings) *Output {
	s.OutputSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.
func (s *Output) SetPreset(v string) *Output {
	s.Preset = &v
	return s
}

// SetVideoDescription sets the VideoDescription field's value.
func (s *Output) SetVideoDescription(v *VideoDescription) *Output {
	s.VideoDescription = v
	return s
}

// OutputChannel mapping settings.
type OutputChannelMapping struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// List of input channels
	InputChannels []*int64 `locationName:"inputChannels" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s OutputChannelMapping) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s OutputChannelMapping) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetInputChannels sets the InputChannels field's value.
func (s *OutputChannelMapping) SetInputChannels(v []*int64) *OutputChannelMapping {
	s.InputChannels = v
	return s
}

// Details regarding output
type OutputDetail struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Duration in milliseconds
	DurationInMs *int64 `locationName:"durationInMs" type:"integer"`

	// Contains details about the output's video stream
	VideoDetails *VideoDetail `locationName:"videoDetails" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s OutputDetail) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s OutputDetail) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetDurationInMs sets the DurationInMs field's value.
func (s *OutputDetail) SetDurationInMs(v int64) *OutputDetail {
	s.DurationInMs = &v
	return s
}

// SetVideoDetails sets the VideoDetails field's value.
func (s *OutputDetail) SetVideoDetails(v *VideoDetail) *OutputDetail {
	s.VideoDetails = v
	return s
}

// Group of outputs
type OutputGroup struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use Custom Group Name (CustomName) to specify a name for the output group.
	// This value is displayed on the console and can make your job settings JSON
	// more human-readable. It does not affect your outputs. Use up to twelve characters
	// that are either letters, numbers, spaces, or underscores.
	CustomName *string `locationName:"customName" type:"string"`

	// Name of the output group
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string"`

	// Output Group settings, including type
	OutputGroupSettings *OutputGroupSettings `locationName:"outputGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// This object holds groups of encoding settings, one group of settings per
	// output.
	Outputs []*Output `locationName:"outputs" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s OutputGroup) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s OutputGroup) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *OutputGroup) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "OutputGroup"}
	if s.OutputGroupSettings != nil {
		if err := s.OutputGroupSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("OutputGroupSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Outputs != nil {
		for i, v := range s.Outputs {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "Outputs", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCustomName sets the CustomName field's value.
func (s *OutputGroup) SetCustomName(v string) *OutputGroup {
	s.CustomName = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *OutputGroup) SetName(v string) *OutputGroup {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetOutputGroupSettings sets the OutputGroupSettings field's value.
func (s *OutputGroup) SetOutputGroupSettings(v *OutputGroupSettings) *OutputGroup {
	s.OutputGroupSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetOutputs sets the Outputs field's value.
func (s *OutputGroup) SetOutputs(v []*Output) *OutputGroup {
	s.Outputs = v
	return s
}

// Contains details about the output groups specified in the job settings.
type OutputGroupDetail struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Details about the output
	OutputDetails []*OutputDetail `locationName:"outputDetails" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s OutputGroupDetail) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s OutputGroupDetail) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetOutputDetails sets the OutputDetails field's value.
func (s *OutputGroupDetail) SetOutputDetails(v []*OutputDetail) *OutputGroupDetail {
	s.OutputDetails = v
	return s
}

// Output Group settings, including type
type OutputGroupSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS. Each output in a CMAF Output Group may only contain
	// a single video, audio, or caption output.
	CmafGroupSettings *CmafGroupSettings `locationName:"cmafGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	DashIsoGroupSettings *DashIsoGroupSettings `locationName:"dashIsoGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	FileGroupSettings *FileGroupSettings `locationName:"fileGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	HlsGroupSettings *HlsGroupSettings `locationName:"hlsGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Type) under (OutputGroups)>(OutputGroupSettings) to
	// MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS.
	MsSmoothGroupSettings *MsSmoothGroupSettings `locationName:"msSmoothGroupSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Type of output group (File group, Apple HLS, DASH ISO, Microsoft Smooth Streaming,
	// CMAF)
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"OutputGroupType"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s OutputGroupSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s OutputGroupSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *OutputGroupSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "OutputGroupSettings"}
	if s.CmafGroupSettings != nil {
		if err := s.CmafGroupSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("CmafGroupSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.DashIsoGroupSettings != nil {
		if err := s.DashIsoGroupSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("DashIsoGroupSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.HlsGroupSettings != nil {
		if err := s.HlsGroupSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("HlsGroupSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.MsSmoothGroupSettings != nil {
		if err := s.MsSmoothGroupSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("MsSmoothGroupSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCmafGroupSettings sets the CmafGroupSettings field's value.
func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetCmafGroupSettings(v *CmafGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings {
	s.CmafGroupSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetDashIsoGroupSettings sets the DashIsoGroupSettings field's value.
func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetDashIsoGroupSettings(v *DashIsoGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings {
	s.DashIsoGroupSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetFileGroupSettings sets the FileGroupSettings field's value.
func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetFileGroupSettings(v *FileGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings {
	s.FileGroupSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetHlsGroupSettings sets the HlsGroupSettings field's value.
func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetHlsGroupSettings(v *HlsGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings {
	s.HlsGroupSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetMsSmoothGroupSettings sets the MsSmoothGroupSettings field's value.
func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetMsSmoothGroupSettings(v *MsSmoothGroupSettings) *OutputGroupSettings {
	s.MsSmoothGroupSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetType sets the Type field's value.
func (s *OutputGroupSettings) SetType(v string) *OutputGroupSettings {
	s.Type = &v
	return s
}

// Specific settings for this type of output.
type OutputSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Settings for HLS output groups
	HlsSettings *HlsSettings `locationName:"hlsSettings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s OutputSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s OutputSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetHlsSettings sets the HlsSettings field's value.
func (s *OutputSettings) SetHlsSettings(v *HlsSettings) *OutputSettings {
	s.HlsSettings = v
	return s
}

// A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that
// you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.
type Preset struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// An optional category you create to organize your presets.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for preset creation.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// An optional description you create for each preset.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds when the preset was last updated.
	LastUpdated *time.Time `locationName:"lastUpdated" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// A name you create for each preset. Each name must be unique within your account.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Settings for preset
	//
	// Settings is a required field
	Settings *PresetSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure" required:"true"`

	// A preset can be of two types: system or custom. System or built-in preset
	// can't be modified or deleted by the user.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"Type"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Preset) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Preset) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetArn(v string) *Preset {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetCategory(v string) *Preset {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *Preset {
	s.CreatedAt = &v
	return s
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetDescription(v string) *Preset {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetLastUpdated sets the LastUpdated field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetLastUpdated(v time.Time) *Preset {
	s.LastUpdated = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetName(v string) *Preset {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetSettings(v *PresetSettings) *Preset {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetType sets the Type field's value.
func (s *Preset) SetType(v string) *Preset {
	s.Type = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for preset
type PresetSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// (AudioDescriptions) contains groups of audio encoding settings organized
	// by audio codec. Include one instance of (AudioDescriptions) per output. (AudioDescriptions)
	// can contain multiple groups of encoding settings.
	AudioDescriptions []*AudioDescription `locationName:"audioDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// Caption settings for this preset. There can be multiple caption settings
	// in a single output.
	CaptionDescriptions []*CaptionDescriptionPreset `locationName:"captionDescriptions" type:"list"`

	// Container specific settings.
	ContainerSettings *ContainerSettings `locationName:"containerSettings" type:"structure"`

	// (VideoDescription) contains a group of video encoding settings. The specific
	// video settings depend on the video codec you choose when you specify a value
	// for Video codec (codec). Include one instance of (VideoDescription) per output.
	VideoDescription *VideoDescription `locationName:"videoDescription" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s PresetSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s PresetSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *PresetSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "PresetSettings"}
	if s.AudioDescriptions != nil {
		for i, v := range s.AudioDescriptions {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "AudioDescriptions", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.CaptionDescriptions != nil {
		for i, v := range s.CaptionDescriptions {
			if v == nil {
				continue
			}
			if err := v.Validate(); err != nil {
				invalidParams.AddNested(fmt.Sprintf("%s[%v]", "CaptionDescriptions", i), err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
			}
		}
	}
	if s.ContainerSettings != nil {
		if err := s.ContainerSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ContainerSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.VideoDescription != nil {
		if err := s.VideoDescription.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("VideoDescription", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAudioDescriptions sets the AudioDescriptions field's value.
func (s *PresetSettings) SetAudioDescriptions(v []*AudioDescription) *PresetSettings {
	s.AudioDescriptions = v
	return s
}

// SetCaptionDescriptions sets the CaptionDescriptions field's value.
func (s *PresetSettings) SetCaptionDescriptions(v []*CaptionDescriptionPreset) *PresetSettings {
	s.CaptionDescriptions = v
	return s
}

// SetContainerSettings sets the ContainerSettings field's value.
func (s *PresetSettings) SetContainerSettings(v *ContainerSettings) *PresetSettings {
	s.ContainerSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetVideoDescription sets the VideoDescription field's value.
func (s *PresetSettings) SetVideoDescription(v *VideoDescription) *PresetSettings {
	s.VideoDescription = v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value PRORES.
type ProresSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use Profile (ProResCodecProfile) to specifiy the type of Apple ProRes codec
	// to use for this output.
	CodecProfile *string `locationName:"codecProfile" type:"string" enum:"ProresCodecProfile"`

	// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
	// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
	// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
	// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
	// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
	// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
	// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
	// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
	// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
	// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
	// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
	FramerateControl *string `locationName:"framerateControl" type:"string" enum:"ProresFramerateControl"`

	// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
	FramerateConversionAlgorithm *string `locationName:"framerateConversionAlgorithm" type:"string" enum:"ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithm"`

	// Frame rate denominator.
	FramerateDenominator *int64 `locationName:"framerateDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// When you use the API for transcode jobs that use frame rate conversion, specify
	// the frame rate as a fraction. For example, 24000 / 1001 = 23.976 fps. Use
	// FramerateNumerator to specify the numerator of this fraction. In this example,
	// use 24000 for the value of FramerateNumerator.
	FramerateNumerator *int64 `locationName:"framerateNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
	// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
	// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
	// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
	// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
	// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
	// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
	// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
	// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
	// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
	// on which of the Follow options you chose.
	InterlaceMode *string `locationName:"interlaceMode" type:"string" enum:"ProresInterlaceMode"`

	// Use (ProresParControl) to specify how the service determines the pixel aspect
	// ratio. Set to Follow source (INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE) to use the pixel aspect
	// ratio from the input. To specify a different pixel aspect ratio: Using the
	// console, choose it from the dropdown menu. Using the API, set ProresParControl
	// to (SPECIFIED) and provide for (ParNumerator) and (ParDenominator).
	ParControl *string `locationName:"parControl" type:"string" enum:"ProresParControl"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio denominator.
	ParDenominator *int64 `locationName:"parDenominator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Pixel Aspect Ratio numerator.
	ParNumerator *int64 `locationName:"parNumerator" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
	// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
	SlowPal *string `locationName:"slowPal" type:"string" enum:"ProresSlowPal"`

	// Only use Telecine (ProresTelecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to
	// 29.970. Set Telecine (ProresTelecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i
	// output from a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output
	// and leave converstion to the player.
	Telecine *string `locationName:"telecine" type:"string" enum:"ProresTelecine"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ProresSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ProresSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ProresSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ProresSettings"}
	if s.FramerateDenominator != nil && *s.FramerateDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.FramerateNumerator != nil && *s.FramerateNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FramerateNumerator", 1))
	}
	if s.ParDenominator != nil && *s.ParDenominator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParDenominator", 1))
	}
	if s.ParNumerator != nil && *s.ParNumerator < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ParNumerator", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCodecProfile sets the CodecProfile field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetCodecProfile(v string) *ProresSettings {
	s.CodecProfile = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateControl sets the FramerateControl field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateControl(v string) *ProresSettings {
	s.FramerateControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm sets the FramerateConversionAlgorithm field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateConversionAlgorithm(v string) *ProresSettings {
	s.FramerateConversionAlgorithm = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateDenominator sets the FramerateDenominator field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateDenominator(v int64) *ProresSettings {
	s.FramerateDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetFramerateNumerator sets the FramerateNumerator field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetFramerateNumerator(v int64) *ProresSettings {
	s.FramerateNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetInterlaceMode sets the InterlaceMode field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetInterlaceMode(v string) *ProresSettings {
	s.InterlaceMode = &v
	return s
}

// SetParControl sets the ParControl field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetParControl(v string) *ProresSettings {
	s.ParControl = &v
	return s
}

// SetParDenominator sets the ParDenominator field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetParDenominator(v int64) *ProresSettings {
	s.ParDenominator = &v
	return s
}

// SetParNumerator sets the ParNumerator field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetParNumerator(v int64) *ProresSettings {
	s.ParNumerator = &v
	return s
}

// SetSlowPal sets the SlowPal field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetSlowPal(v string) *ProresSettings {
	s.SlowPal = &v
	return s
}

// SetTelecine sets the Telecine field's value.
func (s *ProresSettings) SetTelecine(v string) *ProresSettings {
	s.Telecine = &v
	return s
}

// You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS
// account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't
// specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For
// more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.
type Queue struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// An identifier for this resource that is unique within all of AWS.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when you created the queue.
	CreatedAt *time.Time `locationName:"createdAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// An optional description that you create for each queue.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when you most recently updated the queue.
	LastUpdated *time.Time `locationName:"lastUpdated" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// A name that you create for each queue. Each name must be unique within your
	// account.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Specifies whether the pricing plan for the queue is on-demand or reserved.
	// For on-demand, you pay per minute, billed in increments of .01 minute. For
	// reserved, you pay for the transcoding capacity of the entire queue, regardless
	// of how much or how little you use it. Reserved pricing requires a 12-month
	// commitment.
	PricingPlan *string `locationName:"pricingPlan" type:"string" enum:"PricingPlan"`

	// The estimated number of jobs with a PROGRESSING status.
	ProgressingJobsCount *int64 `locationName:"progressingJobsCount" type:"integer"`

	// Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved
	// queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.
	ReservationPlan *ReservationPlan `locationName:"reservationPlan" type:"structure"`

	// Queues can be ACTIVE or PAUSED. If you pause a queue, the service won't begin
	// processing jobs in that queue. Jobs that are running when you pause the queue
	// continue to run until they finish or result in an error.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"QueueStatus"`

	// The estimated number of jobs with a SUBMITTED status.
	SubmittedJobsCount *int64 `locationName:"submittedJobsCount" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies whether this on-demand queue is system or custom. System queues
	// are built in. You can't modify or delete system queues. You can create and
	// modify custom queues.
	Type *string `locationName:"type" type:"string" enum:"Type"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Queue) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Queue) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetArn(v string) *Queue {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// SetCreatedAt sets the CreatedAt field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetCreatedAt(v time.Time) *Queue {
	s.CreatedAt = &v
	return s
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetDescription(v string) *Queue {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetLastUpdated sets the LastUpdated field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetLastUpdated(v time.Time) *Queue {
	s.LastUpdated = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetName(v string) *Queue {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetPricingPlan sets the PricingPlan field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetPricingPlan(v string) *Queue {
	s.PricingPlan = &v
	return s
}

// SetProgressingJobsCount sets the ProgressingJobsCount field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetProgressingJobsCount(v int64) *Queue {
	s.ProgressingJobsCount = &v
	return s
}

// SetReservationPlan sets the ReservationPlan field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetReservationPlan(v *ReservationPlan) *Queue {
	s.ReservationPlan = v
	return s
}

// SetStatus sets the Status field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetStatus(v string) *Queue {
	s.Status = &v
	return s
}

// SetSubmittedJobsCount sets the SubmittedJobsCount field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetSubmittedJobsCount(v int64) *Queue {
	s.SubmittedJobsCount = &v
	return s
}

// SetType sets the Type field's value.
func (s *Queue) SetType(v string) *Queue {
	s.Type = &v
	return s
}

// Use Rectangle to identify a specific area of the video frame.
type Rectangle struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Height of rectangle in pixels. Specify only even numbers.
	Height *int64 `locationName:"height" min:"2" type:"integer"`

	// Width of rectangle in pixels. Specify only even numbers.
	Width *int64 `locationName:"width" min:"2" type:"integer"`

	// The distance, in pixels, between the rectangle and the left edge of the video
	// frame. Specify only even numbers.
	X *int64 `locationName:"x" type:"integer"`

	// The distance, in pixels, between the rectangle and the top edge of the video
	// frame. Specify only even numbers.
	Y *int64 `locationName:"y" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Rectangle) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Rectangle) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *Rectangle) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "Rectangle"}
	if s.Height != nil && *s.Height < 2 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Height", 2))
	}
	if s.Width != nil && *s.Width < 2 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Width", 2))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetHeight sets the Height field's value.
func (s *Rectangle) SetHeight(v int64) *Rectangle {
	s.Height = &v
	return s
}

// SetWidth sets the Width field's value.
func (s *Rectangle) SetWidth(v int64) *Rectangle {
	s.Width = &v
	return s
}

// SetX sets the X field's value.
func (s *Rectangle) SetX(v int64) *Rectangle {
	s.X = &v
	return s
}

// SetY sets the Y field's value.
func (s *Rectangle) SetY(v int64) *Rectangle {
	s.Y = &v
	return s
}

// Use Manual audio remixing (RemixSettings) to adjust audio levels for each
// audio channel in each output of your job. With audio remixing, you can output
// more or fewer audio channels than your input audio source provides.
type RemixSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Channel mapping (ChannelMapping) contains the group of fields that hold the
	// remixing value for each channel. Units are in dB. Acceptable values are within
	// the range from -60 (mute) through 6. A setting of 0 passes the input channel
	// unchanged to the output channel (no attenuation or amplification).
	ChannelMapping *ChannelMapping `locationName:"channelMapping" type:"structure"`

	// Specify the number of audio channels from your input that you want to use
	// in your output. With remixing, you might combine or split the data in these
	// channels, so the number of channels in your final output might be different.
	ChannelsIn *int64 `locationName:"channelsIn" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Specify the number of channels in this output after remixing. Valid values:
	// 1, 2, 4, 6, 8
	ChannelsOut *int64 `locationName:"channelsOut" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s RemixSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s RemixSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *RemixSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "RemixSettings"}
	if s.ChannelsIn != nil && *s.ChannelsIn < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ChannelsIn", 1))
	}
	if s.ChannelsOut != nil && *s.ChannelsOut < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ChannelsOut", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetChannelMapping sets the ChannelMapping field's value.
func (s *RemixSettings) SetChannelMapping(v *ChannelMapping) *RemixSettings {
	s.ChannelMapping = v
	return s
}

// SetChannelsIn sets the ChannelsIn field's value.
func (s *RemixSettings) SetChannelsIn(v int64) *RemixSettings {
	s.ChannelsIn = &v
	return s
}

// SetChannelsOut sets the ChannelsOut field's value.
func (s *RemixSettings) SetChannelsOut(v int64) *RemixSettings {
	s.ChannelsOut = &v
	return s
}

// Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved
// queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.
type ReservationPlan struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The length of the term of your reserved queue pricing plan commitment.
	Commitment *string `locationName:"commitment" type:"string" enum:"Commitment"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when the current pricing plan term for
	// this reserved queue expires.
	ExpiresAt *time.Time `locationName:"expiresAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// The timestamp in epoch seconds for when you set up the current pricing plan
	// for this reserved queue.
	PurchasedAt *time.Time `locationName:"purchasedAt" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// Specifies whether the term of your reserved queue pricing plan is automatically
	// extended (AUTO_RENEW) or expires (EXPIRE) at the end of the term.
	RenewalType *string `locationName:"renewalType" type:"string" enum:"RenewalType"`

	// Specifies the number of reserved transcode slots (RTS) for this queue. The
	// number of RTS determines how many jobs the queue can process in parallel;
	// each RTS can process one job at a time. When you increase this number, you
	// extend your existing commitment with a new 12-month commitment for a larger
	// number of RTS. The new commitment begins when you purchase the additional
	// capacity. You can't decrease the number of RTS in your reserved queue.
	ReservedSlots *int64 `locationName:"reservedSlots" type:"integer"`

	// Specifies whether the pricing plan for your reserved queue is ACTIVE or EXPIRED.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"ReservationPlanStatus"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ReservationPlan) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ReservationPlan) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetCommitment sets the Commitment field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlan) SetCommitment(v string) *ReservationPlan {
	s.Commitment = &v
	return s
}

// SetExpiresAt sets the ExpiresAt field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlan) SetExpiresAt(v time.Time) *ReservationPlan {
	s.ExpiresAt = &v
	return s
}

// SetPurchasedAt sets the PurchasedAt field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlan) SetPurchasedAt(v time.Time) *ReservationPlan {
	s.PurchasedAt = &v
	return s
}

// SetRenewalType sets the RenewalType field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlan) SetRenewalType(v string) *ReservationPlan {
	s.RenewalType = &v
	return s
}

// SetReservedSlots sets the ReservedSlots field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlan) SetReservedSlots(v int64) *ReservationPlan {
	s.ReservedSlots = &v
	return s
}

// SetStatus sets the Status field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlan) SetStatus(v string) *ReservationPlan {
	s.Status = &v
	return s
}

// Details about the pricing plan for your reserved queue. Required for reserved
// queues and not applicable to on-demand queues.
type ReservationPlanSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The length of the term of your reserved queue pricing plan commitment.
	//
	// Commitment is a required field
	Commitment *string `locationName:"commitment" type:"string" required:"true" enum:"Commitment"`

	// Specifies whether the term of your reserved queue pricing plan is automatically
	// extended (AUTO_RENEW) or expires (EXPIRE) at the end of the term. When your
	// term is auto renewed, you extend your commitment by 12 months from the auto
	// renew date. You can cancel this commitment.
	//
	// RenewalType is a required field
	RenewalType *string `locationName:"renewalType" type:"string" required:"true" enum:"RenewalType"`

	// Specifies the number of reserved transcode slots (RTS) for this queue. The
	// number of RTS determines how many jobs the queue can process in parallel;
	// each RTS can process one job at a time. You can't decrease the number of
	// RTS in your reserved queue. You can increase the number of RTS by extending
	// your existing commitment with a new 12-month commitment for the larger number.
	// The new commitment begins when you purchase the additional capacity. You
	// can't cancel your commitment or revert to your original commitment after
	// you increase the capacity.
	//
	// ReservedSlots is a required field
	ReservedSlots *int64 `locationName:"reservedSlots" type:"integer" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ReservationPlanSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ReservationPlanSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "ReservationPlanSettings"}
	if s.Commitment == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Commitment"))
	}
	if s.RenewalType == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("RenewalType"))
	}
	if s.ReservedSlots == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("ReservedSlots"))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCommitment sets the Commitment field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) SetCommitment(v string) *ReservationPlanSettings {
	s.Commitment = &v
	return s
}

// SetRenewalType sets the RenewalType field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) SetRenewalType(v string) *ReservationPlanSettings {
	s.RenewalType = &v
	return s
}

// SetReservedSlots sets the ReservedSlots field's value.
func (s *ReservationPlanSettings) SetReservedSlots(v int64) *ReservationPlanSettings {
	s.ReservedSlots = &v
	return s
}

// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) and tags for an AWS Elemental MediaConvert
// resource.
type ResourceTags struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource.
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string"`

	// The tags for the resource.
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s ResourceTags) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s ResourceTags) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *ResourceTags) SetArn(v string) *ResourceTags {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// SetTags sets the Tags field's value.
func (s *ResourceTags) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *ResourceTags {
	s.Tags = v
	return s
}

// Settings for SCC caption output.
type SccDestinationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Set Framerate (SccDestinationFramerate) to make sure that the captions and
	// the video are synchronized in the output. Specify a frame rate that matches
	// the frame rate of the associated video. If the video frame rate is 29.97,
	// choose 29.97 dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_DROPFRAME) only if the video has
	// video_insertion=true and drop_frame_timecode=true; otherwise, choose 29.97
	// non-dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_NON_DROPFRAME).
	Framerate *string `locationName:"framerate" type:"string" enum:"SccDestinationFramerate"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s SccDestinationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s SccDestinationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetFramerate sets the Framerate field's value.
func (s *SccDestinationSettings) SetFramerate(v string) *SccDestinationSettings {
	s.Framerate = &v
	return s
}

// Settings for use with a SPEKE key provider
type SpekeKeyProvider struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Optional AWS Certificate Manager ARN for a certificate to send to the keyprovider.
	// The certificate holds a key used by the keyprovider to encrypt the keys in
	// its response.
	CertificateArn *string `locationName:"certificateArn" type:"string"`

	// The SPEKE-compliant server uses Resource ID (ResourceId) to identify content.
	ResourceId *string `locationName:"resourceId" type:"string"`

	// Relates to SPEKE implementation. DRM system identifiers. DASH output groups
	// support a max of two system ids. Other group types support one system id.
	SystemIds []*string `locationName:"systemIds" type:"list"`

	// Use URL (Url) to specify the SPEKE-compliant server that will provide keys
	// for content.
	Url *string `locationName:"url" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s SpekeKeyProvider) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s SpekeKeyProvider) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetCertificateArn sets the CertificateArn field's value.
func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetCertificateArn(v string) *SpekeKeyProvider {
	s.CertificateArn = &v
	return s
}

// SetResourceId sets the ResourceId field's value.
func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetResourceId(v string) *SpekeKeyProvider {
	s.ResourceId = &v
	return s
}

// SetSystemIds sets the SystemIds field's value.
func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetSystemIds(v []*string) *SpekeKeyProvider {
	s.SystemIds = v
	return s
}

// SetUrl sets the Url field's value.
func (s *SpekeKeyProvider) SetUrl(v string) *SpekeKeyProvider {
	s.Url = &v
	return s
}

// Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
type StaticKeyProvider struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Relates to DRM implementation. Sets the value of the KEYFORMAT attribute.
	// Must be 'identity' or a reverse DNS string. May be omitted to indicate an
	// implicit value of 'identity'.
	KeyFormat *string `locationName:"keyFormat" type:"string"`

	// Relates to DRM implementation. Either a single positive integer version value
	// or a slash delimited list of version values (1/2/3).
	KeyFormatVersions *string `locationName:"keyFormatVersions" type:"string"`

	// Relates to DRM implementation. Use a 32-character hexidecimal string to specify
	// Key Value (StaticKeyValue).
	StaticKeyValue *string `locationName:"staticKeyValue" type:"string"`

	// Relates to DRM implementation. The location of the license server used for
	// protecting content.
	Url *string `locationName:"url" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s StaticKeyProvider) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s StaticKeyProvider) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetKeyFormat sets the KeyFormat field's value.
func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetKeyFormat(v string) *StaticKeyProvider {
	s.KeyFormat = &v
	return s
}

// SetKeyFormatVersions sets the KeyFormatVersions field's value.
func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetKeyFormatVersions(v string) *StaticKeyProvider {
	s.KeyFormatVersions = &v
	return s
}

// SetStaticKeyValue sets the StaticKeyValue field's value.
func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetStaticKeyValue(v string) *StaticKeyProvider {
	s.StaticKeyValue = &v
	return s
}

// SetUrl sets the Url field's value.
func (s *StaticKeyProvider) SetUrl(v string) *StaticKeyProvider {
	s.Url = &v
	return s
}

// To add tags to a queue, preset, or job template, send a request with the
// Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource and the tags that you want to
// add.
type TagResourceInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to tag. To get
	// the ARN, send a GET request with the resource name.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The tags that you want to add to the resource. You can tag resources with
	// a key-value pair or with only a key.
	//
	// Tags is a required field
	Tags map[string]*string `locationName:"tags" type:"map" required:"true"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TagResourceInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TagResourceInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *TagResourceInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "TagResourceInput"}
	if s.Arn == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Arn"))
	}
	if s.Tags == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Tags"))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *TagResourceInput) SetArn(v string) *TagResourceInput {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// SetTags sets the Tags field's value.
func (s *TagResourceInput) SetTags(v map[string]*string) *TagResourceInput {
	s.Tags = v
	return s
}

// A successful request to add tags to a resource returns an OK message.
type TagResourceOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TagResourceOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TagResourceOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Settings for Teletext caption output
type TeletextDestinationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Set pageNumber to the Teletext page number for the destination captions for
	// this output. This value must be a three-digit hexadecimal string; strings
	// ending in -FF are invalid. If you are passing through the entire set of Teletext
	// data, do not use this field.
	PageNumber *string `locationName:"pageNumber" min:"3" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TeletextDestinationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TeletextDestinationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *TeletextDestinationSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "TeletextDestinationSettings"}
	if s.PageNumber != nil && len(*s.PageNumber) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("PageNumber", 3))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetPageNumber sets the PageNumber field's value.
func (s *TeletextDestinationSettings) SetPageNumber(v string) *TeletextDestinationSettings {
	s.PageNumber = &v
	return s
}

// Settings specific to Teletext caption sources, including Page number.
type TeletextSourceSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use Page Number (PageNumber) to specify the three-digit hexadecimal page
	// number that will be used for Teletext captions. Do not use this setting if
	// you are passing through teletext from the input source to output.
	PageNumber *string `locationName:"pageNumber" min:"3" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TeletextSourceSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TeletextSourceSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *TeletextSourceSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "TeletextSourceSettings"}
	if s.PageNumber != nil && len(*s.PageNumber) < 3 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("PageNumber", 3))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetPageNumber sets the PageNumber field's value.
func (s *TeletextSourceSettings) SetPageNumber(v string) *TeletextSourceSettings {
	s.PageNumber = &v
	return s
}

// Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn)--Burns the output timecode and specified
// prefix into the output.
type TimecodeBurnin struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use Font Size (FontSize) to set the font size of any burned-in timecode.
	// Valid values are 10, 16, 32, 48.
	FontSize *int64 `locationName:"fontSize" min:"10" type:"integer"`

	// Use Position (Position) under under Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn) to
	// specify the location the burned-in timecode on output video.
	Position *string `locationName:"position" type:"string" enum:"TimecodeBurninPosition"`

	// Use Prefix (Prefix) to place ASCII characters before any burned-in timecode.
	// For example, a prefix of "EZ-" will result in the timecode "EZ-00:00:00:00".
	// Provide either the characters themselves or the ASCII code equivalents. The
	// supported range of characters is 0x20 through 0x7e. This includes letters,
	// numbers, and all special characters represented on a standard English keyboard.
	Prefix *string `locationName:"prefix" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TimecodeBurnin) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TimecodeBurnin) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *TimecodeBurnin) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "TimecodeBurnin"}
	if s.FontSize != nil && *s.FontSize < 10 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("FontSize", 10))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetFontSize sets the FontSize field's value.
func (s *TimecodeBurnin) SetFontSize(v int64) *TimecodeBurnin {
	s.FontSize = &v
	return s
}

// SetPosition sets the Position field's value.
func (s *TimecodeBurnin) SetPosition(v string) *TimecodeBurnin {
	s.Position = &v
	return s
}

// SetPrefix sets the Prefix field's value.
func (s *TimecodeBurnin) SetPrefix(v string) *TimecodeBurnin {
	s.Prefix = &v
	return s
}

// These settings control how the service handles timecodes throughout the job.
// These settings don't affect input clipping.
type TimecodeConfig struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If you use an editing platform that relies on an anchor timecode, use Anchor
	// Timecode (Anchor) to specify a timecode that will match the input video frame
	// to the output video frame. Use 24-hour format with frame number, (HH:MM:SS:FF)
	// or (HH:MM:SS;FF). This setting ignores frame rate conversion. System behavior
	// for Anchor Timecode varies depending on your setting for Source (TimecodeSource).
	// * If Source (TimecodeSource) is set to Specified Start (SPECIFIEDSTART),
	// the first input frame is the specified value in Start Timecode (Start). Anchor
	// Timecode (Anchor) and Start Timecode (Start) are used calculate output timecode.
	// * If Source (TimecodeSource) is set to Start at 0 (ZEROBASED) the first frame
	// is 00:00:00:00. * If Source (TimecodeSource) is set to Embedded (EMBEDDED),
	// the first frame is the timecode value on the first input frame of the input.
	Anchor *string `locationName:"anchor" type:"string"`

	// Use Source (TimecodeSource) to set how timecodes are handled within this
	// job. To make sure that your video, audio, captions, and markers are synchronized
	// and that time-based features, such as image inserter, work correctly, choose
	// the Timecode source option that matches your assets. All timecodes are in
	// a 24-hour format with frame number (HH:MM:SS:FF). * Embedded (EMBEDDED) -
	// Use the timecode that is in the input video. If no embedded timecode is in
	// the source, the service will use Start at 0 (ZEROBASED) instead. * Start
	// at 0 (ZEROBASED) - Set the timecode of the initial frame to 00:00:00:00.
	// * Specified Start (SPECIFIEDSTART) - Set the timecode of the initial frame
	// to a value other than zero. You use Start timecode (Start) to provide this
	// value.
	Source *string `locationName:"source" type:"string" enum:"TimecodeSource"`

	// Only use when you set Source (TimecodeSource) to Specified start (SPECIFIEDSTART).
	// Use Start timecode (Start) to specify the timecode for the initial frame.
	// Use 24-hour format with frame number, (HH:MM:SS:FF) or (HH:MM:SS;FF).
	Start *string `locationName:"start" type:"string"`

	// Only applies to outputs that support program-date-time stamp. Use Timestamp
	// offset (TimestampOffset) to overwrite the timecode date without affecting
	// the time and frame number. Provide the new date as a string in the format
	// "yyyy-mm-dd". To use Time stamp offset, you must also enable Insert program-date-time
	// (InsertProgramDateTime) in the output settings. For example, if the date
	// part of your timecodes is 2002-1-25 and you want to change it to one year
	// later, set Timestamp offset (TimestampOffset) to 2003-1-25.
	TimestampOffset *string `locationName:"timestampOffset" type:"string"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TimecodeConfig) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TimecodeConfig) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetAnchor sets the Anchor field's value.
func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetAnchor(v string) *TimecodeConfig {
	s.Anchor = &v
	return s
}

// SetSource sets the Source field's value.
func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetSource(v string) *TimecodeConfig {
	s.Source = &v
	return s
}

// SetStart sets the Start field's value.
func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetStart(v string) *TimecodeConfig {
	s.Start = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimestampOffset sets the TimestampOffset field's value.
func (s *TimecodeConfig) SetTimestampOffset(v string) *TimecodeConfig {
	s.TimestampOffset = &v
	return s
}

// Enable Timed metadata insertion (TimedMetadataInsertion) to include ID3 tags
// in your job. To include timed metadata, you must enable it here, enable it
// in each output container, and specify tags and timecodes in ID3 insertion
// (Id3Insertion) objects.
type TimedMetadataInsertion struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Id3Insertions contains the array of Id3Insertion instances.
	Id3Insertions []*Id3Insertion `locationName:"id3Insertions" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TimedMetadataInsertion) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TimedMetadataInsertion) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetId3Insertions sets the Id3Insertions field's value.
func (s *TimedMetadataInsertion) SetId3Insertions(v []*Id3Insertion) *TimedMetadataInsertion {
	s.Id3Insertions = v
	return s
}

// Information about when jobs are submitted, started, and finished is specified
// in Unix epoch format in seconds.
type Timing struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The time, in Unix epoch format, that the transcoding job finished
	FinishTime *time.Time `locationName:"finishTime" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// The time, in Unix epoch format, that transcoding for the job began.
	StartTime *time.Time `locationName:"startTime" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`

	// The time, in Unix epoch format, that you submitted the job.
	SubmitTime *time.Time `locationName:"submitTime" type:"timestamp" timestampFormat:"unixTimestamp"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s Timing) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s Timing) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetFinishTime sets the FinishTime field's value.
func (s *Timing) SetFinishTime(v time.Time) *Timing {
	s.FinishTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetStartTime sets the StartTime field's value.
func (s *Timing) SetStartTime(v time.Time) *Timing {
	s.StartTime = &v
	return s
}

// SetSubmitTime sets the SubmitTime field's value.
func (s *Timing) SetSubmitTime(v time.Time) *Timing {
	s.SubmitTime = &v
	return s
}

// Settings specific to caption sources that are specfied by track number. Sources
// include IMSC in IMF.
type TrackSourceSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Use this setting to select a single captions track from a source. Track numbers
	// correspond to the order in the captions source file. For IMF sources, track
	// numbering is based on the order that the captions appear in the CPL. For
	// example, use 1 to select the captions asset that is listed first in the CPL.
	// To include more than one captions track in your job outputs, create multiple
	// input captions selectors. Specify one track per selector.
	TrackNumber *int64 `locationName:"trackNumber" min:"1" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TrackSourceSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TrackSourceSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *TrackSourceSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "TrackSourceSettings"}
	if s.TrackNumber != nil && *s.TrackNumber < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("TrackNumber", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetTrackNumber sets the TrackNumber field's value.
func (s *TrackSourceSettings) SetTrackNumber(v int64) *TrackSourceSettings {
	s.TrackNumber = &v
	return s
}

// Settings specific to TTML caption outputs, including Pass style information
// (TtmlStylePassthrough).
type TtmlDestinationSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Pass through style and position information from a TTML-like input source
	// (TTML, SMPTE-TT, CFF-TT) to the CFF-TT output or TTML output.
	StylePassthrough *string `locationName:"stylePassthrough" type:"string" enum:"TtmlStylePassthrough"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s TtmlDestinationSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s TtmlDestinationSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetStylePassthrough sets the StylePassthrough field's value.
func (s *TtmlDestinationSettings) SetStylePassthrough(v string) *TtmlDestinationSettings {
	s.StylePassthrough = &v
	return s
}

// To remove tags from a resource, send a request with the Amazon Resource Name
// (ARN) of the resource and the keys of the tags that you want to remove.
type UntagResourceInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to remove tags
	// from. To get the ARN, send a GET request with the resource name.
	//
	// Arn is a required field
	Arn *string `location:"uri" locationName:"arn" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The keys of the tags that you want to remove from the resource.
	TagKeys []*string `locationName:"tagKeys" type:"list"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UntagResourceInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UntagResourceInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *UntagResourceInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "UntagResourceInput"}
	if s.Arn == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Arn"))
	}
	if s.Arn != nil && len(*s.Arn) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Arn", 1))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetArn sets the Arn field's value.
func (s *UntagResourceInput) SetArn(v string) *UntagResourceInput {
	s.Arn = &v
	return s
}

// SetTagKeys sets the TagKeys field's value.
func (s *UntagResourceInput) SetTagKeys(v []*string) *UntagResourceInput {
	s.TagKeys = v
	return s
}

// A successful request to remove tags from a resource returns an OK message.
type UntagResourceOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UntagResourceOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UntagResourceOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Modify a job template by sending a request with the job template name and
// any of the following that you wish to change: description, category, and
// queue.
type UpdateJobTemplateInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// This is a beta feature. If you are interested in using this feature, please
	// contact AWS customer support.
	AccelerationSettings *AccelerationSettings `locationName:"accelerationSettings" type:"structure"`

	// The new category for the job template, if you are changing it.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The new description for the job template, if you are changing it.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the job template you are modifying
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The new queue for the job template, if you are changing it.
	Queue *string `locationName:"queue" type:"string"`

	// JobTemplateSettings contains all the transcode settings saved in the template
	// that will be applied to jobs created from it.
	Settings *JobTemplateSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure"`

	// Specify how often MediaConvert sends STATUS_UPDATE events to Amazon CloudWatch
	// Events. Set the interval, in seconds, between status updates. MediaConvert
	// sends an update at this interval from the time the service begins processing
	// your job to the time it completes the transcode or encounters an error.
	StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs *int64 `locationName:"statusUpdateIntervalInSecs" min:"10" type:"long"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UpdateJobTemplateInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UpdateJobTemplateInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "UpdateJobTemplateInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}
	if s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs != nil && *s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs < 10 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs", 10))
	}
	if s.AccelerationSettings != nil {
		if err := s.AccelerationSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("AccelerationSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAccelerationSettings sets the AccelerationSettings field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetAccelerationSettings(v *AccelerationSettings) *UpdateJobTemplateInput {
	s.AccelerationSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetCategory(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetDescription(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetName(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetQueue(v string) *UpdateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Queue = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetSettings(v *JobTemplateSettings) *UpdateJobTemplateInput {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs sets the StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateInput) SetStatusUpdateIntervalInSecs(v int64) *UpdateJobTemplateInput {
	s.StatusUpdateIntervalInSecs = &v
	return s
}

// Successful update job template requests will return the new job template
// JSON.
type UpdateJobTemplateOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A job template is a pre-made set of encoding instructions that you can use
	// to quickly create a job.
	JobTemplate *JobTemplate `locationName:"jobTemplate" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UpdateJobTemplateOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UpdateJobTemplateOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetJobTemplate sets the JobTemplate field's value.
func (s *UpdateJobTemplateOutput) SetJobTemplate(v *JobTemplate) *UpdateJobTemplateOutput {
	s.JobTemplate = v
	return s
}

// Modify a preset by sending a request with the preset name and any of the
// following that you wish to change: description, category, and transcoding
// settings.
type UpdatePresetInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The new category for the preset, if you are changing it.
	Category *string `locationName:"category" type:"string"`

	// The new description for the preset, if you are changing it.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the preset you are modifying.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// Settings for preset
	Settings *PresetSettings `locationName:"settings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UpdatePresetInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UpdatePresetInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *UpdatePresetInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "UpdatePresetInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}
	if s.Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCategory sets the Category field's value.
func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetCategory(v string) *UpdatePresetInput {
	s.Category = &v
	return s
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetDescription(v string) *UpdatePresetInput {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetName(v string) *UpdatePresetInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetSettings sets the Settings field's value.
func (s *UpdatePresetInput) SetSettings(v *PresetSettings) *UpdatePresetInput {
	s.Settings = v
	return s
}

// Successful update preset requests will return the new preset JSON.
type UpdatePresetOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// A preset is a collection of preconfigured media conversion settings that
	// you want MediaConvert to apply to the output during the conversion process.
	Preset *Preset `locationName:"preset" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UpdatePresetOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UpdatePresetOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetPreset sets the Preset field's value.
func (s *UpdatePresetOutput) SetPreset(v *Preset) *UpdatePresetOutput {
	s.Preset = v
	return s
}

// Modify a queue by sending a request with the queue name and any changes to
// the queue.
type UpdateQueueInput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// The new description for the queue, if you are changing it.
	Description *string `locationName:"description" type:"string"`

	// The name of the queue that you are modifying.
	//
	// Name is a required field
	Name *string `location:"uri" locationName:"name" type:"string" required:"true"`

	// The new details of your pricing plan for your reserved queue. When you set
	// up a new pricing plan to replace an expired one, you enter into another 12-month
	// commitment. When you add capacity to your queue by increasing the number
	// of RTS, you extend the term of your commitment to 12 months from when you
	// add capacity. After you make these commitments, you can't cancel them.
	ReservationPlanSettings *ReservationPlanSettings `locationName:"reservationPlanSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Pause or activate a queue by changing its status between ACTIVE and PAUSED.
	// If you pause a queue, jobs in that queue won't begin. Jobs that are running
	// when you pause the queue continue to run until they finish or result in an
	// error.
	Status *string `locationName:"status" type:"string" enum:"QueueStatus"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UpdateQueueInput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UpdateQueueInput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *UpdateQueueInput) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "UpdateQueueInput"}
	if s.Name == nil {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamRequired("Name"))
	}
	if s.Name != nil && len(*s.Name) < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinLen("Name", 1))
	}
	if s.ReservationPlanSettings != nil {
		if err := s.ReservationPlanSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ReservationPlanSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetDescription sets the Description field's value.
func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetDescription(v string) *UpdateQueueInput {
	s.Description = &v
	return s
}

// SetName sets the Name field's value.
func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetName(v string) *UpdateQueueInput {
	s.Name = &v
	return s
}

// SetReservationPlanSettings sets the ReservationPlanSettings field's value.
func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetReservationPlanSettings(v *ReservationPlanSettings) *UpdateQueueInput {
	s.ReservationPlanSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetStatus sets the Status field's value.
func (s *UpdateQueueInput) SetStatus(v string) *UpdateQueueInput {
	s.Status = &v
	return s
}

// Successful update queue requests return the new queue information in JSON
// format.
type UpdateQueueOutput struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// You can use queues to manage the resources that are available to your AWS
	// account for running multiple transcoding jobs at the same time. If you don't
	// specify a queue, the service sends all jobs through the default queue. For
	// more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/working-with-queues.html.
	Queue *Queue `locationName:"queue" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s UpdateQueueOutput) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s UpdateQueueOutput) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetQueue sets the Queue field's value.
func (s *UpdateQueueOutput) SetQueue(v *Queue) *UpdateQueueOutput {
	s.Queue = v
	return s
}

// Video codec settings, (CodecSettings) under (VideoDescription), contains
// the group of settings related to video encoding. The settings in this group
// vary depending on the value you choose for Video codec (Codec). For each
// codec enum you choose, define the corresponding settings object. The following
// lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * H_264, H264Settings * H_265,
// H265Settings * MPEG2, Mpeg2Settings * PRORES, ProresSettings * FRAME_CAPTURE,
// FrameCaptureSettings
type VideoCodecSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specifies the video codec. This must be equal to one of the enum values defined
	// by the object VideoCodec.
	Codec *string `locationName:"codec" type:"string" enum:"VideoCodec"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value FRAME_CAPTURE.
	FrameCaptureSettings *FrameCaptureSettings `locationName:"frameCaptureSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value H_264.
	H264Settings *H264Settings `locationName:"h264Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Settings for H265 codec
	H265Settings *H265Settings `locationName:"h265Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value MPEG2.
	Mpeg2Settings *Mpeg2Settings `locationName:"mpeg2Settings" type:"structure"`

	// Required when you set (Codec) under (VideoDescription)>(CodecSettings) to
	// the value PRORES.
	ProresSettings *ProresSettings `locationName:"proresSettings" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s VideoCodecSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s VideoCodecSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *VideoCodecSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "VideoCodecSettings"}
	if s.FrameCaptureSettings != nil {
		if err := s.FrameCaptureSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("FrameCaptureSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.H264Settings != nil {
		if err := s.H264Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("H264Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.H265Settings != nil {
		if err := s.H265Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("H265Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Mpeg2Settings != nil {
		if err := s.Mpeg2Settings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Mpeg2Settings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.ProresSettings != nil {
		if err := s.ProresSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ProresSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetCodec sets the Codec field's value.
func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetCodec(v string) *VideoCodecSettings {
	s.Codec = &v
	return s
}

// SetFrameCaptureSettings sets the FrameCaptureSettings field's value.
func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetFrameCaptureSettings(v *FrameCaptureSettings) *VideoCodecSettings {
	s.FrameCaptureSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetH264Settings sets the H264Settings field's value.
func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetH264Settings(v *H264Settings) *VideoCodecSettings {
	s.H264Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetH265Settings sets the H265Settings field's value.
func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetH265Settings(v *H265Settings) *VideoCodecSettings {
	s.H265Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetMpeg2Settings sets the Mpeg2Settings field's value.
func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetMpeg2Settings(v *Mpeg2Settings) *VideoCodecSettings {
	s.Mpeg2Settings = v
	return s
}

// SetProresSettings sets the ProresSettings field's value.
func (s *VideoCodecSettings) SetProresSettings(v *ProresSettings) *VideoCodecSettings {
	s.ProresSettings = v
	return s
}

// Settings for video outputs
type VideoDescription struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// This setting only applies to H.264, H.265, and MPEG2 outputs. Use Insert
	// AFD signaling (AfdSignaling) to specify whether the service includes AFD
	// values in the output video data and what those values are. * Choose None
	// to remove all AFD values from this output. * Choose Fixed to ignore input
	// AFD values and instead encode the value specified in the job. * Choose Auto
	// to calculate output AFD values based on the input AFD scaler data.
	AfdSignaling *string `locationName:"afdSignaling" type:"string" enum:"AfdSignaling"`

	// You no longer need to specify the anti-alias filter. It's now automatically
	// applied to all outputs. This property is deprecated.
	AntiAlias *string `locationName:"antiAlias" type:"string" enum:"AntiAlias"`

	// Video codec settings, (CodecSettings) under (VideoDescription), contains
	// the group of settings related to video encoding. The settings in this group
	// vary depending on the value you choose for Video codec (Codec). For each
	// codec enum you choose, define the corresponding settings object. The following
	// lists the codec enum, settings object pairs. * H_264, H264Settings * H_265,
	// H265Settings * MPEG2, Mpeg2Settings * PRORES, ProresSettings * FRAME_CAPTURE,
	// FrameCaptureSettings
	CodecSettings *VideoCodecSettings `locationName:"codecSettings" type:"structure"`

	// Enable Insert color metadata (ColorMetadata) to include color metadata in
	// this output. This setting is enabled by default.
	ColorMetadata *string `locationName:"colorMetadata" type:"string" enum:"ColorMetadata"`

	// Applies only if your input aspect ratio is different from your output aspect
	// ratio. Use Input cropping rectangle (Crop) to specify the video area the
	// service will include in the output. This will crop the input source, causing
	// video pixels to be removed on encode. If you crop your input frame size to
	// smaller than your output frame size, make sure to specify the behavior you
	// want in your output setting "Scaling behavior".
	Crop *Rectangle `locationName:"crop" type:"structure"`

	// Applies only to 29.97 fps outputs. When this feature is enabled, the service
	// will use drop-frame timecode on outputs. If it is not possible to use drop-frame
	// timecode, the system will fall back to non-drop-frame. This setting is enabled
	// by default when Timecode insertion (TimecodeInsertion) is enabled.
	DropFrameTimecode *string `locationName:"dropFrameTimecode" type:"string" enum:"DropFrameTimecode"`

	// Applies only if you set AFD Signaling(AfdSignaling) to Fixed (FIXED). Use
	// Fixed (FixedAfd) to specify a four-bit AFD value which the service will write
	// on all frames of this video output.
	FixedAfd *int64 `locationName:"fixedAfd" type:"integer"`

	// Use the Height (Height) setting to define the video resolution height for
	// this output. Specify in pixels. If you don't provide a value here, the service
	// will use the input height.
	Height *int64 `locationName:"height" min:"32" type:"integer"`

	// Use Position (Position) to point to a rectangle object to define your position.
	// This setting overrides any other aspect ratio.
	Position *Rectangle `locationName:"position" type:"structure"`

	// Use Respond to AFD (RespondToAfd) to specify how the service changes the
	// video itself in response to AFD values in the input. * Choose Respond to
	// clip the input video frame according to the AFD value, input display aspect
	// ratio, and output display aspect ratio. * Choose Passthrough to include the
	// input AFD values. Do not choose this when AfdSignaling is set to (NONE).
	// A preferred implementation of this workflow is to set RespondToAfd to (NONE)
	// and set AfdSignaling to (AUTO). * Choose None to remove all input AFD values
	// from this output.
	RespondToAfd *string `locationName:"respondToAfd" type:"string" enum:"RespondToAfd"`

	// Applies only if your input aspect ratio is different from your output aspect
	// ratio. Choose "Stretch to output" to have the service stretch your video
	// image to fit. Keep the setting "Default" to allow the service to letterbox
	// your video instead. This setting overrides any positioning value you specify
	// elsewhere in the job.
	ScalingBehavior *string `locationName:"scalingBehavior" type:"string" enum:"ScalingBehavior"`

	// Use Sharpness (Sharpness) setting to specify the strength of anti-aliasing.
	// This setting changes the width of the anti-alias filter kernel used for scaling.
	// Sharpness only applies if your output resolution is different from your input
	// resolution. 0 is the softest setting, 100 the sharpest, and 50 recommended
	// for most content.
	Sharpness *int64 `locationName:"sharpness" type:"integer"`

	// Applies only to H.264, H.265, MPEG2, and ProRes outputs. Only enable Timecode
	// insertion when the input frame rate is identical to the output frame rate.
	// To include timecodes in this output, set Timecode insertion (VideoTimecodeInsertion)
	// to PIC_TIMING_SEI. To leave them out, set it to DISABLED. Default is DISABLED.
	// When the service inserts timecodes in an output, by default, it uses any
	// embedded timecodes from the input. If none are present, the service will
	// set the timecode for the first output frame to zero. To change this default
	// behavior, adjust the settings under Timecode configuration (TimecodeConfig).
	// In the console, these settings are located under Job > Job settings > Timecode
	// configuration. Note - Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource)
	// does not affect the timecodes that are inserted in the output. Source under
	// Job settings > Timecode configuration (TimecodeSource) does.
	TimecodeInsertion *string `locationName:"timecodeInsertion" type:"string" enum:"VideoTimecodeInsertion"`

	// Find additional transcoding features under Preprocessors (VideoPreprocessors).
	// Enable the features at each output individually. These features are disabled
	// by default.
	VideoPreprocessors *VideoPreprocessor `locationName:"videoPreprocessors" type:"structure"`

	// Use Width (Width) to define the video resolution width, in pixels, for this
	// output. If you don't provide a value here, the service will use the input
	// width.
	Width *int64 `locationName:"width" min:"32" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s VideoDescription) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s VideoDescription) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *VideoDescription) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "VideoDescription"}
	if s.Height != nil && *s.Height < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Height", 32))
	}
	if s.Width != nil && *s.Width < 32 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Width", 32))
	}
	if s.CodecSettings != nil {
		if err := s.CodecSettings.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("CodecSettings", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Crop != nil {
		if err := s.Crop.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Crop", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.Position != nil {
		if err := s.Position.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("Position", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.VideoPreprocessors != nil {
		if err := s.VideoPreprocessors.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("VideoPreprocessors", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetAfdSignaling sets the AfdSignaling field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetAfdSignaling(v string) *VideoDescription {
	s.AfdSignaling = &v
	return s
}

// SetAntiAlias sets the AntiAlias field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetAntiAlias(v string) *VideoDescription {
	s.AntiAlias = &v
	return s
}

// SetCodecSettings sets the CodecSettings field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetCodecSettings(v *VideoCodecSettings) *VideoDescription {
	s.CodecSettings = v
	return s
}

// SetColorMetadata sets the ColorMetadata field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetColorMetadata(v string) *VideoDescription {
	s.ColorMetadata = &v
	return s
}

// SetCrop sets the Crop field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetCrop(v *Rectangle) *VideoDescription {
	s.Crop = v
	return s
}

// SetDropFrameTimecode sets the DropFrameTimecode field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetDropFrameTimecode(v string) *VideoDescription {
	s.DropFrameTimecode = &v
	return s
}

// SetFixedAfd sets the FixedAfd field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetFixedAfd(v int64) *VideoDescription {
	s.FixedAfd = &v
	return s
}

// SetHeight sets the Height field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetHeight(v int64) *VideoDescription {
	s.Height = &v
	return s
}

// SetPosition sets the Position field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetPosition(v *Rectangle) *VideoDescription {
	s.Position = v
	return s
}

// SetRespondToAfd sets the RespondToAfd field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetRespondToAfd(v string) *VideoDescription {
	s.RespondToAfd = &v
	return s
}

// SetScalingBehavior sets the ScalingBehavior field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetScalingBehavior(v string) *VideoDescription {
	s.ScalingBehavior = &v
	return s
}

// SetSharpness sets the Sharpness field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetSharpness(v int64) *VideoDescription {
	s.Sharpness = &v
	return s
}

// SetTimecodeInsertion sets the TimecodeInsertion field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetTimecodeInsertion(v string) *VideoDescription {
	s.TimecodeInsertion = &v
	return s
}

// SetVideoPreprocessors sets the VideoPreprocessors field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetVideoPreprocessors(v *VideoPreprocessor) *VideoDescription {
	s.VideoPreprocessors = v
	return s
}

// SetWidth sets the Width field's value.
func (s *VideoDescription) SetWidth(v int64) *VideoDescription {
	s.Width = &v
	return s
}

// Contains details about the output's video stream
type VideoDetail struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Height in pixels for the output
	HeightInPx *int64 `locationName:"heightInPx" type:"integer"`

	// Width in pixels for the output
	WidthInPx *int64 `locationName:"widthInPx" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s VideoDetail) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s VideoDetail) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// SetHeightInPx sets the HeightInPx field's value.
func (s *VideoDetail) SetHeightInPx(v int64) *VideoDetail {
	s.HeightInPx = &v
	return s
}

// SetWidthInPx sets the WidthInPx field's value.
func (s *VideoDetail) SetWidthInPx(v int64) *VideoDetail {
	s.WidthInPx = &v
	return s
}

// Find additional transcoding features under Preprocessors (VideoPreprocessors).
// Enable the features at each output individually. These features are disabled
// by default.
type VideoPreprocessor struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Enable the Color corrector (ColorCorrector) feature if necessary. Enable
	// or disable this feature for each output individually. This setting is disabled
	// by default.
	ColorCorrector *ColorCorrector `locationName:"colorCorrector" type:"structure"`

	// Use Deinterlacer (Deinterlacer) to produce smoother motion and a clearer
	// picture.
	Deinterlacer *Deinterlacer `locationName:"deinterlacer" type:"structure"`

	// Enable the Image inserter (ImageInserter) feature to include a graphic overlay
	// on your video. Enable or disable this feature for each output individually.
	// This setting is disabled by default.
	ImageInserter *ImageInserter `locationName:"imageInserter" type:"structure"`

	// Enable the Noise reducer (NoiseReducer) feature to remove noise from your
	// video output if necessary. Enable or disable this feature for each output
	// individually. This setting is disabled by default.
	NoiseReducer *NoiseReducer `locationName:"noiseReducer" type:"structure"`

	// Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn)--Burns the output timecode and specified
	// prefix into the output.
	TimecodeBurnin *TimecodeBurnin `locationName:"timecodeBurnin" type:"structure"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s VideoPreprocessor) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s VideoPreprocessor) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *VideoPreprocessor) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "VideoPreprocessor"}
	if s.ColorCorrector != nil {
		if err := s.ColorCorrector.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ColorCorrector", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.ImageInserter != nil {
		if err := s.ImageInserter.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("ImageInserter", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.NoiseReducer != nil {
		if err := s.NoiseReducer.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("NoiseReducer", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}
	if s.TimecodeBurnin != nil {
		if err := s.TimecodeBurnin.Validate(); err != nil {
			invalidParams.AddNested("TimecodeBurnin", err.(request.ErrInvalidParams))
		}
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetColorCorrector sets the ColorCorrector field's value.
func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetColorCorrector(v *ColorCorrector) *VideoPreprocessor {
	s.ColorCorrector = v
	return s
}

// SetDeinterlacer sets the Deinterlacer field's value.
func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetDeinterlacer(v *Deinterlacer) *VideoPreprocessor {
	s.Deinterlacer = v
	return s
}

// SetImageInserter sets the ImageInserter field's value.
func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetImageInserter(v *ImageInserter) *VideoPreprocessor {
	s.ImageInserter = v
	return s
}

// SetNoiseReducer sets the NoiseReducer field's value.
func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetNoiseReducer(v *NoiseReducer) *VideoPreprocessor {
	s.NoiseReducer = v
	return s
}

// SetTimecodeBurnin sets the TimecodeBurnin field's value.
func (s *VideoPreprocessor) SetTimecodeBurnin(v *TimecodeBurnin) *VideoPreprocessor {
	s.TimecodeBurnin = v
	return s
}

// Selector for video.
type VideoSelector struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// If your input video has accurate color space metadata, or if you don't know
	// about color space, leave this set to the default value FOLLOW. The service
	// will automatically detect your input color space. If your input video has
	// metadata indicating the wrong color space, or if your input video is missing
	// color space metadata that should be there, specify the accurate color space
	// here. If you choose HDR10, you can also correct inaccurate color space coefficients,
	// using the HDR master display information controls. You must also set Color
	// space usage (ColorSpaceUsage) to FORCE for the service to use these values.
	ColorSpace *string `locationName:"colorSpace" type:"string" enum:"ColorSpace"`

	// There are two sources for color metadata, the input file and the job configuration
	// (in the Color space and HDR master display informaiton settings). The Color
	// space usage setting controls which takes precedence. FORCE: The system will
	// use color metadata supplied by user, if any. If the user does not supply
	// color metadata, the system will use data from the source. FALLBACK: The system
	// will use color metadata from the source. If source has no color metadata,
	// the system will use user-supplied color metadata values if available.
	ColorSpaceUsage *string `locationName:"colorSpaceUsage" type:"string" enum:"ColorSpaceUsage"`

	// Use the "HDR master display information" (Hdr10Metadata) settings to correct
	// HDR metadata or to provide missing metadata. These values vary depending
	// on the input video and must be provided by a color grader. Range is 0 to
	// 50,000; each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note
	// that these settings are not color correction. Note that if you are creating
	// HDR outputs inside of an HLS CMAF package, to comply with the Apple specification,
	// you must use the following settings. Set "MP4 packaging type" (writeMp4PackagingType)
	// to HVC1 (HVC1). Set "Profile" (H265Settings > codecProfile) to Main10/High
	// (MAIN10_HIGH). Set "Level" (H265Settings > codecLevel) to 5 (LEVEL_5).
	Hdr10Metadata *Hdr10Metadata `locationName:"hdr10Metadata" type:"structure"`

	// Use PID (Pid) to select specific video data from an input file. Specify this
	// value as an integer; the system automatically converts it to the hexidecimal
	// value. For example, 257 selects PID 0x101. A PID, or packet identifier, is
	// an identifier for a set of data in an MPEG-2 transport stream container.
	Pid *int64 `locationName:"pid" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// Selects a specific program from within a multi-program transport stream.
	// Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported.
	ProgramNumber *int64 `locationName:"programNumber" type:"integer"`

	// Use Rotate (InputRotate) to specify how the service rotates your video. You
	// can choose automatic rotation or specify a rotation. You can specify a clockwise
	// rotation of 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. If your input video container is
	// .mov or .mp4 and your input has rotation metadata, you can choose Automatic
	// to have the service rotate your video according to the rotation specified
	// in the metadata. The rotation must be within one degree of 90, 180, or 270
	// degrees. If the rotation metadata specifies any other rotation, the service
	// will default to no rotation. By default, the service does no rotation, even
	// if your input video has rotation metadata. The service doesn't pass through
	// rotation metadata.
	Rotate *string `locationName:"rotate" type:"string" enum:"InputRotate"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s VideoSelector) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s VideoSelector) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *VideoSelector) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "VideoSelector"}
	if s.Pid != nil && *s.Pid < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Pid", 1))
	}
	if s.ProgramNumber != nil && *s.ProgramNumber < -2.147483648e+09 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("ProgramNumber", -2.147483648e+09))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetColorSpace sets the ColorSpace field's value.
func (s *VideoSelector) SetColorSpace(v string) *VideoSelector {
	s.ColorSpace = &v
	return s
}

// SetColorSpaceUsage sets the ColorSpaceUsage field's value.
func (s *VideoSelector) SetColorSpaceUsage(v string) *VideoSelector {
	s.ColorSpaceUsage = &v
	return s
}

// SetHdr10Metadata sets the Hdr10Metadata field's value.
func (s *VideoSelector) SetHdr10Metadata(v *Hdr10Metadata) *VideoSelector {
	s.Hdr10Metadata = v
	return s
}

// SetPid sets the Pid field's value.
func (s *VideoSelector) SetPid(v int64) *VideoSelector {
	s.Pid = &v
	return s
}

// SetProgramNumber sets the ProgramNumber field's value.
func (s *VideoSelector) SetProgramNumber(v int64) *VideoSelector {
	s.ProgramNumber = &v
	return s
}

// SetRotate sets the Rotate field's value.
func (s *VideoSelector) SetRotate(v string) *VideoSelector {
	s.Rotate = &v
	return s
}

// Required when you set (Codec) under (AudioDescriptions)>(CodecSettings) to
// the value WAV.
type WavSettings struct {
	_ struct{} `type:"structure"`

	// Specify Bit depth (BitDepth), in bits per sample, to choose the encoding
	// quality for this audio track.
	BitDepth *int64 `locationName:"bitDepth" min:"16" type:"integer"`

	// Set Channels to specify the number of channels in this output audio track.
	// With WAV, valid values 1, 2, 4, and 8. In the console, these values are Mono,
	// Stereo, 4-Channel, and 8-Channel, respectively.
	Channels *int64 `locationName:"channels" min:"1" type:"integer"`

	// The service defaults to using RIFF for WAV outputs. If your output audio
	// is likely to exceed 4 GB in file size, or if you otherwise need the extended
	// support of the RF64 format, set your output WAV file format to RF64.
	Format *string `locationName:"format" type:"string" enum:"WavFormat"`

	// Sample rate in Hz.
	SampleRate *int64 `locationName:"sampleRate" min:"8000" type:"integer"`
}

// String returns the string representation
func (s WavSettings) String() string {
	return awsutil.Prettify(s)
}

// GoString returns the string representation
func (s WavSettings) GoString() string {
	return s.String()
}

// Validate inspects the fields of the type to determine if they are valid.
func (s *WavSettings) Validate() error {
	invalidParams := request.ErrInvalidParams{Context: "WavSettings"}
	if s.BitDepth != nil && *s.BitDepth < 16 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("BitDepth", 16))
	}
	if s.Channels != nil && *s.Channels < 1 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("Channels", 1))
	}
	if s.SampleRate != nil && *s.SampleRate < 8000 {
		invalidParams.Add(request.NewErrParamMinValue("SampleRate", 8000))
	}

	if invalidParams.Len() > 0 {
		return invalidParams
	}
	return nil
}

// SetBitDepth sets the BitDepth field's value.
func (s *WavSettings) SetBitDepth(v int64) *WavSettings {
	s.BitDepth = &v
	return s
}

// SetChannels sets the Channels field's value.
func (s *WavSettings) SetChannels(v int64) *WavSettings {
	s.Channels = &v
	return s
}

// SetFormat sets the Format field's value.
func (s *WavSettings) SetFormat(v string) *WavSettings {
	s.Format = &v
	return s
}

// SetSampleRate sets the SampleRate field's value.
func (s *WavSettings) SetSampleRate(v int64) *WavSettings {
	s.SampleRate = &v
	return s
}

// Choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD when the input contains pre-mixed main audio
// + audio description (AD) as a stereo pair. The value for AudioType will be
// set to 3, which signals to downstream systems that this stream contains "broadcaster
// mixed AD". Note that the input received by the encoder must contain pre-mixed
// audio; the encoder does not perform the mixing. When you choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD,
// the encoder ignores any values you provide in AudioType and FollowInputAudioType.
// Choose NORMAL when the input does not contain pre-mixed audio + audio description
// (AD). In this case, the encoder will use any values you provide for AudioType
// and FollowInputAudioType.
const (
	// AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixBroadcasterMixedAd is a AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix enum value
	AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixBroadcasterMixedAd = "BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD"

	// AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixNormal is a AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix enum value
	AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMixNormal = "NORMAL"
)

// AAC Profile.
const (
	// AacCodecProfileLc is a AacCodecProfile enum value
	AacCodecProfileLc = "LC"

	// AacCodecProfileHev1 is a AacCodecProfile enum value
	AacCodecProfileHev1 = "HEV1"

	// AacCodecProfileHev2 is a AacCodecProfile enum value
	AacCodecProfileHev2 = "HEV2"
)

// Mono (Audio Description), Mono, Stereo, or 5.1 channel layout. Valid values
// depend on rate control mode and profile. "1.0 - Audio Description (Receiver
// Mix)" setting receives a stereo description plus control track and emits
// a mono AAC encode of the description track, with control data emitted in
// the PES header as per ETSI TS 101 154 Annex E.
const (
	// AacCodingModeAdReceiverMix is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeAdReceiverMix = "AD_RECEIVER_MIX"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode10 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode10 = "CODING_MODE_1_0"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode11 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode11 = "CODING_MODE_1_1"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode20 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode20 = "CODING_MODE_2_0"

	// AacCodingModeCodingMode51 is a AacCodingMode enum value
	AacCodingModeCodingMode51 = "CODING_MODE_5_1"
)

// Rate Control Mode.
const (
	// AacRateControlModeCbr is a AacRateControlMode enum value
	AacRateControlModeCbr = "CBR"

	// AacRateControlModeVbr is a AacRateControlMode enum value
	AacRateControlModeVbr = "VBR"
)

// Enables LATM/LOAS AAC output. Note that if you use LATM/LOAS AAC in an output,
// you must choose "No container" for the output container.
const (
	// AacRawFormatLatmLoas is a AacRawFormat enum value
	AacRawFormatLatmLoas = "LATM_LOAS"

	// AacRawFormatNone is a AacRawFormat enum value
	AacRawFormatNone = "NONE"
)

// Use MPEG-2 AAC instead of MPEG-4 AAC audio for raw or MPEG-2 Transport Stream
// containers.
const (
	// AacSpecificationMpeg2 is a AacSpecification enum value
	AacSpecificationMpeg2 = "MPEG2"

	// AacSpecificationMpeg4 is a AacSpecification enum value
	AacSpecificationMpeg4 = "MPEG4"
)

// VBR Quality Level - Only used if rate_control_mode is VBR.
const (
	// AacVbrQualityLow is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityLow = "LOW"

	// AacVbrQualityMediumLow is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityMediumLow = "MEDIUM_LOW"

	// AacVbrQualityMediumHigh is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityMediumHigh = "MEDIUM_HIGH"

	// AacVbrQualityHigh is a AacVbrQuality enum value
	AacVbrQualityHigh = "HIGH"
)

// Specifies the "Bitstream Mode" (bsmod) for the emitted AC-3 stream. See ATSC
// A/52-2012 for background on these values.
const (
	// Ac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain = "COMPLETE_MAIN"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeCommentary is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeCommentary = "COMMENTARY"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeDialogue is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeDialogue = "DIALOGUE"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeEmergency is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeEmergency = "EMERGENCY"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired = "HEARING_IMPAIRED"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeMusicAndEffects is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeMusicAndEffects = "MUSIC_AND_EFFECTS"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired = "VISUALLY_IMPAIRED"

	// Ac3BitstreamModeVoiceOver is a Ac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Ac3BitstreamModeVoiceOver = "VOICE_OVER"
)

// Dolby Digital coding mode. Determines number of channels.
const (
	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode10 is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode10 = "CODING_MODE_1_0"

	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode11 is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode11 = "CODING_MODE_1_1"

	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode20 is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode20 = "CODING_MODE_2_0"

	// Ac3CodingModeCodingMode32Lfe is a Ac3CodingMode enum value
	Ac3CodingModeCodingMode32Lfe = "CODING_MODE_3_2_LFE"
)

// If set to FILM_STANDARD, adds dynamic range compression signaling to the
// output bitstream as defined in the Dolby Digital specification.
const (
	// Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileFilmStandard is a Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile enum value
	Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileNone is a Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile enum value
	Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfileNone = "NONE"
)

// Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only
// valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
const (
	// Ac3LfeFilterEnabled is a Ac3LfeFilter enum value
	Ac3LfeFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Ac3LfeFilterDisabled is a Ac3LfeFilter enum value
	Ac3LfeFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+,
// or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied
// from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
const (
	// Ac3MetadataControlFollowInput is a Ac3MetadataControl enum value
	Ac3MetadataControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// Ac3MetadataControlUseConfigured is a Ac3MetadataControl enum value
	Ac3MetadataControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

// Acceleration configuration for the job.
const (
	// AccelerationModeDisabled is a AccelerationMode enum value
	AccelerationModeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// AccelerationModeEnabled is a AccelerationMode enum value
	AccelerationModeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// This setting only applies to H.264, H.265, and MPEG2 outputs. Use Insert
// AFD signaling (AfdSignaling) to specify whether the service includes AFD
// values in the output video data and what those values are. * Choose None
// to remove all AFD values from this output. * Choose Fixed to ignore input
// AFD values and instead encode the value specified in the job. * Choose Auto
// to calculate output AFD values based on the input AFD scaler data.
const (
	// AfdSignalingNone is a AfdSignaling enum value
	AfdSignalingNone = "NONE"

	// AfdSignalingAuto is a AfdSignaling enum value
	AfdSignalingAuto = "AUTO"

	// AfdSignalingFixed is a AfdSignaling enum value
	AfdSignalingFixed = "FIXED"
)

// You no longer need to specify the anti-alias filter. It's now automatically
// applied to all outputs. This property is deprecated.
const (
	// AntiAliasDisabled is a AntiAlias enum value
	AntiAliasDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// AntiAliasEnabled is a AntiAlias enum value
	AntiAliasEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Type of Audio codec.
const (
	// AudioCodecAac is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecAac = "AAC"

	// AudioCodecMp2 is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecMp2 = "MP2"

	// AudioCodecWav is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecWav = "WAV"

	// AudioCodecAiff is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecAiff = "AIFF"

	// AudioCodecAc3 is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecAc3 = "AC3"

	// AudioCodecEac3 is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecEac3 = "EAC3"

	// AudioCodecPassthrough is a AudioCodec enum value
	AudioCodecPassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"
)

// Enable this setting on one audio selector to set it as the default for the
// job. The service uses this default for outputs where it can't find the specified
// input audio. If you don't set a default, those outputs have no audio.
const (
	// AudioDefaultSelectionDefault is a AudioDefaultSelection enum value
	AudioDefaultSelectionDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// AudioDefaultSelectionNotDefault is a AudioDefaultSelection enum value
	AudioDefaultSelectionNotDefault = "NOT_DEFAULT"
)

// Choosing FOLLOW_INPUT will cause the ISO 639 language code of the output
// to follow the ISO 639 language code of the input. The language specified
// for languageCode' will be used when USE_CONFIGURED is selected or when FOLLOW_INPUT
// is selected but there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the input.
const (
	// AudioLanguageCodeControlFollowInput is a AudioLanguageCodeControl enum value
	AudioLanguageCodeControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// AudioLanguageCodeControlUseConfigured is a AudioLanguageCodeControl enum value
	AudioLanguageCodeControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

// Audio normalization algorithm to use. 1770-1 conforms to the CALM Act specification,
// 1770-2 conforms to the EBU R-128 specification.
const (
	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17701 is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithm enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17701 = "ITU_BS_1770_1"

	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17702 is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithm enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmItuBs17702 = "ITU_BS_1770_2"
)

// When enabled the output audio is corrected using the chosen algorithm. If
// disabled, the audio will be measured but not adjusted.
const (
	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlCorrectAudio is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlCorrectAudio = "CORRECT_AUDIO"

	// AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlMeasureOnly is a AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl enum value
	AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControlMeasureOnly = "MEASURE_ONLY"
)

// If set to LOG, log each output's audio track loudness to a CSV file.
const (
	// AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingLog is a AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging enum value
	AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingLog = "LOG"

	// AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingDontLog is a AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging enum value
	AudioNormalizationLoudnessLoggingDontLog = "DONT_LOG"
)

// If set to TRUE_PEAK, calculate and log the TruePeak for each output's audio
// track loudness.
const (
	// AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationTruePeak is a AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation enum value
	AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationTruePeak = "TRUE_PEAK"

	// AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationNone is a AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation enum value
	AudioNormalizationPeakCalculationNone = "NONE"
)

// Specifies the type of the audio selector.
const (
	// AudioSelectorTypePid is a AudioSelectorType enum value
	AudioSelectorTypePid = "PID"

	// AudioSelectorTypeTrack is a AudioSelectorType enum value
	AudioSelectorTypeTrack = "TRACK"

	// AudioSelectorTypeLanguageCode is a AudioSelectorType enum value
	AudioSelectorTypeLanguageCode = "LANGUAGE_CODE"
)

// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, if the input contains an ISO 639 audio_type, then
// that value is passed through to the output. If the input contains no ISO
// 639 audio_type, the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Otherwise
// the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Note that this field and
// audioType are both ignored if audioDescriptionBroadcasterMix is set to BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD.
const (
	// AudioTypeControlFollowInput is a AudioTypeControl enum value
	AudioTypeControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// AudioTypeControlUseConfigured is a AudioTypeControl enum value
	AudioTypeControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

// Optional. Choose a tag type that AWS Billing and Cost Management will use
// to sort your AWS Elemental MediaConvert costs on any billing report that
// you set up. Any transcoding outputs that don't have an associated tag will
// appear in your billing report unsorted. If you don't choose a valid value
// for this field, your job outputs will appear on the billing report unsorted.
const (
	// BillingTagsSourceQueue is a BillingTagsSource enum value
	BillingTagsSourceQueue = "QUEUE"

	// BillingTagsSourcePreset is a BillingTagsSource enum value
	BillingTagsSourcePreset = "PRESET"

	// BillingTagsSourceJobTemplate is a BillingTagsSource enum value
	BillingTagsSourceJobTemplate = "JOB_TEMPLATE"
)

// If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to
// centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly,
// setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output.
// If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter,
// the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates.
// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
const (
	// BurninSubtitleAlignmentCentered is a BurninSubtitleAlignment enum value
	BurninSubtitleAlignmentCentered = "CENTERED"

	// BurninSubtitleAlignmentLeft is a BurninSubtitleAlignment enum value
	BurninSubtitleAlignmentLeft = "LEFT"
)

// Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and
// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
const (
	// BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorNone is a BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorNone = "NONE"

	// BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

// Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for
// source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
// settings must match.
const (
	// BurninSubtitleFontColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorYellow is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorRed is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorRed = "RED"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorGreen is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// BurninSubtitleFontColorBlue is a BurninSubtitleFontColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleFontColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

// Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions
// that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already
// pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings
// must match.
const (
	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorYellow is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorRed is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorRed = "RED"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorGreen is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlue is a BurninSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleOutlineColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

// Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub
// font settings must match.
const (
	// BurninSubtitleShadowColorNone is a BurninSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleShadowColorNone = "NONE"

	// BurninSubtitleShadowColorBlack is a BurninSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleShadowColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// BurninSubtitleShadowColorWhite is a BurninSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	BurninSubtitleShadowColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

// Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify
// whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions
// grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to
// the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional
// to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.
const (
	// BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid is a BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid = "FIXED_GRID"

	// BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional is a BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional = "PROPORTIONAL"
)

// Specify the format for this set of captions on this output. The default format
// is embedded without SCTE-20. Other options are embedded with SCTE-20, burn-in,
// DVB-sub, SCC, SRT, teletext, TTML, and web-VTT. If you are using SCTE-20,
// choose SCTE-20 plus embedded (SCTE20_PLUS_EMBEDDED) to create an output that
// complies with the SCTE-43 spec. To create a non-compliant output where the
// embedded captions come first, choose Embedded plus SCTE-20 (EMBEDDED_PLUS_SCTE20).
const (
	// CaptionDestinationTypeBurnIn is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeBurnIn = "BURN_IN"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeDvbSub is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeDvbSub = "DVB_SUB"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeEmbedded is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeEmbeddedPlusScte20 is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeEmbeddedPlusScte20 = "EMBEDDED_PLUS_SCTE20"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeScte20PlusEmbedded is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeScte20PlusEmbedded = "SCTE20_PLUS_EMBEDDED"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeScc is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeScc = "SCC"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeSrt is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeSrt = "SRT"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeSmi is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeSmi = "SMI"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeTeletext is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeTeletext = "TELETEXT"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeTtml is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeTtml = "TTML"

	// CaptionDestinationTypeWebvtt is a CaptionDestinationType enum value
	CaptionDestinationTypeWebvtt = "WEBVTT"
)

// Use Source (SourceType) to identify the format of your input captions. The
// service cannot auto-detect caption format.
const (
	// CaptionSourceTypeAncillary is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeAncillary = "ANCILLARY"

	// CaptionSourceTypeDvbSub is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeDvbSub = "DVB_SUB"

	// CaptionSourceTypeEmbedded is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// CaptionSourceTypeScte20 is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeScte20 = "SCTE20"

	// CaptionSourceTypeScc is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeScc = "SCC"

	// CaptionSourceTypeTtml is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeTtml = "TTML"

	// CaptionSourceTypeStl is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeStl = "STL"

	// CaptionSourceTypeSrt is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeSrt = "SRT"

	// CaptionSourceTypeSmi is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeSmi = "SMI"

	// CaptionSourceTypeTeletext is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeTeletext = "TELETEXT"

	// CaptionSourceTypeNullSource is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeNullSource = "NULL_SOURCE"

	// CaptionSourceTypeImsc is a CaptionSourceType enum value
	CaptionSourceTypeImsc = "IMSC"
)

// When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client
// from saving media segments for later replay.
const (
	// CmafClientCacheDisabled is a CmafClientCache enum value
	CmafClientCacheDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// CmafClientCacheEnabled is a CmafClientCache enum value
	CmafClientCacheEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist
// generation.
const (
	// CmafCodecSpecificationRfc6381 is a CmafCodecSpecification enum value
	CmafCodecSpecificationRfc6381 = "RFC_6381"

	// CmafCodecSpecificationRfc4281 is a CmafCodecSpecification enum value
	CmafCodecSpecificationRfc4281 = "RFC_4281"
)

// Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable.
// Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.
const (
	// CmafEncryptionTypeSampleAes is a CmafEncryptionType enum value
	CmafEncryptionTypeSampleAes = "SAMPLE_AES"
)

// The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the
// key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed
// in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.
const (
	// CmafInitializationVectorInManifestInclude is a CmafInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	CmafInitializationVectorInManifestInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// CmafInitializationVectorInManifestExclude is a CmafInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	CmafInitializationVectorInManifestExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.
const (
	// CmafKeyProviderTypeStaticKey is a CmafKeyProviderType enum value
	CmafKeyProviderTypeStaticKey = "STATIC_KEY"
)

// When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
const (
	// CmafManifestCompressionGzip is a CmafManifestCompression enum value
	CmafManifestCompressionGzip = "GZIP"

	// CmafManifestCompressionNone is a CmafManifestCompression enum value
	CmafManifestCompressionNone = "NONE"
)

// Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for
// segment duration.
const (
	// CmafManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint is a CmafManifestDurationFormat enum value
	CmafManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint = "FLOATING_POINT"

	// CmafManifestDurationFormatInteger is a CmafManifestDurationFormat enum value
	CmafManifestDurationFormatInteger = "INTEGER"
)

// When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally
// segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES,
// separate segment files will be created.
const (
	// CmafSegmentControlSingleFile is a CmafSegmentControl enum value
	CmafSegmentControlSingleFile = "SINGLE_FILE"

	// CmafSegmentControlSegmentedFiles is a CmafSegmentControl enum value
	CmafSegmentControlSegmentedFiles = "SEGMENTED_FILES"
)

// Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag
// of variant manifest.
const (
	// CmafStreamInfResolutionInclude is a CmafStreamInfResolution enum value
	CmafStreamInfResolutionInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// CmafStreamInfResolutionExclude is a CmafStreamInfResolution enum value
	CmafStreamInfResolutionExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// When set to ENABLED, a DASH MPD manifest will be generated for this output.
const (
	// CmafWriteDASHManifestDisabled is a CmafWriteDASHManifest enum value
	CmafWriteDASHManifestDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// CmafWriteDASHManifestEnabled is a CmafWriteDASHManifest enum value
	CmafWriteDASHManifestEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// When set to ENABLED, an Apple HLS manifest will be generated for this output.
const (
	// CmafWriteHLSManifestDisabled is a CmafWriteHLSManifest enum value
	CmafWriteHLSManifestDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// CmafWriteHLSManifestEnabled is a CmafWriteHLSManifest enum value
	CmafWriteHLSManifestEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Enable Insert color metadata (ColorMetadata) to include color metadata in
// this output. This setting is enabled by default.
const (
	// ColorMetadataIgnore is a ColorMetadata enum value
	ColorMetadataIgnore = "IGNORE"

	// ColorMetadataInsert is a ColorMetadata enum value
	ColorMetadataInsert = "INSERT"
)

// If your input video has accurate color space metadata, or if you don't know
// about color space, leave this set to the default value FOLLOW. The service
// will automatically detect your input color space. If your input video has
// metadata indicating the wrong color space, or if your input video is missing
// color space metadata that should be there, specify the accurate color space
// here. If you choose HDR10, you can also correct inaccurate color space coefficients,
// using the HDR master display information controls. You must also set Color
// space usage (ColorSpaceUsage) to FORCE for the service to use these values.
const (
	// ColorSpaceFollow is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceFollow = "FOLLOW"

	// ColorSpaceRec601 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceRec601 = "REC_601"

	// ColorSpaceRec709 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceRec709 = "REC_709"

	// ColorSpaceHdr10 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceHdr10 = "HDR10"

	// ColorSpaceHlg2020 is a ColorSpace enum value
	ColorSpaceHlg2020 = "HLG_2020"
)

// Determines if colorspace conversion will be performed. If set to _None_,
// no conversion will be performed. If _Force 601_ or _Force 709_ are selected,
// conversion will be performed for inputs with differing colorspaces. An input's
// colorspace can be specified explicitly in the "Video Selector":#inputs-video_selector
// if necessary.
const (
	// ColorSpaceConversionNone is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionNone = "NONE"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForce601 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForce601 = "FORCE_601"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForce709 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForce709 = "FORCE_709"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForceHdr10 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForceHdr10 = "FORCE_HDR10"

	// ColorSpaceConversionForceHlg2020 is a ColorSpaceConversion enum value
	ColorSpaceConversionForceHlg2020 = "FORCE_HLG_2020"
)

// There are two sources for color metadata, the input file and the job configuration
// (in the Color space and HDR master display informaiton settings). The Color
// space usage setting controls which takes precedence. FORCE: The system will
// use color metadata supplied by user, if any. If the user does not supply
// color metadata, the system will use data from the source. FALLBACK: The system
// will use color metadata from the source. If source has no color metadata,
// the system will use user-supplied color metadata values if available.
const (
	// ColorSpaceUsageForce is a ColorSpaceUsage enum value
	ColorSpaceUsageForce = "FORCE"

	// ColorSpaceUsageFallback is a ColorSpaceUsage enum value
	ColorSpaceUsageFallback = "FALLBACK"
)

// The length of the term of your reserved queue pricing plan commitment.
const (
	// CommitmentOneYear is a Commitment enum value
	CommitmentOneYear = "ONE_YEAR"
)

// Container for this output. Some containers require a container settings object.
// If not specified, the default object will be created.
const (
	// ContainerTypeF4v is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeF4v = "F4V"

	// ContainerTypeIsmv is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeIsmv = "ISMV"

	// ContainerTypeM2ts is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeM2ts = "M2TS"

	// ContainerTypeM3u8 is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeM3u8 = "M3U8"

	// ContainerTypeCmfc is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeCmfc = "CMFC"

	// ContainerTypeMov is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMov = "MOV"

	// ContainerTypeMp4 is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMp4 = "MP4"

	// ContainerTypeMpd is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMpd = "MPD"

	// ContainerTypeMxf is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeMxf = "MXF"

	// ContainerTypeRaw is a ContainerType enum value
	ContainerTypeRaw = "RAW"
)

// Supports HbbTV specification as indicated
const (
	// DashIsoHbbtvComplianceHbbtv15 is a DashIsoHbbtvCompliance enum value
	DashIsoHbbtvComplianceHbbtv15 = "HBBTV_1_5"

	// DashIsoHbbtvComplianceNone is a DashIsoHbbtvCompliance enum value
	DashIsoHbbtvComplianceNone = "NONE"
)

// When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally
// segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES,
// separate segment files will be created.
const (
	// DashIsoSegmentControlSingleFile is a DashIsoSegmentControl enum value
	DashIsoSegmentControlSingleFile = "SINGLE_FILE"

	// DashIsoSegmentControlSegmentedFiles is a DashIsoSegmentControl enum value
	DashIsoSegmentControlSegmentedFiles = "SEGMENTED_FILES"
)

// When you enable Precise segment duration in manifests (writeSegmentTimelineInRepresentation),
// your DASH manifest shows precise segment durations. The segment duration
// information appears inside the SegmentTimeline element, inside SegmentTemplate
// at the Representation level. When this feature isn't enabled, the segment
// durations in your DASH manifest are approximate. The segment duration information
// appears in the duration attribute of the SegmentTemplate element.
const (
	// DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationEnabled is a DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation enum value
	DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationDisabled is a DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation enum value
	DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentationDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// This specifies how the encrypted file needs to be decrypted.
const (
	// DecryptionModeAesCtr is a DecryptionMode enum value
	DecryptionModeAesCtr = "AES_CTR"

	// DecryptionModeAesCbc is a DecryptionMode enum value
	DecryptionModeAesCbc = "AES_CBC"

	// DecryptionModeAesGcm is a DecryptionMode enum value
	DecryptionModeAesGcm = "AES_GCM"
)

// Only applies when you set Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to Deinterlace (DEINTERLACE)
// or Adaptive (ADAPTIVE). Motion adaptive interpolate (INTERPOLATE) produces
// sharper pictures, while blend (BLEND) produces smoother motion. Use (INTERPOLATE_TICKER)
// OR (BLEND_TICKER) if your source file includes a ticker, such as a scrolling
// headline at the bottom of the frame.
const (
	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolate is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"

	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolateTicker is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmInterpolateTicker = "INTERPOLATE_TICKER"

	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlend is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlend = "BLEND"

	// DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlendTicker is a DeinterlaceAlgorithm enum value
	DeinterlaceAlgorithmBlendTicker = "BLEND_TICKER"
)

// - When set to NORMAL (default), the deinterlacer does not convert frames
// that are tagged in metadata as progressive. It will only convert those that
// are tagged as some other type. - When set to FORCE_ALL_FRAMES, the deinterlacer
// converts every frame to progressive - even those that are already tagged
// as progressive. Turn Force mode on only if there is a good chance that the
// metadata has tagged frames as progressive when they are not progressive.
// Do not turn on otherwise; processing frames that are already progressive
// into progressive will probably result in lower quality video.
const (
	// DeinterlacerControlForceAllFrames is a DeinterlacerControl enum value
	DeinterlacerControlForceAllFrames = "FORCE_ALL_FRAMES"

	// DeinterlacerControlNormal is a DeinterlacerControl enum value
	DeinterlacerControlNormal = "NORMAL"
)

// Use Deinterlacer (DeinterlaceMode) to choose how the service will do deinterlacing.
// Default is Deinterlace. - Deinterlace converts interlaced to progressive.
// - Inverse telecine converts Hard Telecine 29.97i to progressive 23.976p.
// - Adaptive auto-detects and converts to progressive.
const (
	// DeinterlacerModeDeinterlace is a DeinterlacerMode enum value
	DeinterlacerModeDeinterlace = "DEINTERLACE"

	// DeinterlacerModeInverseTelecine is a DeinterlacerMode enum value
	DeinterlacerModeInverseTelecine = "INVERSE_TELECINE"

	// DeinterlacerModeAdaptive is a DeinterlacerMode enum value
	DeinterlacerModeAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"
)

// Optional field, defaults to DEFAULT. Specify DEFAULT for this operation to
// return your endpoints if any exist, or to create an endpoint for you and
// return it if one doesn't already exist. Specify GET_ONLY to return your endpoints
// if any exist, or an empty list if none exist.
const (
	// DescribeEndpointsModeDefault is a DescribeEndpointsMode enum value
	DescribeEndpointsModeDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// DescribeEndpointsModeGetOnly is a DescribeEndpointsMode enum value
	DescribeEndpointsModeGetOnly = "GET_ONLY"
)

// Applies only to 29.97 fps outputs. When this feature is enabled, the service
// will use drop-frame timecode on outputs. If it is not possible to use drop-frame
// timecode, the system will fall back to non-drop-frame. This setting is enabled
// by default when Timecode insertion (TimecodeInsertion) is enabled.
const (
	// DropFrameTimecodeDisabled is a DropFrameTimecode enum value
	DropFrameTimecodeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// DropFrameTimecodeEnabled is a DropFrameTimecode enum value
	DropFrameTimecodeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// If no explicit x_position or y_position is provided, setting alignment to
// centered will place the captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly,
// setting a left alignment will align captions to the bottom left of the output.
// If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter,
// the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates.
// This option is not valid for source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or
// teletext. These source settings are already pre-defined by the caption stream.
// All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
const (
	// DvbSubtitleAlignmentCentered is a DvbSubtitleAlignment enum value
	DvbSubtitleAlignmentCentered = "CENTERED"

	// DvbSubtitleAlignmentLeft is a DvbSubtitleAlignment enum value
	DvbSubtitleAlignmentLeft = "LEFT"
)

// Specifies the color of the rectangle behind the captions.All burn-in and
// DVB-Sub font settings must match.
const (
	// DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorNone is a DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorNone = "NONE"

	// DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleBackgroundColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

// Specifies the color of the burned-in captions. This option is not valid for
// source captions that are STL, 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings
// are already pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font
// settings must match.
const (
	// DvbSubtitleFontColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorYellow is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorRed is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorRed = "RED"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorGreen is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// DvbSubtitleFontColorBlue is a DvbSubtitleFontColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleFontColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

// Specifies font outline color. This option is not valid for source captions
// that are either 608/embedded or teletext. These source settings are already
// pre-defined by the caption stream. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings
// must match.
const (
	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorWhite = "WHITE"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorYellow is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorYellow = "YELLOW"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorRed is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorRed = "RED"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorGreen is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorGreen = "GREEN"

	// DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlue is a DvbSubtitleOutlineColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleOutlineColorBlue = "BLUE"
)

// Specifies the color of the shadow cast by the captions.All burn-in and DVB-Sub
// font settings must match.
const (
	// DvbSubtitleShadowColorNone is a DvbSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleShadowColorNone = "NONE"

	// DvbSubtitleShadowColorBlack is a DvbSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleShadowColorBlack = "BLACK"

	// DvbSubtitleShadowColorWhite is a DvbSubtitleShadowColor enum value
	DvbSubtitleShadowColorWhite = "WHITE"
)

// Only applies to jobs with input captions in Teletext or STL formats. Specify
// whether the spacing between letters in your captions is set by the captions
// grid or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to
// the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional
// to make the text easier to read if the captions are closed caption.
const (
	// DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid is a DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingFixedGrid = "FIXED_GRID"

	// DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional is a DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing enum value
	DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacingProportional = "PROPORTIONAL"
)

// If set to ATTENUATE_3_DB, applies a 3 dB attenuation to the surround channels.
// Only used for 3/2 coding mode.
const (
	// Eac3AttenuationControlAttenuate3Db is a Eac3AttenuationControl enum value
	Eac3AttenuationControlAttenuate3Db = "ATTENUATE_3_DB"

	// Eac3AttenuationControlNone is a Eac3AttenuationControl enum value
	Eac3AttenuationControlNone = "NONE"
)

// Specifies the "Bitstream Mode" (bsmod) for the emitted E-AC-3 stream. See
// ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E) for background on these values.
const (
	// Eac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeCompleteMain = "COMPLETE_MAIN"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeCommentary is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeCommentary = "COMMENTARY"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeEmergency is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeEmergency = "EMERGENCY"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeHearingImpaired = "HEARING_IMPAIRED"

	// Eac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired is a Eac3BitstreamMode enum value
	Eac3BitstreamModeVisuallyImpaired = "VISUALLY_IMPAIRED"
)

// Dolby Digital Plus coding mode. Determines number of channels.
const (
	// Eac3CodingModeCodingMode10 is a Eac3CodingMode enum value
	Eac3CodingModeCodingMode10 = "CODING_MODE_1_0"

	// Eac3CodingModeCodingMode20 is a Eac3CodingMode enum value
	Eac3CodingModeCodingMode20 = "CODING_MODE_2_0"

	// Eac3CodingModeCodingMode32 is a Eac3CodingMode enum value
	Eac3CodingModeCodingMode32 = "CODING_MODE_3_2"
)

// Activates a DC highpass filter for all input channels.
const (
	// Eac3DcFilterEnabled is a Eac3DcFilter enum value
	Eac3DcFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3DcFilterDisabled is a Eac3DcFilter enum value
	Eac3DcFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// Enables Dynamic Range Compression that restricts the absolute peak level
// for a signal.
const (
	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineNone is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineNone = "NONE"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineFilmLight = "FILM_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicStandard = "MUSIC_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineMusicLight = "MUSIC_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineSpeech is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLineSpeech = "SPEECH"
)

// Enables Heavy Dynamic Range Compression, ensures that the instantaneous signal
// peaks do not exceed specified levels.
const (
	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfNone is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfNone = "NONE"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmStandard = "FILM_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfFilmLight = "FILM_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicStandard is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicStandard = "MUSIC_STANDARD"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicLight is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfMusicLight = "MUSIC_LIGHT"

	// Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfSpeech is a Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf enum value
	Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRfSpeech = "SPEECH"
)

// When encoding 3/2 audio, controls whether the LFE channel is enabled
const (
	// Eac3LfeControlLfe is a Eac3LfeControl enum value
	Eac3LfeControlLfe = "LFE"

	// Eac3LfeControlNoLfe is a Eac3LfeControl enum value
	Eac3LfeControlNoLfe = "NO_LFE"
)

// Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only
// valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
const (
	// Eac3LfeFilterEnabled is a Eac3LfeFilter enum value
	Eac3LfeFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3LfeFilterDisabled is a Eac3LfeFilter enum value
	Eac3LfeFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+,
// or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied
// from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
const (
	// Eac3MetadataControlFollowInput is a Eac3MetadataControl enum value
	Eac3MetadataControlFollowInput = "FOLLOW_INPUT"

	// Eac3MetadataControlUseConfigured is a Eac3MetadataControl enum value
	Eac3MetadataControlUseConfigured = "USE_CONFIGURED"
)

// When set to WHEN_POSSIBLE, input DD+ audio will be passed through if it is
// present on the input. this detection is dynamic over the life of the transcode.
// Inputs that alternate between DD+ and non-DD+ content will have a consistent
// DD+ output as the system alternates between passthrough and encoding.
const (
	// Eac3PassthroughControlWhenPossible is a Eac3PassthroughControl enum value
	Eac3PassthroughControlWhenPossible = "WHEN_POSSIBLE"

	// Eac3PassthroughControlNoPassthrough is a Eac3PassthroughControl enum value
	Eac3PassthroughControlNoPassthrough = "NO_PASSTHROUGH"
)

// Controls the amount of phase-shift applied to the surround channels. Only
// used for 3/2 coding mode.
const (
	// Eac3PhaseControlShift90Degrees is a Eac3PhaseControl enum value
	Eac3PhaseControlShift90Degrees = "SHIFT_90_DEGREES"

	// Eac3PhaseControlNoShift is a Eac3PhaseControl enum value
	Eac3PhaseControlNoShift = "NO_SHIFT"
)

// Stereo downmix preference. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.
const (
	// Eac3StereoDownmixNotIndicated is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3StereoDownmixLoRo is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixLoRo = "LO_RO"

	// Eac3StereoDownmixLtRt is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixLtRt = "LT_RT"

	// Eac3StereoDownmixDpl2 is a Eac3StereoDownmix enum value
	Eac3StereoDownmixDpl2 = "DPL2"
)

// When encoding 3/2 audio, sets whether an extra center back surround channel
// is matrix encoded into the left and right surround channels.
const (
	// Eac3SurroundExModeNotIndicated is a Eac3SurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundExModeNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3SurroundExModeEnabled is a Eac3SurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundExModeEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3SurroundExModeDisabled is a Eac3SurroundExMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundExModeDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// When encoding 2/0 audio, sets whether Dolby Surround is matrix encoded into
// the two channels.
const (
	// Eac3SurroundModeNotIndicated is a Eac3SurroundMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundModeNotIndicated = "NOT_INDICATED"

	// Eac3SurroundModeEnabled is a Eac3SurroundMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundModeEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// Eac3SurroundModeDisabled is a Eac3SurroundMode enum value
	Eac3SurroundModeDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// When set to UPCONVERT, 608 data is both passed through via the "608 compatibility
// bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into 708. 708 data
// present in the source content will be discarded.
const (
	// EmbeddedConvert608To708Upconvert is a EmbeddedConvert608To708 enum value
	EmbeddedConvert608To708Upconvert = "UPCONVERT"

	// EmbeddedConvert608To708Disabled is a EmbeddedConvert608To708 enum value
	EmbeddedConvert608To708Disabled = "DISABLED"
)

// If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning
// of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed
// normally at the end.
const (
	// F4vMoovPlacementProgressiveDownload is a F4vMoovPlacement enum value
	F4vMoovPlacementProgressiveDownload = "PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD"

	// F4vMoovPlacementNormal is a F4vMoovPlacement enum value
	F4vMoovPlacementNormal = "NORMAL"
)

// If set to UPCONVERT, 608 caption data is both passed through via the "608
// compatibility bytes" fields of the 708 wrapper as well as translated into
// 708. 708 data present in the source content will be discarded.
const (
	// FileSourceConvert608To708Upconvert is a FileSourceConvert608To708 enum value
	FileSourceConvert608To708Upconvert = "UPCONVERT"

	// FileSourceConvert608To708Disabled is a FileSourceConvert608To708 enum value
	FileSourceConvert608To708Disabled = "DISABLED"
)

// Provide the font script, using an ISO 15924 script code, if the LanguageCode
// is not sufficient for determining the script type. Where LanguageCode or
// CustomLanguageCode is sufficient, use "AUTOMATIC" or leave unset.
const (
	// FontScriptAutomatic is a FontScript enum value
	FontScriptAutomatic = "AUTOMATIC"

	// FontScriptHans is a FontScript enum value
	FontScriptHans = "HANS"

	// FontScriptHant is a FontScript enum value
	FontScriptHant = "HANT"
)

// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
// quality.
const (
	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationOff is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationOff = "OFF"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationLow is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationLow = "LOW"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationMedium is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationMedium = "MEDIUM"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigh is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigh = "HIGH"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigher is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationHigher = "HIGHER"

	// H264AdaptiveQuantizationMax is a H264AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264AdaptiveQuantizationMax = "MAX"
)

// Specify an H.264 level that is consistent with your output video settings.
// If you aren't sure what level to specify, choose Auto (AUTO).
const (
	// H264CodecLevelAuto is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelAuto = "AUTO"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel1 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel1 = "LEVEL_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel11 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel11 = "LEVEL_1_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel12 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel12 = "LEVEL_1_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel13 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel13 = "LEVEL_1_3"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel2 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel2 = "LEVEL_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel21 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel21 = "LEVEL_2_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel22 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel22 = "LEVEL_2_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel3 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel3 = "LEVEL_3"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel31 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel31 = "LEVEL_3_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel32 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel32 = "LEVEL_3_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel4 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel4 = "LEVEL_4"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel41 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel41 = "LEVEL_4_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel42 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel42 = "LEVEL_4_2"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel5 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel5 = "LEVEL_5"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel51 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel51 = "LEVEL_5_1"

	// H264CodecLevelLevel52 is a H264CodecLevel enum value
	H264CodecLevelLevel52 = "LEVEL_5_2"
)

// H.264 Profile. High 4:2:2 and 10-bit profiles are only available with the
// AVC-I License.
const (
	// H264CodecProfileBaseline is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileBaseline = "BASELINE"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh = "HIGH"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh10bit is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh10bit = "HIGH_10BIT"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh422 is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh422 = "HIGH_422"

	// H264CodecProfileHigh42210bit is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileHigh42210bit = "HIGH_422_10BIT"

	// H264CodecProfileMain is a H264CodecProfile enum value
	H264CodecProfileMain = "MAIN"
)

// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
const (
	// H264DynamicSubGopAdaptive is a H264DynamicSubGop enum value
	H264DynamicSubGopAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// H264DynamicSubGopStatic is a H264DynamicSubGop enum value
	H264DynamicSubGopStatic = "STATIC"
)

// Entropy encoding mode. Use CABAC (must be in Main or High profile) or CAVLC.
const (
	// H264EntropyEncodingCabac is a H264EntropyEncoding enum value
	H264EntropyEncodingCabac = "CABAC"

	// H264EntropyEncodingCavlc is a H264EntropyEncoding enum value
	H264EntropyEncodingCavlc = "CAVLC"
)

// Choosing FORCE_FIELD disables PAFF encoding for interlaced outputs.
const (
	// H264FieldEncodingPaff is a H264FieldEncoding enum value
	H264FieldEncodingPaff = "PAFF"

	// H264FieldEncodingForceField is a H264FieldEncoding enum value
	H264FieldEncodingForceField = "FORCE_FIELD"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.
const (
	// H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
// job specification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
const (
	// H264FramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a H264FramerateControl enum value
	H264FramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H264FramerateControlSpecified is a H264FramerateControl enum value
	H264FramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
const (
	// H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a H264FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a H264FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H264FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

// If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames >
// 1.
const (
	// H264GopBReferenceDisabled is a H264GopBReference enum value
	H264GopBReferenceDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264GopBReferenceEnabled is a H264GopBReference enum value
	H264GopBReferenceEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Indicates if the GOP Size in H264 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds
// the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
const (
	// H264GopSizeUnitsFrames is a H264GopSizeUnits enum value
	H264GopSizeUnitsFrames = "FRAMES"

	// H264GopSizeUnitsSeconds is a H264GopSizeUnits enum value
	H264GopSizeUnitsSeconds = "SECONDS"
)

// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
// behavior depends on the input scan type, as follows. - If the source is interlaced,
// the output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will
// follow the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first"
// and "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will
// be interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
// on which of the Follow options you chose.
const (
	// H264InterlaceModeProgressive is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// H264InterlaceModeTopField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// H264InterlaceModeBottomField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// H264InterlaceModeFollowTopField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// H264InterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a H264InterlaceMode enum value
	H264InterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
const (
	// H264ParControlInitializeFromSource is a H264ParControl enum value
	H264ParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H264ParControlSpecified is a H264ParControl enum value
	H264ParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// Use Quality tuning level (H264QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
// use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass
// video encoding.
const (
	// H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePass is a H264QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePass = "SINGLE_PASS"

	// H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq is a H264QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H264QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq = "SINGLE_PASS_HQ"

	// H264QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq is a H264QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H264QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq = "MULTI_PASS_HQ"
)

// Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR),
// constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).
const (
	// H264RateControlModeVbr is a H264RateControlMode enum value
	H264RateControlModeVbr = "VBR"

	// H264RateControlModeCbr is a H264RateControlMode enum value
	H264RateControlModeCbr = "CBR"

	// H264RateControlModeQvbr is a H264RateControlMode enum value
	H264RateControlModeQvbr = "QVBR"
)

// Places a PPS header on each encoded picture, even if repeated.
const (
	// H264RepeatPpsDisabled is a H264RepeatPps enum value
	H264RepeatPpsDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264RepeatPpsEnabled is a H264RepeatPps enum value
	H264RepeatPpsEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
const (
	// H264SceneChangeDetectDisabled is a H264SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H264SceneChangeDetectDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264SceneChangeDetectEnabled is a H264SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H264SceneChangeDetectEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
const (
	// H264SlowPalDisabled is a H264SlowPal enum value
	H264SlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264SlowPalEnabled is a H264SlowPal enum value
	H264SlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
// complexity.
const (
	// H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Produces a bitstream compliant with SMPTE RP-2027.
const (
	// H264SyntaxDefault is a H264Syntax enum value
	H264SyntaxDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// H264SyntaxRp2027 is a H264Syntax enum value
	H264SyntaxRp2027 = "RP2027"
)

// This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate)
// field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors
// > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced
// Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive,
// Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output
// from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output
// to 29.97i.
const (
	// H264TelecineNone is a H264Telecine enum value
	H264TelecineNone = "NONE"

	// H264TelecineSoft is a H264Telecine enum value
	H264TelecineSoft = "SOFT"

	// H264TelecineHard is a H264Telecine enum value
	H264TelecineHard = "HARD"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
// complexity.
const (
	// H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H264TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.
const (
	// H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled is a H264UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled is a H264UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H264UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
// quality.
const (
	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationOff is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationOff = "OFF"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationLow is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationLow = "LOW"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationMedium is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationMedium = "MEDIUM"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigh is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigh = "HIGH"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigher is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationHigher = "HIGHER"

	// H265AdaptiveQuantizationMax is a H265AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265AdaptiveQuantizationMax = "MAX"
)

// Enables Alternate Transfer Function SEI message for outputs using Hybrid
// Log Gamma (HLG) Electro-Optical Transfer Function (EOTF).
const (
	// H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiDisabled is a H265AlternateTransferFunctionSei enum value
	H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiEnabled is a H265AlternateTransferFunctionSei enum value
	H265AlternateTransferFunctionSeiEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// H.265 Level.
const (
	// H265CodecLevelAuto is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelAuto = "AUTO"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel1 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel1 = "LEVEL_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel2 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel2 = "LEVEL_2"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel21 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel21 = "LEVEL_2_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel3 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel3 = "LEVEL_3"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel31 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel31 = "LEVEL_3_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel4 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel4 = "LEVEL_4"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel41 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel41 = "LEVEL_4_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel5 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel5 = "LEVEL_5"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel51 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel51 = "LEVEL_5_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel52 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel52 = "LEVEL_5_2"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel6 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel6 = "LEVEL_6"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel61 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel61 = "LEVEL_6_1"

	// H265CodecLevelLevel62 is a H265CodecLevel enum value
	H265CodecLevelLevel62 = "LEVEL_6_2"
)

// Represents the Profile and Tier, per the HEVC (H.265) specification. Selections
// are grouped as [Profile] / [Tier], so "Main/High" represents Main Profile
// with High Tier. 4:2:2 profiles are only available with the HEVC 4:2:2 License.
const (
	// H265CodecProfileMainMain is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMainMain = "MAIN_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMainHigh is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMainHigh = "MAIN_HIGH"

	// H265CodecProfileMain10Main is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain10Main = "MAIN10_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMain10High is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain10High = "MAIN10_HIGH"

	// H265CodecProfileMain4228bitMain is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain4228bitMain = "MAIN_422_8BIT_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMain4228bitHigh is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain4228bitHigh = "MAIN_422_8BIT_HIGH"

	// H265CodecProfileMain42210bitMain is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain42210bitMain = "MAIN_422_10BIT_MAIN"

	// H265CodecProfileMain42210bitHigh is a H265CodecProfile enum value
	H265CodecProfileMain42210bitHigh = "MAIN_422_10BIT_HIGH"
)

// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
const (
	// H265DynamicSubGopAdaptive is a H265DynamicSubGop enum value
	H265DynamicSubGopAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// H265DynamicSubGopStatic is a H265DynamicSubGop enum value
	H265DynamicSubGopStatic = "STATIC"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame to reduce flicker or 'pop' on I-frames.
const (
	// H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265FlickerAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
const (
	// H265FramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a H265FramerateControl enum value
	H265FramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H265FramerateControlSpecified is a H265FramerateControl enum value
	H265FramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
const (
	// H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a H265FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a H265FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	H265FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

// If enable, use reference B frames for GOP structures that have B frames >
// 1.
const (
	// H265GopBReferenceDisabled is a H265GopBReference enum value
	H265GopBReferenceDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265GopBReferenceEnabled is a H265GopBReference enum value
	H265GopBReferenceEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Indicates if the GOP Size in H265 is specified in frames or seconds. If seconds
// the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
const (
	// H265GopSizeUnitsFrames is a H265GopSizeUnits enum value
	H265GopSizeUnitsFrames = "FRAMES"

	// H265GopSizeUnitsSeconds is a H265GopSizeUnits enum value
	H265GopSizeUnitsSeconds = "SECONDS"
)

// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
// on which of the Follow options you chose.
const (
	// H265InterlaceModeProgressive is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// H265InterlaceModeTopField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// H265InterlaceModeBottomField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// H265InterlaceModeFollowTopField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// H265InterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a H265InterlaceMode enum value
	H265InterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
const (
	// H265ParControlInitializeFromSource is a H265ParControl enum value
	H265ParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// H265ParControlSpecified is a H265ParControl enum value
	H265ParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// Use Quality tuning level (H265QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
// use fast single-pass, high-quality singlepass, or high-quality multipass
// video encoding.
const (
	// H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePass is a H265QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePass = "SINGLE_PASS"

	// H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq is a H265QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H265QualityTuningLevelSinglePassHq = "SINGLE_PASS_HQ"

	// H265QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq is a H265QualityTuningLevel enum value
	H265QualityTuningLevelMultiPassHq = "MULTI_PASS_HQ"
)

// Use this setting to specify whether this output has a variable bitrate (VBR),
// constant bitrate (CBR) or quality-defined variable bitrate (QVBR).
const (
	// H265RateControlModeVbr is a H265RateControlMode enum value
	H265RateControlModeVbr = "VBR"

	// H265RateControlModeCbr is a H265RateControlMode enum value
	H265RateControlModeCbr = "CBR"

	// H265RateControlModeQvbr is a H265RateControlMode enum value
	H265RateControlModeQvbr = "QVBR"
)

// Specify Sample Adaptive Offset (SAO) filter strength. Adaptive mode dynamically
// selects best strength based on content
const (
	// H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeDefault is a H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode enum value
	H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeAdaptive is a H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode enum value
	H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeOff is a H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterMode enum value
	H265SampleAdaptiveOffsetFilterModeOff = "OFF"
)

// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
const (
	// H265SceneChangeDetectDisabled is a H265SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H265SceneChangeDetectDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265SceneChangeDetectEnabled is a H265SceneChangeDetect enum value
	H265SceneChangeDetectEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
const (
	// H265SlowPalDisabled is a H265SlowPal enum value
	H265SlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265SlowPalEnabled is a H265SlowPal enum value
	H265SlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
// complexity.
const (
	// H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// This field applies only if the Streams > Advanced > Framerate (framerate)
// field is set to 29.970. This field works with the Streams > Advanced > Preprocessors
// > Deinterlacer field (deinterlace_mode) and the Streams > Advanced > Interlaced
// Mode field (interlace_mode) to identify the scan type for the output: Progressive,
// Interlaced, Hard Telecine or Soft Telecine. - Hard: produces 29.97i output
// from 23.976 input. - Soft: produces 23.976; the player converts this output
// to 29.97i.
const (
	// H265TelecineNone is a H265Telecine enum value
	H265TelecineNone = "NONE"

	// H265TelecineSoft is a H265Telecine enum value
	H265TelecineSoft = "SOFT"

	// H265TelecineHard is a H265Telecine enum value
	H265TelecineHard = "HARD"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
// complexity.
const (
	// H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	H265TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Enables temporal layer identifiers in the encoded bitstream. Up to 3 layers
// are supported depending on GOP structure: I- and P-frames form one layer,
// reference B-frames can form a second layer and non-reference b-frames can
// form a third layer. Decoders can optionally decode only the lower temporal
// layers to generate a lower frame rate output. For example, given a bitstream
// with temporal IDs and with b-frames = 1 (i.e. IbPbPb display order), a decoder
// could decode all the frames for full frame rate output or only the I and
// P frames (lowest temporal layer) for a half frame rate output.
const (
	// H265TemporalIdsDisabled is a H265TemporalIds enum value
	H265TemporalIdsDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265TemporalIdsEnabled is a H265TemporalIds enum value
	H265TemporalIdsEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Enable use of tiles, allowing horizontal as well as vertical subdivision
// of the encoded pictures.
const (
	// H265TilesDisabled is a H265Tiles enum value
	H265TilesDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265TilesEnabled is a H265Tiles enum value
	H265TilesEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Inserts timecode for each frame as 4 bytes of an unregistered SEI message.
const (
	// H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled is a H265UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled is a H265UnregisteredSeiTimecode enum value
	H265UnregisteredSeiTimecodeEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Use this setting only for outputs encoded with H.265 that are in CMAF or
// DASH output groups. If you include writeMp4PackagingType in your JSON job
// specification for other outputs, your video might not work properly with
// downstream systems and video players. If the location of parameter set NAL
// units don't matter in your workflow, ignore this setting. The service defaults
// to marking your output as HEV1. Choose HVC1 to mark your output as HVC1.
// This makes your output compliant with this specification: ISO IECJTC1 SC29
// N13798 Text ISO/IEC FDIS 14496-15 3rd Edition. For these outputs, the service
// stores parameter set NAL units in the sample headers but not in the samples
// directly. Keep the default HEV1 to mark your output as HEV1. For these outputs,
// the service writes parameter set NAL units directly into the samples.
const (
	// H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHvc1 is a H265WriteMp4PackagingType enum value
	H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHvc1 = "HVC1"

	// H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHev1 is a H265WriteMp4PackagingType enum value
	H265WriteMp4PackagingTypeHev1 = "HEV1"
)

const (
	// HlsAdMarkersElemental is a HlsAdMarkers enum value
	HlsAdMarkersElemental = "ELEMENTAL"

	// HlsAdMarkersElementalScte35 is a HlsAdMarkers enum value
	HlsAdMarkersElementalScte35 = "ELEMENTAL_SCTE35"
)

// Four types of audio-only tracks are supported: Audio-Only Variant Stream
// The client can play back this audio-only stream instead of video in low-bandwidth
// scenarios. Represented as an EXT-X-STREAM-INF in the HLS manifest. Alternate
// Audio, Auto Select, Default Alternate rendition that the client should try
// to play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest
// with DEFAULT=YES, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate Audio, Auto Select, Not Default
// Alternate rendition that the client may try to play back by default. Represented
// as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=YES Alternate
// Audio, not Auto Select Alternate rendition that the client will not try to
// play back by default. Represented as an EXT-X-MEDIA in the HLS manifest with
// DEFAULT=NO, AUTOSELECT=NO
const (
	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelectDefault is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelectDefault = "ALTERNATE_AUDIO_AUTO_SELECT_DEFAULT"

	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelect is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioAutoSelect = "ALTERNATE_AUDIO_AUTO_SELECT"

	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioNotAutoSelect is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAlternateAudioNotAutoSelect = "ALTERNATE_AUDIO_NOT_AUTO_SELECT"

	// HlsAudioTrackTypeAudioOnlyVariantStream is a HlsAudioTrackType enum value
	HlsAudioTrackTypeAudioOnlyVariantStream = "AUDIO_ONLY_VARIANT_STREAM"
)

// Applies only to 608 Embedded output captions. Insert: Include CLOSED-CAPTIONS
// lines in the manifest. Specify at least one language in the CC1 Language
// Code field. One CLOSED-CAPTION line is added for each Language Code you specify.
// Make sure to specify the languages in the order in which they appear in the
// original source (if the source is embedded format) or the order of the caption
// selectors (if the source is other than embedded). Otherwise, languages in
// the manifest will not match up properly with the output captions. None: Include
// CLOSED-CAPTIONS=NONE line in the manifest. Omit: Omit any CLOSED-CAPTIONS
// line from the manifest.
const (
	// HlsCaptionLanguageSettingInsert is a HlsCaptionLanguageSetting enum value
	HlsCaptionLanguageSettingInsert = "INSERT"

	// HlsCaptionLanguageSettingOmit is a HlsCaptionLanguageSetting enum value
	HlsCaptionLanguageSettingOmit = "OMIT"

	// HlsCaptionLanguageSettingNone is a HlsCaptionLanguageSetting enum value
	HlsCaptionLanguageSettingNone = "NONE"
)

// When set to ENABLED, sets #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag, which prevents client
// from saving media segments for later replay.
const (
	// HlsClientCacheDisabled is a HlsClientCache enum value
	HlsClientCacheDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// HlsClientCacheEnabled is a HlsClientCache enum value
	HlsClientCacheEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist
// generation.
const (
	// HlsCodecSpecificationRfc6381 is a HlsCodecSpecification enum value
	HlsCodecSpecificationRfc6381 = "RFC_6381"

	// HlsCodecSpecificationRfc4281 is a HlsCodecSpecification enum value
	HlsCodecSpecificationRfc4281 = "RFC_4281"
)

// Indicates whether segments should be placed in subdirectories.
const (
	// HlsDirectoryStructureSingleDirectory is a HlsDirectoryStructure enum value
	HlsDirectoryStructureSingleDirectory = "SINGLE_DIRECTORY"

	// HlsDirectoryStructureSubdirectoryPerStream is a HlsDirectoryStructure enum value
	HlsDirectoryStructureSubdirectoryPerStream = "SUBDIRECTORY_PER_STREAM"
)

// Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable.
// Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.
const (
	// HlsEncryptionTypeAes128 is a HlsEncryptionType enum value
	HlsEncryptionTypeAes128 = "AES128"

	// HlsEncryptionTypeSampleAes is a HlsEncryptionType enum value
	HlsEncryptionTypeSampleAes = "SAMPLE_AES"
)

// When set to INCLUDE, writes I-Frame Only Manifest in addition to the HLS
// manifest
const (
	// HlsIFrameOnlyManifestInclude is a HlsIFrameOnlyManifest enum value
	HlsIFrameOnlyManifestInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsIFrameOnlyManifestExclude is a HlsIFrameOnlyManifest enum value
	HlsIFrameOnlyManifestExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the
// key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed
// in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.
const (
	// HlsInitializationVectorInManifestInclude is a HlsInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	HlsInitializationVectorInManifestInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsInitializationVectorInManifestExclude is a HlsInitializationVectorInManifest enum value
	HlsInitializationVectorInManifestExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// Indicates which type of key provider is used for encryption.
const (
	// HlsKeyProviderTypeSpeke is a HlsKeyProviderType enum value
	HlsKeyProviderTypeSpeke = "SPEKE"

	// HlsKeyProviderTypeStaticKey is a HlsKeyProviderType enum value
	HlsKeyProviderTypeStaticKey = "STATIC_KEY"
)

// When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
const (
	// HlsManifestCompressionGzip is a HlsManifestCompression enum value
	HlsManifestCompressionGzip = "GZIP"

	// HlsManifestCompressionNone is a HlsManifestCompression enum value
	HlsManifestCompressionNone = "NONE"
)

// Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for
// segment duration.
const (
	// HlsManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint is a HlsManifestDurationFormat enum value
	HlsManifestDurationFormatFloatingPoint = "FLOATING_POINT"

	// HlsManifestDurationFormatInteger is a HlsManifestDurationFormat enum value
	HlsManifestDurationFormatInteger = "INTEGER"
)

// Enable this setting to insert the EXT-X-SESSION-KEY element into the master
// playlist. This allows for offline Apple HLS FairPlay content protection.
const (
	// HlsOfflineEncryptedEnabled is a HlsOfflineEncrypted enum value
	HlsOfflineEncryptedEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// HlsOfflineEncryptedDisabled is a HlsOfflineEncrypted enum value
	HlsOfflineEncryptedDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// Indicates whether the .m3u8 manifest file should be generated for this HLS
// output group.
const (
	// HlsOutputSelectionManifestsAndSegments is a HlsOutputSelection enum value
	HlsOutputSelectionManifestsAndSegments = "MANIFESTS_AND_SEGMENTS"

	// HlsOutputSelectionSegmentsOnly is a HlsOutputSelection enum value
	HlsOutputSelectionSegmentsOnly = "SEGMENTS_ONLY"
)

// Includes or excludes EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME tag in .m3u8 manifest files.
// The value is calculated as follows: either the program date and time are
// initialized using the input timecode source, or the time is initialized using
// the input timecode source and the date is initialized using the timestamp_offset.
const (
	// HlsProgramDateTimeInclude is a HlsProgramDateTime enum value
	HlsProgramDateTimeInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsProgramDateTimeExclude is a HlsProgramDateTime enum value
	HlsProgramDateTimeExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// When set to SINGLE_FILE, emits program as a single media resource (.ts) file,
// uses #EXT-X-BYTERANGE tags to index segment for playback.
const (
	// HlsSegmentControlSingleFile is a HlsSegmentControl enum value
	HlsSegmentControlSingleFile = "SINGLE_FILE"

	// HlsSegmentControlSegmentedFiles is a HlsSegmentControl enum value
	HlsSegmentControlSegmentedFiles = "SEGMENTED_FILES"
)

// Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag
// of variant manifest.
const (
	// HlsStreamInfResolutionInclude is a HlsStreamInfResolution enum value
	HlsStreamInfResolutionInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// HlsStreamInfResolutionExclude is a HlsStreamInfResolution enum value
	HlsStreamInfResolutionExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// Indicates ID3 frame that has the timecode.
const (
	// HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameNone is a HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame enum value
	HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameNone = "NONE"

	// HlsTimedMetadataId3FramePriv is a HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame enum value
	HlsTimedMetadataId3FramePriv = "PRIV"

	// HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameTdrl is a HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame enum value
	HlsTimedMetadataId3FrameTdrl = "TDRL"
)

// Enable Deblock (InputDeblockFilter) to produce smoother motion in the output.
// Default is disabled. Only manaully controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed
// video inputs.
const (
	// InputDeblockFilterEnabled is a InputDeblockFilter enum value
	InputDeblockFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// InputDeblockFilterDisabled is a InputDeblockFilter enum value
	InputDeblockFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// Enable Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) to filter noise from the input. Default
// is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video
// inputs.
const (
	// InputDenoiseFilterEnabled is a InputDenoiseFilter enum value
	InputDenoiseFilterEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// InputDenoiseFilterDisabled is a InputDenoiseFilter enum value
	InputDenoiseFilterDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

// Use Filter enable (InputFilterEnable) to specify how the transcoding service
// applies the denoise and deblock filters. You must also enable the filters
// separately, with Denoise (InputDenoiseFilter) and Deblock (InputDeblockFilter).
// * Auto - The transcoding service determines whether to apply filtering, depending
// on input type and quality. * Disable - The input is not filtered. This is
// true even if you use the API to enable them in (InputDeblockFilter) and (InputDeblockFilter).
// * Force - The in put is filtered regardless of input type.
const (
	// InputFilterEnableAuto is a InputFilterEnable enum value
	InputFilterEnableAuto = "AUTO"

	// InputFilterEnableDisable is a InputFilterEnable enum value
	InputFilterEnableDisable = "DISABLE"

	// InputFilterEnableForce is a InputFilterEnable enum value
	InputFilterEnableForce = "FORCE"
)

// Set PSI control (InputPsiControl) for transport stream inputs to specify
// which data the demux process to scans. * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio
// and video. * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.
const (
	// InputPsiControlIgnorePsi is a InputPsiControl enum value
	InputPsiControlIgnorePsi = "IGNORE_PSI"

	// InputPsiControlUsePsi is a InputPsiControl enum value
	InputPsiControlUsePsi = "USE_PSI"
)

// Use Rotate (InputRotate) to specify how the service rotates your video. You
// can choose automatic rotation or specify a rotation. You can specify a clockwise
// rotation of 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. If your input video container is
// .mov or .mp4 and your input has rotation metadata, you can choose Automatic
// to have the service rotate your video according to the rotation specified
// in the metadata. The rotation must be within one degree of 90, 180, or 270
// degrees. If the rotation metadata specifies any other rotation, the service
// will default to no rotation. By default, the service does no rotation, even
// if your input video has rotation metadata. The service doesn't pass through
// rotation metadata.
const (
	// InputRotateDegree0 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegree0 = "DEGREE_0"

	// InputRotateDegrees90 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegrees90 = "DEGREES_90"

	// InputRotateDegrees180 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegrees180 = "DEGREES_180"

	// InputRotateDegrees270 is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateDegrees270 = "DEGREES_270"

	// InputRotateAuto is a InputRotate enum value
	InputRotateAuto = "AUTO"
)

// Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource) only affects the
// behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input
// clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Use this setting to specify
// whether the service counts frames by timecodes embedded in the video (EMBEDDED)
// or by starting the first frame at zero (ZEROBASED). In both cases, the timecode
// format is HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where FF is the frame number. Only
// set this to EMBEDDED if your source video has embedded timecodes.
const (
	// InputTimecodeSourceEmbedded is a InputTimecodeSource enum value
	InputTimecodeSourceEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// InputTimecodeSourceZerobased is a InputTimecodeSource enum value
	InputTimecodeSourceZerobased = "ZEROBASED"

	// InputTimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart is a InputTimecodeSource enum value
	InputTimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart = "SPECIFIEDSTART"
)

// A job's status can be SUBMITTED, PROGRESSING, COMPLETE, CANCELED, or ERROR.
const (
	// JobStatusSubmitted is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusSubmitted = "SUBMITTED"

	// JobStatusProgressing is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusProgressing = "PROGRESSING"

	// JobStatusComplete is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusComplete = "COMPLETE"

	// JobStatusCanceled is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusCanceled = "CANCELED"

	// JobStatusError is a JobStatus enum value
	JobStatusError = "ERROR"
)

// Optional. When you request a list of job templates, you can choose to list
// them alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
// specify, the service will list them by name.
const (
	// JobTemplateListByName is a JobTemplateListBy enum value
	JobTemplateListByName = "NAME"

	// JobTemplateListByCreationDate is a JobTemplateListBy enum value
	JobTemplateListByCreationDate = "CREATION_DATE"

	// JobTemplateListBySystem is a JobTemplateListBy enum value
	JobTemplateListBySystem = "SYSTEM"
)

// Specify the language, using the ISO 639-2 three-letter code listed at https://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/php/code_list.php.
const (
	// LanguageCodeEng is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEng = "ENG"

	// LanguageCodeSpa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSpa = "SPA"

	// LanguageCodeFra is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFra = "FRA"

	// LanguageCodeDeu is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDeu = "DEU"

	// LanguageCodeGer is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGer = "GER"

	// LanguageCodeZho is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeZho = "ZHO"

	// LanguageCodeAra is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAra = "ARA"

	// LanguageCodeHin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHin = "HIN"

	// LanguageCodeJpn is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeJpn = "JPN"

	// LanguageCodeRus is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRus = "RUS"

	// LanguageCodePor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePor = "POR"

	// LanguageCodeIta is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIta = "ITA"

	// LanguageCodeUrd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUrd = "URD"

	// LanguageCodeVie is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeVie = "VIE"

	// LanguageCodeKor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKor = "KOR"

	// LanguageCodePan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePan = "PAN"

	// LanguageCodeAbk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAbk = "ABK"

	// LanguageCodeAar is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAar = "AAR"

	// LanguageCodeAfr is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAfr = "AFR"

	// LanguageCodeAka is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAka = "AKA"

	// LanguageCodeSqi is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSqi = "SQI"

	// LanguageCodeAmh is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAmh = "AMH"

	// LanguageCodeArg is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeArg = "ARG"

	// LanguageCodeHye is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHye = "HYE"

	// LanguageCodeAsm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAsm = "ASM"

	// LanguageCodeAva is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAva = "AVA"

	// LanguageCodeAve is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAve = "AVE"

	// LanguageCodeAym is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAym = "AYM"

	// LanguageCodeAze is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeAze = "AZE"

	// LanguageCodeBam is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBam = "BAM"

	// LanguageCodeBak is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBak = "BAK"

	// LanguageCodeEus is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEus = "EUS"

	// LanguageCodeBel is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBel = "BEL"

	// LanguageCodeBen is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBen = "BEN"

	// LanguageCodeBih is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBih = "BIH"

	// LanguageCodeBis is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBis = "BIS"

	// LanguageCodeBos is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBos = "BOS"

	// LanguageCodeBre is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBre = "BRE"

	// LanguageCodeBul is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBul = "BUL"

	// LanguageCodeMya is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMya = "MYA"

	// LanguageCodeCat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCat = "CAT"

	// LanguageCodeKhm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKhm = "KHM"

	// LanguageCodeCha is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCha = "CHA"

	// LanguageCodeChe is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeChe = "CHE"

	// LanguageCodeNya is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNya = "NYA"

	// LanguageCodeChu is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeChu = "CHU"

	// LanguageCodeChv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeChv = "CHV"

	// LanguageCodeCor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCor = "COR"

	// LanguageCodeCos is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCos = "COS"

	// LanguageCodeCre is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCre = "CRE"

	// LanguageCodeHrv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHrv = "HRV"

	// LanguageCodeCes is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCes = "CES"

	// LanguageCodeDan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDan = "DAN"

	// LanguageCodeDiv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDiv = "DIV"

	// LanguageCodeNld is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNld = "NLD"

	// LanguageCodeDzo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeDzo = "DZO"

	// LanguageCodeEnm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEnm = "ENM"

	// LanguageCodeEpo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEpo = "EPO"

	// LanguageCodeEst is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEst = "EST"

	// LanguageCodeEwe is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEwe = "EWE"

	// LanguageCodeFao is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFao = "FAO"

	// LanguageCodeFij is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFij = "FIJ"

	// LanguageCodeFin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFin = "FIN"

	// LanguageCodeFrm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFrm = "FRM"

	// LanguageCodeFul is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFul = "FUL"

	// LanguageCodeGla is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGla = "GLA"

	// LanguageCodeGlg is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGlg = "GLG"

	// LanguageCodeLug is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLug = "LUG"

	// LanguageCodeKat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKat = "KAT"

	// LanguageCodeEll is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeEll = "ELL"

	// LanguageCodeGrn is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGrn = "GRN"

	// LanguageCodeGuj is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGuj = "GUJ"

	// LanguageCodeHat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHat = "HAT"

	// LanguageCodeHau is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHau = "HAU"

	// LanguageCodeHeb is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHeb = "HEB"

	// LanguageCodeHer is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHer = "HER"

	// LanguageCodeHmo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHmo = "HMO"

	// LanguageCodeHun is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeHun = "HUN"

	// LanguageCodeIsl is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIsl = "ISL"

	// LanguageCodeIdo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIdo = "IDO"

	// LanguageCodeIbo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIbo = "IBO"

	// LanguageCodeInd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeInd = "IND"

	// LanguageCodeIna is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIna = "INA"

	// LanguageCodeIle is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIle = "ILE"

	// LanguageCodeIku is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIku = "IKU"

	// LanguageCodeIpk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIpk = "IPK"

	// LanguageCodeGle is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGle = "GLE"

	// LanguageCodeJav is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeJav = "JAV"

	// LanguageCodeKal is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKal = "KAL"

	// LanguageCodeKan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKan = "KAN"

	// LanguageCodeKau is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKau = "KAU"

	// LanguageCodeKas is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKas = "KAS"

	// LanguageCodeKaz is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKaz = "KAZ"

	// LanguageCodeKik is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKik = "KIK"

	// LanguageCodeKin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKin = "KIN"

	// LanguageCodeKir is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKir = "KIR"

	// LanguageCodeKom is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKom = "KOM"

	// LanguageCodeKon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKon = "KON"

	// LanguageCodeKua is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKua = "KUA"

	// LanguageCodeKur is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeKur = "KUR"

	// LanguageCodeLao is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLao = "LAO"

	// LanguageCodeLat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLat = "LAT"

	// LanguageCodeLav is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLav = "LAV"

	// LanguageCodeLim is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLim = "LIM"

	// LanguageCodeLin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLin = "LIN"

	// LanguageCodeLit is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLit = "LIT"

	// LanguageCodeLub is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLub = "LUB"

	// LanguageCodeLtz is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeLtz = "LTZ"

	// LanguageCodeMkd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMkd = "MKD"

	// LanguageCodeMlg is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMlg = "MLG"

	// LanguageCodeMsa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMsa = "MSA"

	// LanguageCodeMal is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMal = "MAL"

	// LanguageCodeMlt is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMlt = "MLT"

	// LanguageCodeGlv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeGlv = "GLV"

	// LanguageCodeMri is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMri = "MRI"

	// LanguageCodeMar is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMar = "MAR"

	// LanguageCodeMah is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMah = "MAH"

	// LanguageCodeMon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeMon = "MON"

	// LanguageCodeNau is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNau = "NAU"

	// LanguageCodeNav is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNav = "NAV"

	// LanguageCodeNde is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNde = "NDE"

	// LanguageCodeNbl is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNbl = "NBL"

	// LanguageCodeNdo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNdo = "NDO"

	// LanguageCodeNep is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNep = "NEP"

	// LanguageCodeSme is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSme = "SME"

	// LanguageCodeNor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNor = "NOR"

	// LanguageCodeNob is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNob = "NOB"

	// LanguageCodeNno is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeNno = "NNO"

	// LanguageCodeOci is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOci = "OCI"

	// LanguageCodeOji is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOji = "OJI"

	// LanguageCodeOri is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOri = "ORI"

	// LanguageCodeOrm is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOrm = "ORM"

	// LanguageCodeOss is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOss = "OSS"

	// LanguageCodePli is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePli = "PLI"

	// LanguageCodeFas is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFas = "FAS"

	// LanguageCodePol is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePol = "POL"

	// LanguageCodePus is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodePus = "PUS"

	// LanguageCodeQue is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeQue = "QUE"

	// LanguageCodeQaa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeQaa = "QAA"

	// LanguageCodeRon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRon = "RON"

	// LanguageCodeRoh is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRoh = "ROH"

	// LanguageCodeRun is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeRun = "RUN"

	// LanguageCodeSmo is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSmo = "SMO"

	// LanguageCodeSag is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSag = "SAG"

	// LanguageCodeSan is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSan = "SAN"

	// LanguageCodeSrd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSrd = "SRD"

	// LanguageCodeSrb is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSrb = "SRB"

	// LanguageCodeSna is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSna = "SNA"

	// LanguageCodeIii is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeIii = "III"

	// LanguageCodeSnd is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSnd = "SND"

	// LanguageCodeSin is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSin = "SIN"

	// LanguageCodeSlk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSlk = "SLK"

	// LanguageCodeSlv is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSlv = "SLV"

	// LanguageCodeSom is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSom = "SOM"

	// LanguageCodeSot is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSot = "SOT"

	// LanguageCodeSun is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSun = "SUN"

	// LanguageCodeSwa is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSwa = "SWA"

	// LanguageCodeSsw is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSsw = "SSW"

	// LanguageCodeSwe is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeSwe = "SWE"

	// LanguageCodeTgl is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTgl = "TGL"

	// LanguageCodeTah is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTah = "TAH"

	// LanguageCodeTgk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTgk = "TGK"

	// LanguageCodeTam is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTam = "TAM"

	// LanguageCodeTat is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTat = "TAT"

	// LanguageCodeTel is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTel = "TEL"

	// LanguageCodeTha is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTha = "THA"

	// LanguageCodeBod is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeBod = "BOD"

	// LanguageCodeTir is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTir = "TIR"

	// LanguageCodeTon is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTon = "TON"

	// LanguageCodeTso is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTso = "TSO"

	// LanguageCodeTsn is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTsn = "TSN"

	// LanguageCodeTur is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTur = "TUR"

	// LanguageCodeTuk is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTuk = "TUK"

	// LanguageCodeTwi is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTwi = "TWI"

	// LanguageCodeUig is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUig = "UIG"

	// LanguageCodeUkr is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUkr = "UKR"

	// LanguageCodeUzb is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeUzb = "UZB"

	// LanguageCodeVen is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeVen = "VEN"

	// LanguageCodeVol is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeVol = "VOL"

	// LanguageCodeWln is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeWln = "WLN"

	// LanguageCodeCym is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeCym = "CYM"

	// LanguageCodeFry is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeFry = "FRY"

	// LanguageCodeWol is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeWol = "WOL"

	// LanguageCodeXho is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeXho = "XHO"

	// LanguageCodeYid is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeYid = "YID"

	// LanguageCodeYor is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeYor = "YOR"

	// LanguageCodeZha is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeZha = "ZHA"

	// LanguageCodeZul is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeZul = "ZUL"

	// LanguageCodeOrj is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeOrj = "ORJ"

	// LanguageCodeQpc is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeQpc = "QPC"

	// LanguageCodeTng is a LanguageCode enum value
	LanguageCodeTng = "TNG"
)

// Selects between the DVB and ATSC buffer models for Dolby Digital audio.
const (
	// M2tsAudioBufferModelDvb is a M2tsAudioBufferModel enum value
	M2tsAudioBufferModelDvb = "DVB"

	// M2tsAudioBufferModelAtsc is a M2tsAudioBufferModel enum value
	M2tsAudioBufferModelAtsc = "ATSC"
)

// Controls what buffer model to use for accurate interleaving. If set to MULTIPLEX,
// use multiplex buffer model. If set to NONE, this can lead to lower latency,
// but low-memory devices may not be able to play back the stream without interruptions.
const (
	// M2tsBufferModelMultiplex is a M2tsBufferModel enum value
	M2tsBufferModelMultiplex = "MULTIPLEX"

	// M2tsBufferModelNone is a M2tsBufferModel enum value
	M2tsBufferModelNone = "NONE"
)

// When set to VIDEO_AND_FIXED_INTERVALS, audio EBP markers will be added to
// partitions 3 and 4. The interval between these additional markers will be
// fixed, and will be slightly shorter than the video EBP marker interval. When
// set to VIDEO_INTERVAL, these additional markers will not be inserted. Only
// applicable when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers
// is EBP or EBP_LEGACY).
const (
	// M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoAndFixedIntervals is a M2tsEbpAudioInterval enum value
	M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoAndFixedIntervals = "VIDEO_AND_FIXED_INTERVALS"

	// M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoInterval is a M2tsEbpAudioInterval enum value
	M2tsEbpAudioIntervalVideoInterval = "VIDEO_INTERVAL"
)

// Selects which PIDs to place EBP markers on. They can either be placed only
// on the video PID, or on both the video PID and all audio PIDs. Only applicable
// when EBP segmentation markers are is selected (segmentationMarkers is EBP
// or EBP_LEGACY).
const (
	// M2tsEbpPlacementVideoAndAudioPids is a M2tsEbpPlacement enum value
	M2tsEbpPlacementVideoAndAudioPids = "VIDEO_AND_AUDIO_PIDS"

	// M2tsEbpPlacementVideoPid is a M2tsEbpPlacement enum value
	M2tsEbpPlacementVideoPid = "VIDEO_PID"
)

// Controls whether to include the ES Rate field in the PES header.
const (
	// M2tsEsRateInPesInclude is a M2tsEsRateInPes enum value
	M2tsEsRateInPesInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// M2tsEsRateInPesExclude is a M2tsEsRateInPes enum value
	M2tsEsRateInPesExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// Keep the default value (DEFAULT) unless you know that your audio EBP markers
// are incorrectly appearing before your video EBP markers. To correct this
// problem, set this value to Force (FORCE).
const (
	// M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderForce is a M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrder enum value
	M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderForce = "FORCE"

	// M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderDefault is a M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrder enum value
	M2tsForceTsVideoEbpOrderDefault = "DEFAULT"
)

// If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in
// the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.
const (
	// M2tsNielsenId3Insert is a M2tsNielsenId3 enum value
	M2tsNielsenId3Insert = "INSERT"

	// M2tsNielsenId3None is a M2tsNielsenId3 enum value
	M2tsNielsenId3None = "NONE"
)

// When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET, a Program Clock Reference value is inserted
// for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This is effective only
// when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.
const (
	// M2tsPcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket is a M2tsPcrControl enum value
	M2tsPcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket = "PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET"

	// M2tsPcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod is a M2tsPcrControl enum value
	M2tsPcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod = "CONFIGURED_PCR_PERIOD"
)

// When set to CBR, inserts null packets into transport stream to fill specified
// bitrate. When set to VBR, the bitrate setting acts as the maximum bitrate,
// but the output will not be padded up to that bitrate.
const (
	// M2tsRateModeVbr is a M2tsRateMode enum value
	M2tsRateModeVbr = "VBR"

	// M2tsRateModeCbr is a M2tsRateMode enum value
	M2tsRateModeCbr = "CBR"
)

// Enables SCTE-35 passthrough (scte35Source) to pass any SCTE-35 signals from
// input to output.
const (
	// M2tsScte35SourcePassthrough is a M2tsScte35Source enum value
	M2tsScte35SourcePassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"

	// M2tsScte35SourceNone is a M2tsScte35Source enum value
	M2tsScte35SourceNone = "NONE"
)

// Inserts segmentation markers at each segmentation_time period. rai_segstart
// sets the Random Access Indicator bit in the adaptation field. rai_adapt sets
// the RAI bit and adds the current timecode in the private data bytes. psi_segstart
// inserts PAT and PMT tables at the start of segments. ebp adds Encoder Boundary
// Point information to the adaptation field as per OpenCable specification
// OC-SP-EBP-I01-130118. ebp_legacy adds Encoder Boundary Point information
// to the adaptation field using a legacy proprietary format.
const (
	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersNone is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersNone = "NONE"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiSegstart is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiSegstart = "RAI_SEGSTART"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiAdapt is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersRaiAdapt = "RAI_ADAPT"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersPsiSegstart is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersPsiSegstart = "PSI_SEGSTART"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbp is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbp = "EBP"

	// M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbpLegacy is a M2tsSegmentationMarkers enum value
	M2tsSegmentationMarkersEbpLegacy = "EBP_LEGACY"
)

// The segmentation style parameter controls how segmentation markers are inserted
// into the transport stream. With avails, it is possible that segments may
// be truncated, which can influence where future segmentation markers are inserted.
// When a segmentation style of "reset_cadence" is selected and a segment is
// truncated due to an avail, we will reset the segmentation cadence. This means
// the subsequent segment will have a duration of of $segmentation_time seconds.
// When a segmentation style of "maintain_cadence" is selected and a segment
// is truncated due to an avail, we will not reset the segmentation cadence.
// This means the subsequent segment will likely be truncated as well. However,
// all segments after that will have a duration of $segmentation_time seconds.
// Note that EBP lookahead is a slight exception to this rule.
const (
	// M2tsSegmentationStyleMaintainCadence is a M2tsSegmentationStyle enum value
	M2tsSegmentationStyleMaintainCadence = "MAINTAIN_CADENCE"

	// M2tsSegmentationStyleResetCadence is a M2tsSegmentationStyle enum value
	M2tsSegmentationStyleResetCadence = "RESET_CADENCE"
)

// If INSERT, Nielsen inaudible tones for media tracking will be detected in
// the input audio and an equivalent ID3 tag will be inserted in the output.
const (
	// M3u8NielsenId3Insert is a M3u8NielsenId3 enum value
	M3u8NielsenId3Insert = "INSERT"

	// M3u8NielsenId3None is a M3u8NielsenId3 enum value
	M3u8NielsenId3None = "NONE"
)

// When set to PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET a Program Clock Reference value is inserted
// for every Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) header. This parameter is effective
// only when the PCR PID is the same as the video or audio elementary stream.
const (
	// M3u8PcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket is a M3u8PcrControl enum value
	M3u8PcrControlPcrEveryPesPacket = "PCR_EVERY_PES_PACKET"

	// M3u8PcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod is a M3u8PcrControl enum value
	M3u8PcrControlConfiguredPcrPeriod = "CONFIGURED_PCR_PERIOD"
)

// Enables SCTE-35 passthrough (scte35Source) to pass any SCTE-35 signals from
// input to output.
const (
	// M3u8Scte35SourcePassthrough is a M3u8Scte35Source enum value
	M3u8Scte35SourcePassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"

	// M3u8Scte35SourceNone is a M3u8Scte35Source enum value
	M3u8Scte35SourceNone = "NONE"
)

// Choose the type of motion graphic asset that you are providing for your overlay.
// You can choose either a .mov file or a series of .png files.
const (
	// MotionImageInsertionModeMov is a MotionImageInsertionMode enum value
	MotionImageInsertionModeMov = "MOV"

	// MotionImageInsertionModePng is a MotionImageInsertionMode enum value
	MotionImageInsertionModePng = "PNG"
)

// Specify whether your motion graphic overlay repeats on a loop or plays only
// once.
const (
	// MotionImagePlaybackOnce is a MotionImagePlayback enum value
	MotionImagePlaybackOnce = "ONCE"

	// MotionImagePlaybackRepeat is a MotionImagePlayback enum value
	MotionImagePlaybackRepeat = "REPEAT"
)

// When enabled, include 'clap' atom if appropriate for the video output settings.
const (
	// MovClapAtomInclude is a MovClapAtom enum value
	MovClapAtomInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// MovClapAtomExclude is a MovClapAtom enum value
	MovClapAtomExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times
// in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative,
// and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per
// 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.
const (
	// MovCslgAtomInclude is a MovCslgAtom enum value
	MovCslgAtomInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// MovCslgAtomExclude is a MovCslgAtom enum value
	MovCslgAtomExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// When set to XDCAM, writes MPEG2 video streams into the QuickTime file using
// XDCAM fourcc codes. This increases compatibility with Apple editors and players,
// but may decrease compatibility with other players. Only applicable when the
// video codec is MPEG2.
const (
	// MovMpeg2FourCCControlXdcam is a MovMpeg2FourCCControl enum value
	MovMpeg2FourCCControlXdcam = "XDCAM"

	// MovMpeg2FourCCControlMpeg is a MovMpeg2FourCCControl enum value
	MovMpeg2FourCCControlMpeg = "MPEG"
)

// If set to OMNEON, inserts Omneon-compatible padding
const (
	// MovPaddingControlOmneon is a MovPaddingControl enum value
	MovPaddingControlOmneon = "OMNEON"

	// MovPaddingControlNone is a MovPaddingControl enum value
	MovPaddingControlNone = "NONE"
)

// Always keep the default value (SELF_CONTAINED) for this setting.
const (
	// MovReferenceSelfContained is a MovReference enum value
	MovReferenceSelfContained = "SELF_CONTAINED"

	// MovReferenceExternal is a MovReference enum value
	MovReferenceExternal = "EXTERNAL"
)

// When enabled, file composition times will start at zero, composition times
// in the 'ctts' (composition time to sample) box for B-frames will be negative,
// and a 'cslg' (composition shift least greatest) box will be included per
// 14496-1 amendment 1. This improves compatibility with Apple players and tools.
const (
	// Mp4CslgAtomInclude is a Mp4CslgAtom enum value
	Mp4CslgAtomInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// Mp4CslgAtomExclude is a Mp4CslgAtom enum value
	Mp4CslgAtomExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// Inserts a free-space box immediately after the moov box.
const (
	// Mp4FreeSpaceBoxInclude is a Mp4FreeSpaceBox enum value
	Mp4FreeSpaceBoxInclude = "INCLUDE"

	// Mp4FreeSpaceBoxExclude is a Mp4FreeSpaceBox enum value
	Mp4FreeSpaceBoxExclude = "EXCLUDE"
)

// If set to PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD, the MOOV atom is relocated to the beginning
// of the archive as required for progressive downloading. Otherwise it is placed
// normally at the end.
const (
	// Mp4MoovPlacementProgressiveDownload is a Mp4MoovPlacement enum value
	Mp4MoovPlacementProgressiveDownload = "PROGRESSIVE_DOWNLOAD"

	// Mp4MoovPlacementNormal is a Mp4MoovPlacement enum value
	Mp4MoovPlacementNormal = "NORMAL"
)

// Adaptive quantization. Allows intra-frame quantizers to vary to improve visual
// quality.
const (
	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationOff is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationOff = "OFF"

	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationLow is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationLow = "LOW"

	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationMedium is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationMedium = "MEDIUM"

	// Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationHigh is a Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2AdaptiveQuantizationHigh = "HIGH"
)

// Use Level (Mpeg2CodecLevel) to set the MPEG-2 level for the video output.
const (
	// Mpeg2CodecLevelAuto is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelAuto = "AUTO"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelLow is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelLow = "LOW"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelMain is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelMain = "MAIN"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh1440 is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh1440 = "HIGH1440"

	// Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh is a Mpeg2CodecLevel enum value
	Mpeg2CodecLevelHigh = "HIGH"
)

// Use Profile (Mpeg2CodecProfile) to set the MPEG-2 profile for the video output.
const (
	// Mpeg2CodecProfileMain is a Mpeg2CodecProfile enum value
	Mpeg2CodecProfileMain = "MAIN"

	// Mpeg2CodecProfileProfile422 is a Mpeg2CodecProfile enum value
	Mpeg2CodecProfileProfile422 = "PROFILE_422"
)

// Choose Adaptive to improve subjective video quality for high-motion content.
// This will cause the service to use fewer B-frames (which infer information
// based on other frames) for high-motion portions of the video and more B-frames
// for low-motion portions. The maximum number of B-frames is limited by the
// value you provide for the setting B frames between reference frames (numberBFramesBetweenReferenceFrames).
const (
	// Mpeg2DynamicSubGopAdaptive is a Mpeg2DynamicSubGop enum value
	Mpeg2DynamicSubGopAdaptive = "ADAPTIVE"

	// Mpeg2DynamicSubGopStatic is a Mpeg2DynamicSubGop enum value
	Mpeg2DynamicSubGopStatic = "STATIC"
)

// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
const (
	// Mpeg2FramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a Mpeg2FramerateControl enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// Mpeg2FramerateControlSpecified is a Mpeg2FramerateControl enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
const (
	// Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	Mpeg2FramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

// Indicates if the GOP Size in MPEG2 is specified in frames or seconds. If
// seconds the system will convert the GOP Size into a frame count at run time.
const (
	// Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsFrames is a Mpeg2GopSizeUnits enum value
	Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsFrames = "FRAMES"

	// Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsSeconds is a Mpeg2GopSizeUnits enum value
	Mpeg2GopSizeUnitsSeconds = "SECONDS"
)

// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
// on which of the Follow options you chose.
const (
	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeProgressive is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeTopField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeBottomField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowTopField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a Mpeg2InterlaceMode enum value
	Mpeg2InterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

// Use Intra DC precision (Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision) to set quantization precision
// for intra-block DC coefficients. If you choose the value auto, the service
// will automatically select the precision based on the per-frame compression
// ratio.
const (
	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionAuto is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionAuto = "AUTO"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision8 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision8 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_8"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision9 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision9 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_9"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision10 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision10 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_10"

	// Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision11 is a Mpeg2IntraDcPrecision enum value
	Mpeg2IntraDcPrecisionIntraDcPrecision11 = "INTRA_DC_PRECISION_11"
)

// Using the API, enable ParFollowSource if you want the service to use the
// pixel aspect ratio from the input. Using the console, do this by choosing
// Follow source for Pixel aspect ratio.
const (
	// Mpeg2ParControlInitializeFromSource is a Mpeg2ParControl enum value
	Mpeg2ParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// Mpeg2ParControlSpecified is a Mpeg2ParControl enum value
	Mpeg2ParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// Use Quality tuning level (Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel) to specifiy whether to
// use single-pass or multipass video encoding.
const (
	// Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelSinglePass is a Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel enum value
	Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelSinglePass = "SINGLE_PASS"

	// Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelMultiPass is a Mpeg2QualityTuningLevel enum value
	Mpeg2QualityTuningLevelMultiPass = "MULTI_PASS"
)

// Use Rate control mode (Mpeg2RateControlMode) to specifiy whether the bitrate
// is variable (vbr) or constant (cbr).
const (
	// Mpeg2RateControlModeVbr is a Mpeg2RateControlMode enum value
	Mpeg2RateControlModeVbr = "VBR"

	// Mpeg2RateControlModeCbr is a Mpeg2RateControlMode enum value
	Mpeg2RateControlModeCbr = "CBR"
)

// Scene change detection (inserts I-frames on scene changes).
const (
	// Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectDisabled is a Mpeg2SceneChangeDetect enum value
	Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectEnabled is a Mpeg2SceneChangeDetect enum value
	Mpeg2SceneChangeDetectEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
const (
	// Mpeg2SlowPalDisabled is a Mpeg2SlowPal enum value
	Mpeg2SlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2SlowPalEnabled is a Mpeg2SlowPal enum value
	Mpeg2SlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame based on spatial variation of content
// complexity.
const (
	// Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2SpatialAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Produces a Type D-10 compatible bitstream (SMPTE 356M-2001).
const (
	// Mpeg2SyntaxDefault is a Mpeg2Syntax enum value
	Mpeg2SyntaxDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// Mpeg2SyntaxD10 is a Mpeg2Syntax enum value
	Mpeg2SyntaxD10 = "D_10"
)

// Only use Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to 29.970.
// Set Telecine (Mpeg2Telecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i output from
// a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output and leave
// converstion to the player.
const (
	// Mpeg2TelecineNone is a Mpeg2Telecine enum value
	Mpeg2TelecineNone = "NONE"

	// Mpeg2TelecineSoft is a Mpeg2Telecine enum value
	Mpeg2TelecineSoft = "SOFT"

	// Mpeg2TelecineHard is a Mpeg2Telecine enum value
	Mpeg2TelecineHard = "HARD"
)

// Adjust quantization within each frame based on temporal variation of content
// complexity.
const (
	// Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled is a Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled is a Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantization enum value
	Mpeg2TemporalAdaptiveQuantizationEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// COMBINE_DUPLICATE_STREAMS combines identical audio encoding settings across
// a Microsoft Smooth output group into a single audio stream.
const (
	// MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationCombineDuplicateStreams is a MsSmoothAudioDeduplication enum value
	MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationCombineDuplicateStreams = "COMBINE_DUPLICATE_STREAMS"

	// MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationNone is a MsSmoothAudioDeduplication enum value
	MsSmoothAudioDeduplicationNone = "NONE"
)

// Use Manifest encoding (MsSmoothManifestEncoding) to specify the encoding
// format for the server and client manifest. Valid options are utf8 and utf16.
const (
	// MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf8 is a MsSmoothManifestEncoding enum value
	MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf8 = "UTF8"

	// MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf16 is a MsSmoothManifestEncoding enum value
	MsSmoothManifestEncodingUtf16 = "UTF16"
)

// Use Noise reducer filter (NoiseReducerFilter) to select one of the following
// spatial image filtering functions. To use this setting, you must also enable
// Noise reducer (NoiseReducer). * Bilateral is an edge preserving noise reduction
// filter. * Mean (softest), Gaussian, Lanczos, and Sharpen (sharpest) are convolution
// filters. * Conserve is a min/max noise reduction filter. * Spatial is a frequency-domain
// filter based on JND principles.
const (
	// NoiseReducerFilterBilateral is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterBilateral = "BILATERAL"

	// NoiseReducerFilterMean is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterMean = "MEAN"

	// NoiseReducerFilterGaussian is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterGaussian = "GAUSSIAN"

	// NoiseReducerFilterLanczos is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterLanczos = "LANCZOS"

	// NoiseReducerFilterSharpen is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterSharpen = "SHARPEN"

	// NoiseReducerFilterConserve is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterConserve = "CONSERVE"

	// NoiseReducerFilterSpatial is a NoiseReducerFilter enum value
	NoiseReducerFilterSpatial = "SPATIAL"
)

// When you request lists of resources, you can optionally specify whether they
// are sorted in ASCENDING or DESCENDING order. Default varies by resource.
const (
	// OrderAscending is a Order enum value
	OrderAscending = "ASCENDING"

	// OrderDescending is a Order enum value
	OrderDescending = "DESCENDING"
)

// Type of output group (File group, Apple HLS, DASH ISO, Microsoft Smooth Streaming,
// CMAF)
const (
	// OutputGroupTypeHlsGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeHlsGroupSettings = "HLS_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeDashIsoGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeDashIsoGroupSettings = "DASH_ISO_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeFileGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeFileGroupSettings = "FILE_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeMsSmoothGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeMsSmoothGroupSettings = "MS_SMOOTH_GROUP_SETTINGS"

	// OutputGroupTypeCmafGroupSettings is a OutputGroupType enum value
	OutputGroupTypeCmafGroupSettings = "CMAF_GROUP_SETTINGS"
)

// Selects method of inserting SDT information into output stream. "Follow input
// SDT" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream. "Follow input
// SDT if present" copies SDT information from input stream to output stream
// if SDT information is present in the input, otherwise it will fall back on
// the user-defined values. Enter "SDT Manually" means user will enter the SDT
// information. "No SDT" means output stream will not contain SDT information.
const (
	// OutputSdtSdtFollow is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtFollow = "SDT_FOLLOW"

	// OutputSdtSdtFollowIfPresent is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtFollowIfPresent = "SDT_FOLLOW_IF_PRESENT"

	// OutputSdtSdtManual is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtManual = "SDT_MANUAL"

	// OutputSdtSdtNone is a OutputSdt enum value
	OutputSdtSdtNone = "SDT_NONE"
)

// Optional. When you request a list of presets, you can choose to list them
// alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
// specify, the service will list them by name.
const (
	// PresetListByName is a PresetListBy enum value
	PresetListByName = "NAME"

	// PresetListByCreationDate is a PresetListBy enum value
	PresetListByCreationDate = "CREATION_DATE"

	// PresetListBySystem is a PresetListBy enum value
	PresetListBySystem = "SYSTEM"
)

// Specifies whether the pricing plan for the queue is on-demand or reserved.
// For on-demand, you pay per minute, billed in increments of .01 minute. For
// reserved, you pay for the transcoding capacity of the entire queue, regardless
// of how much or how little you use it. Reserved pricing requires a 12-month
// commitment.
const (
	// PricingPlanOnDemand is a PricingPlan enum value
	PricingPlanOnDemand = "ON_DEMAND"

	// PricingPlanReserved is a PricingPlan enum value
	PricingPlanReserved = "RESERVED"
)

// Use Profile (ProResCodecProfile) to specifiy the type of Apple ProRes codec
// to use for this output.
const (
	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422 is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422 = "APPLE_PRORES_422"

	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Hq is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Hq = "APPLE_PRORES_422_HQ"

	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Lt is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Lt = "APPLE_PRORES_422_LT"

	// ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Proxy is a ProresCodecProfile enum value
	ProresCodecProfileAppleProres422Proxy = "APPLE_PRORES_422_PROXY"
)

// If you are using the console, use the Framerate setting to specify the frame
// rate for this output. If you want to keep the same frame rate as the input
// video, choose Follow source. If you want to do frame rate conversion, choose
// a frame rate from the dropdown list or choose Custom. The framerates shown
// in the dropdown list are decimal approximations of fractions. If you choose
// Custom, specify your frame rate as a fraction. If you are creating your transcoding
// job sepecification as a JSON file without the console, use FramerateControl
// to specify which value the service uses for the frame rate for this output.
// Choose INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE if you want the service to use the frame rate
// from the input. Choose SPECIFIED if you want the service to use the frame
// rate you specify in the settings FramerateNumerator and FramerateDenominator.
const (
	// ProresFramerateControlInitializeFromSource is a ProresFramerateControl enum value
	ProresFramerateControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// ProresFramerateControlSpecified is a ProresFramerateControl enum value
	ProresFramerateControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// When set to INTERPOLATE, produces smoother motion during frame rate conversion.
const (
	// ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop is a ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmDuplicateDrop = "DUPLICATE_DROP"

	// ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate is a ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithm enum value
	ProresFramerateConversionAlgorithmInterpolate = "INTERPOLATE"
)

// Use Interlace mode (InterlaceMode) to choose the scan line type for the output.
// * Top Field First (TOP_FIELD) and Bottom Field First (BOTTOM_FIELD) produce
// interlaced output with the entire output having the same field polarity (top
// or bottom first). * Follow, Default Top (FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD) and Follow, Default
// Bottom (FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD) use the same field polarity as the source. Therefore,
// behavior depends on the input scan type. - If the source is interlaced, the
// output will be interlaced with the same polarity as the source (it will follow
// the source). The output could therefore be a mix of "top field first" and
// "bottom field first". - If the source is progressive, the output will be
// interlaced with "top field first" or "bottom field first" polarity, depending
// on which of the Follow options you chose.
const (
	// ProresInterlaceModeProgressive is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeProgressive = "PROGRESSIVE"

	// ProresInterlaceModeTopField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeTopField = "TOP_FIELD"

	// ProresInterlaceModeBottomField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeBottomField = "BOTTOM_FIELD"

	// ProresInterlaceModeFollowTopField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeFollowTopField = "FOLLOW_TOP_FIELD"

	// ProresInterlaceModeFollowBottomField is a ProresInterlaceMode enum value
	ProresInterlaceModeFollowBottomField = "FOLLOW_BOTTOM_FIELD"
)

// Use (ProresParControl) to specify how the service determines the pixel aspect
// ratio. Set to Follow source (INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE) to use the pixel aspect
// ratio from the input. To specify a different pixel aspect ratio: Using the
// console, choose it from the dropdown menu. Using the API, set ProresParControl
// to (SPECIFIED) and provide for (ParNumerator) and (ParDenominator).
const (
	// ProresParControlInitializeFromSource is a ProresParControl enum value
	ProresParControlInitializeFromSource = "INITIALIZE_FROM_SOURCE"

	// ProresParControlSpecified is a ProresParControl enum value
	ProresParControlSpecified = "SPECIFIED"
)

// Enables Slow PAL rate conversion. 23.976fps and 24fps input is relabeled
// as 25fps, and audio is sped up correspondingly.
const (
	// ProresSlowPalDisabled is a ProresSlowPal enum value
	ProresSlowPalDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// ProresSlowPalEnabled is a ProresSlowPal enum value
	ProresSlowPalEnabled = "ENABLED"
)

// Only use Telecine (ProresTelecine) when you set Framerate (Framerate) to
// 29.970. Set Telecine (ProresTelecine) to Hard (hard) to produce a 29.97i
// output from a 23.976 input. Set it to Soft (soft) to produce 23.976 output
// and leave converstion to the player.
const (
	// ProresTelecineNone is a ProresTelecine enum value
	ProresTelecineNone = "NONE"

	// ProresTelecineHard is a ProresTelecine enum value
	ProresTelecineHard = "HARD"
)

// Optional. When you request a list of queues, you can choose to list them
// alphabetically by NAME or chronologically by CREATION_DATE. If you don't
// specify, the service will list them by creation date.
const (
	// QueueListByName is a QueueListBy enum value
	QueueListByName = "NAME"

	// QueueListByCreationDate is a QueueListBy enum value
	QueueListByCreationDate = "CREATION_DATE"
)

// Queues can be ACTIVE or PAUSED. If you pause a queue, jobs in that queue
// won't begin. Jobs that are running when you pause a queue continue to run
// until they finish or result in an error.
const (
	// QueueStatusActive is a QueueStatus enum value
	QueueStatusActive = "ACTIVE"

	// QueueStatusPaused is a QueueStatus enum value
	QueueStatusPaused = "PAUSED"
)

// Specifies whether the term of your reserved queue pricing plan is automatically
// extended (AUTO_RENEW) or expires (EXPIRE) at the end of the term.
const (
	// RenewalTypeAutoRenew is a RenewalType enum value
	RenewalTypeAutoRenew = "AUTO_RENEW"

	// RenewalTypeExpire is a RenewalType enum value
	RenewalTypeExpire = "EXPIRE"
)

// Specifies whether the pricing plan for your reserved queue is ACTIVE or EXPIRED.
const (
	// ReservationPlanStatusActive is a ReservationPlanStatus enum value
	ReservationPlanStatusActive = "ACTIVE"

	// ReservationPlanStatusExpired is a ReservationPlanStatus enum value
	ReservationPlanStatusExpired = "EXPIRED"
)

// Use Respond to AFD (RespondToAfd) to specify how the service changes the
// video itself in response to AFD values in the input. * Choose Respond to
// clip the input video frame according to the AFD value, input display aspect
// ratio, and output display aspect ratio. * Choose Passthrough to include the
// input AFD values. Do not choose this when AfdSignaling is set to (NONE).
// A preferred implementation of this workflow is to set RespondToAfd to (NONE)
// and set AfdSignaling to (AUTO). * Choose None to remove all input AFD values
// from this output.
const (
	// RespondToAfdNone is a RespondToAfd enum value
	RespondToAfdNone = "NONE"

	// RespondToAfdRespond is a RespondToAfd enum value
	RespondToAfdRespond = "RESPOND"

	// RespondToAfdPassthrough is a RespondToAfd enum value
	RespondToAfdPassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"
)

// Applies only if your input aspect ratio is different from your output aspect
// ratio. Choose "Stretch to output" to have the service stretch your video
// image to fit. Keep the setting "Default" to allow the service to letterbox
// your video instead. This setting overrides any positioning value you specify
// elsewhere in the job.
const (
	// ScalingBehaviorDefault is a ScalingBehavior enum value
	ScalingBehaviorDefault = "DEFAULT"

	// ScalingBehaviorStretchToOutput is a ScalingBehavior enum value
	ScalingBehaviorStretchToOutput = "STRETCH_TO_OUTPUT"
)

// Set Framerate (SccDestinationFramerate) to make sure that the captions and
// the video are synchronized in the output. Specify a frame rate that matches
// the frame rate of the associated video. If the video frame rate is 29.97,
// choose 29.97 dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_DROPFRAME) only if the video has
// video_insertion=true and drop_frame_timecode=true; otherwise, choose 29.97
// non-dropframe (FRAMERATE_29_97_NON_DROPFRAME).
const (
	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2397 is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2397 = "FRAMERATE_23_97"

	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate24 is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate24 = "FRAMERATE_24"

	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997Dropframe is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997Dropframe = "FRAMERATE_29_97_DROPFRAME"

	// SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997NonDropframe is a SccDestinationFramerate enum value
	SccDestinationFramerateFramerate2997NonDropframe = "FRAMERATE_29_97_NON_DROPFRAME"
)

// Use Position (Position) under under Timecode burn-in (TimecodeBurnIn) to
// specify the location the burned-in timecode on output video.
const (
	// TimecodeBurninPositionTopCenter is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionTopCenter = "TOP_CENTER"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionTopLeft is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionTopLeft = "TOP_LEFT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionTopRight is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionTopRight = "TOP_RIGHT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleLeft is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleLeft = "MIDDLE_LEFT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleCenter is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleCenter = "MIDDLE_CENTER"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleRight is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionMiddleRight = "MIDDLE_RIGHT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionBottomLeft is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionBottomLeft = "BOTTOM_LEFT"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionBottomCenter is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionBottomCenter = "BOTTOM_CENTER"

	// TimecodeBurninPositionBottomRight is a TimecodeBurninPosition enum value
	TimecodeBurninPositionBottomRight = "BOTTOM_RIGHT"
)

// Use Source (TimecodeSource) to set how timecodes are handled within this
// job. To make sure that your video, audio, captions, and markers are synchronized
// and that time-based features, such as image inserter, work correctly, choose
// the Timecode source option that matches your assets. All timecodes are in
// a 24-hour format with frame number (HH:MM:SS:FF). * Embedded (EMBEDDED) -
// Use the timecode that is in the input video. If no embedded timecode is in
// the source, the service will use Start at 0 (ZEROBASED) instead. * Start
// at 0 (ZEROBASED) - Set the timecode of the initial frame to 00:00:00:00.
// * Specified Start (SPECIFIEDSTART) - Set the timecode of the initial frame
// to a value other than zero. You use Start timecode (Start) to provide this
// value.
const (
	// TimecodeSourceEmbedded is a TimecodeSource enum value
	TimecodeSourceEmbedded = "EMBEDDED"

	// TimecodeSourceZerobased is a TimecodeSource enum value
	TimecodeSourceZerobased = "ZEROBASED"

	// TimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart is a TimecodeSource enum value
	TimecodeSourceSpecifiedstart = "SPECIFIEDSTART"
)

// Applies only to HLS outputs. Use this setting to specify whether the service
// inserts the ID3 timed metadata from the input in this output.
const (
	// TimedMetadataPassthrough is a TimedMetadata enum value
	TimedMetadataPassthrough = "PASSTHROUGH"

	// TimedMetadataNone is a TimedMetadata enum value
	TimedMetadataNone = "NONE"
)

// Pass through style and position information from a TTML-like input source
// (TTML, SMPTE-TT, CFF-TT) to the CFF-TT output or TTML output.
const (
	// TtmlStylePassthroughEnabled is a TtmlStylePassthrough enum value
	TtmlStylePassthroughEnabled = "ENABLED"

	// TtmlStylePassthroughDisabled is a TtmlStylePassthrough enum value
	TtmlStylePassthroughDisabled = "DISABLED"
)

const (
	// TypeSystem is a Type enum value
	TypeSystem = "SYSTEM"

	// TypeCustom is a Type enum value
	TypeCustom = "CUSTOM"
)

// Type of video codec
const (
	// VideoCodecFrameCapture is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecFrameCapture = "FRAME_CAPTURE"

	// VideoCodecH264 is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecH264 = "H_264"

	// VideoCodecH265 is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecH265 = "H_265"

	// VideoCodecMpeg2 is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecMpeg2 = "MPEG2"

	// VideoCodecProres is a VideoCodec enum value
	VideoCodecProres = "PRORES"
)

// Applies only to H.264, H.265, MPEG2, and ProRes outputs. Only enable Timecode
// insertion when the input frame rate is identical to the output frame rate.
// To include timecodes in this output, set Timecode insertion (VideoTimecodeInsertion)
// to PIC_TIMING_SEI. To leave them out, set it to DISABLED. Default is DISABLED.
// When the service inserts timecodes in an output, by default, it uses any
// embedded timecodes from the input. If none are present, the service will
// set the timecode for the first output frame to zero. To change this default
// behavior, adjust the settings under Timecode configuration (TimecodeConfig).
// In the console, these settings are located under Job > Job settings > Timecode
// configuration. Note - Timecode source under input settings (InputTimecodeSource)
// does not affect the timecodes that are inserted in the output. Source under
// Job settings > Timecode configuration (TimecodeSource) does.
const (
	// VideoTimecodeInsertionDisabled is a VideoTimecodeInsertion enum value
	VideoTimecodeInsertionDisabled = "DISABLED"

	// VideoTimecodeInsertionPicTimingSei is a VideoTimecodeInsertion enum value
	VideoTimecodeInsertionPicTimingSei = "PIC_TIMING_SEI"
)

// The service defaults to using RIFF for WAV outputs. If your output audio
// is likely to exceed 4 GB in file size, or if you otherwise need the extended
// support of the RF64 format, set your output WAV file format to RF64.
const (
	// WavFormatRiff is a WavFormat enum value
	WavFormatRiff = "RIFF"

	// WavFormatRf64 is a WavFormat enum value
	WavFormatRf64 = "RF64"
)